RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description-(V100R003C03_01)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03

IDU Hardware Description Issue

01

Date

2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 950

V100R003C03

iManager U2000

V100R006C00

Intended Audience This document is intended for: l

Network planning engineer

l

Hardware installation engineer

l

Installation and commissioning engineer

l

Field maintenance engineer

l

Data configuration engineer

l

System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following: l

Basics of digital microwave communication

l

Basics of the OptiX RTN 950

Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


ii


About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii


About This Document

Convention

Description

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03 This document is the first issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


iv


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1 1.1 Network Application..........................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Components........................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Radio Link Types...............................................................................................................................................7

2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................8 2.1 Chassis Structure................................................................................................................................................9 2.2 Installation Mode................................................................................................................................................9 2.3 Air Flow..............................................................................................................................................................9 2.4 IDU Labels.......................................................................................................................................................10

3 Boards............................................................................................................................................13 3.1 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................15 3.2 Board List.........................................................................................................................................................16 3.3 CST...................................................................................................................................................................19 3.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................19 3.3.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................19 3.3.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................21 3.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................23 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................29 3.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................30 3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................31 3.3.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................32 3.4 CSH..................................................................................................................................................................33 3.4.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................33 3.4.2 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................33 3.4.3 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................36 3.4.4 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................42 3.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................44 3.4.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................45 3.4.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................45 3.5 IF1.....................................................................................................................................................................46 3.5.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................47 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


v


Contents

3.5.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................47 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................48 3.5.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................53 3.5.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................55 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................56 3.5.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................56 3.6 IFU2..................................................................................................................................................................58 3.6.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................58 3.6.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................58 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................60 3.6.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................64 3.6.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................66 3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................67 3.6.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................67 3.7 IFX2..................................................................................................................................................................69 3.7.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................69 3.7.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................70 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................72 3.7.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................76 3.7.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................78 3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................79 3.7.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................80 3.8 ISU2..................................................................................................................................................................82 3.8.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................82 3.8.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................82 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................85 3.8.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................89 3.8.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................91 3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................92 3.8.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................92 3.9 ISX2..................................................................................................................................................................96 3.9.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................96 3.9.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................96 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................99 3.9.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................103 3.9.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................106 3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................107 3.9.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................107 3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA....................................................................................................................112 3.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................112 3.10.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................112 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................116 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


vi


Contents

3.10.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................119 3.10.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................125 3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................126 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................128 3.10.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................128 3.11 EMS6............................................................................................................................................................134 3.11.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................134 3.11.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................134 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................138 3.11.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................141 3.11.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................145 3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................146 3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................147 3.11.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................147 3.12 EFP8.............................................................................................................................................................150 3.12.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................150 3.12.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................150 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................153 3.12.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................156 3.12.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................159 3.12.6 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................159 3.12.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................160 3.13 SL1D/SL1DA...............................................................................................................................................160 3.13.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................161 3.13.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................161 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................162 3.13.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................165 3.13.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................167 3.13.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................168 3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................168 3.13.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................168 3.14 ML1/MD1.....................................................................................................................................................170 3.14.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................170 3.14.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................170 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................172 3.14.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................175 3.14.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................178 3.14.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................179 3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................179 3.14.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................180 3.15 SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................................................................................180 3.15.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................180 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


vii


Contents

3.15.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................181 3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................181 3.15.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................184 3.15.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................188 3.15.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................189 3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................189 3.15.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................190 3.16 AUX..............................................................................................................................................................190 3.16.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................191 3.16.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................191 3.16.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................191 3.16.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................192 3.16.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................195 3.16.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................196 3.17 PIU................................................................................................................................................................197 3.17.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................197 3.17.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................197 3.17.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................198 3.17.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................199 3.17.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................200 3.17.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................201 3.18 FAN..............................................................................................................................................................201 3.18.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................201 3.18.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................201 3.18.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................202 3.18.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................203 3.18.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................205 3.18.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................205 3.19 TCU6............................................................................................................................................................205 3.19.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................206 3.19.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................206 3.19.3 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................206 3.19.4 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................209 3.19.5 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................209

4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................210 4.1 E1 Panel..........................................................................................................................................................211 4.2 PDU................................................................................................................................................................213 4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................213 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle..........................................................................................................214 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode......................................................................................................................215

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................217 5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................219 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


viii


Contents

5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................219 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable..................................................................................................................................219 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................220 5.3 IF Jumper........................................................................................................................................................221 5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................222 5.5 Fiber Jumper...................................................................................................................................................223 5.6 STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................225 5.7 E1 Cables........................................................................................................................................................226 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment...................................................................................226 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.....................................................................................................230 5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and a DB44 Connector..............................232 5.8 Orderwire Cable.............................................................................................................................................234 5.9 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................234

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................238 A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................239 A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................239 A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................239 A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................244 A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs..................................................................246 A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................247 A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................250 A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................251 A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.............................................................................252 A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.......................................253 A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................254 A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................254 A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration.......................................255 A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.......257 A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................259 A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................260 A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................261 A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................263 A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.........264 A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................265 A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.................266 A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................271 A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................272 A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............273 A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually Aggregated................................................................................................................................................274 A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................275 A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter......................................275 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


ix


Contents

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table........................................................276 A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel............................................................277 A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters..............................................281 A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................282 A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................283 A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................283 A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................284 A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management..........................................................................285 A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control.....................................................................................286 A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................287 A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management............................................................................287 A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation............................................................287 A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..............................................................................290 A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................291 A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................292 A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................293 A.2 Radio Link Parameters..................................................................................................................................294 A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................294 A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................299 A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create...................................................................................306 A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................307 A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................309 A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................312 A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................316 A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................316 A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................317 A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters......................................................................................................327 A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................327 A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................331 A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters......................................................................................................................335 A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................335 A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................337 A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services ........................................................................................................................................................................341 A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................345 A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................347 A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion...........................................................................................350 A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces....................................................................................................................351 A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................351 A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes..................................................................351 A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes...........................................................352 A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................356 A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................356 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


x


Contents

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................360 A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...................................................362 A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes...........................................................365 A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes...............................................366 A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................369 A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes..................................................................369 A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.......................................................370 A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................371 A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................371 A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................372 A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes...............................................374 A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................376 A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................379 A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute........................................................................379 A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................387 A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.................................389 A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records...................................................................390 A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................391 A.5.6 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................392 A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute...........................................392 A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes..........................................................393 A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information................................................397 A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes....................................................398 A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................399 A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................400 A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................401 A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................402 A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports..............................................................................................402 A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................405 A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead......................................................................................................................406 A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead..............................................................406 A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs............................................................................................407 A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs..........................................................................................409 A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................410 A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane...............................................413 A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................413 A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation........................................................................413 A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.......................................................................................434 A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation.............445 A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.......................................................................446 A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service......................................................................................452 A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation..............................................................................463 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


xi


Contents

A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................463 A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services..................................................................................471 A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................476 A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................476 A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................479 A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation...........................................485 A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration..................................487 A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters.............................................487 A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters................................................493 A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST...............495 A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.....................503 A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................511 A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................512 A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.................................514 A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................514 A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT........................517 A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................521 A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation ..................................................................................................................................................................521 A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation ..................................................................................................................................................................522 A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................523 A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............524 A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................525 A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................526 A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling..............................527 A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............529 A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter.............................530 A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................................532 A.6.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................533 A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management..............................................................533 A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.................................................539 A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.......................................546 A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management...............................................................................548 A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy.............................................................................................554 A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration..................................561 A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.....................................................572 A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.....................................574 A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................574 A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation.............................................................574 A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services ..................................................................................................................................................................578 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


xii


Contents

A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service.............................................................................582 A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge...............................................................................................................................584 A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service......................................................................................................................................................588 A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................593 A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation............................................................599 A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries.........................................600 A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................601 A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................601 A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................604 A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling.........................................................610 A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters........................................................611 A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................612 A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information........................................614 A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information............................................615 A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute................................................616 A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling......................................................617 A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries ..................................................................................................................................................................618 A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries ..................................................................................................................................................................619 A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs...................................620 A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation....................................622 A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT................623 A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.......624 A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation......................................................................625 A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................626 A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs.............................................626 A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs.............................................627 A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs..............................................628 A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB....................................................630 A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT....................................................631 A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter...................................................632 A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.............................633 A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter......................................634 A.7.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................635 A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows....................................................635 A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.....................................................637 A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS......................................................639 A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS.............................................641 A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues................641 A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping............................................................643 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


xiii


Contents

A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................644 A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port...................................................................644 A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port....................................................................651 A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames...................................................................657 A.8 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................658 A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group...........................................................658 A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................659 A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................660 A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................661 A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services..........................................................................................................662 A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................663 A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels................................................663 A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel..........................................664 A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......668 A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels.........672 A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters...................................676 A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI.........................................................681 A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping................................................682 A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute......................................685 A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management......................................................688 A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation....................................................693 A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM...............................................................704 A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.................................................................708 A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.......................................................711 A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management...................................................713 A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation......................................................716 A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation...................................................721 A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........732 A.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................738 A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.....................................................................738 A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.....................................................747 A.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................760 A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management.............................760 A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration............................765 A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status........................................767 A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status...........................................768 A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management........................768 A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................770 A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation...........772 A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.....................................................................774 A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation......................................................778 A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management..................................................................783 Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


xiv


Contents

A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation..................................................792 A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.....................804 A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status................................808 A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status...................811 A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID.........................................................814 A.10 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................815 A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters.................................................................................................................815 A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table................................................................815 A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port ..................................................................................................................................................................817 A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet....................................................819 A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality...................................................822 A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control........................................825 A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.................................826 A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........827 A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching..............................829 A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...........830 A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.............831 A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status............................................................834 A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters..............................................................................................................835 A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..............................................................................836 A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain......................................................................................836 A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation......................................................................837 A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................838 A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...............................................................................838 A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General.......................................................................................838 A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................840 A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................841 A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................841 A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................842

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................846 C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................848 D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board................................................................865 E Glossary......................................................................................................................................867 E.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................868 E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................868 E.3 F-J...................................................................................................................................................................877 E.4 K-O.................................................................................................................................................................882 E.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................888 E.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................897

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


xv


1 Introduction

1

Introduction

About This Chapter The OptiX RTN 950 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series. 1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for mobile communication network or private networks. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable. 1.3 Radio Link Types The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


1


1 Introduction

1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for mobile communication network or private networks.

OptiX RTN 900 Product Family There are three types of OptiX RTN 900 products: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their site. l

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.

l

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.

l

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards. NOTE

All the products in the OptiX RTN 900 series use the same types of IF and service interface boards.

The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution is able to adapt to changing service scenarios brought about by evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore, this solution meets the transmission requirements of 2G and 3G networks while also allowing for integration with future LTE and 4G networks.

OptiX RTN 950 The OptiX RTN 950 is deployed at the access and convergence layers. Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950. Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950

FE

E1/ STM-1

E1 E1

FE E1/ STM-1

E1

Regional TDM Network FE/GE

E1 FE/GE

Regional Packet Network FE/GE

E1 FE

FE

OptiX RTN 950

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

E1

MSTP

NodeB


BTS

RNC

BSC

2


1 Introduction

NOTE

l In this solution, the OptiX RTN 950 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul network. l The OptiX RTN 950 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM) network or packet switching network (PSN). l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the Ethernet over SDH (EoSDH) function and Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) function. Therefore, packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology. Therefore, TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the VLAN sub-interface function. Therefore, MPLS packet services can be backhauled through a Layer 2 network.

1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.

IDU 950 The IDU 950 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 950 system. It receives and multiplexes services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and communications function. Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 950. Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950 Item

Description

Chassis height

2U

Pluggable

Supported

Number of microwave directions

1 to 6

RF configuration mode

1+0 non-protection configuration N+0 non-protection configuration (N ≤ 5) 1+1 protection configuration N+1 protection configuration (N ≤ 4) XPIC configuration

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


3


1 Introduction

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950

ODU The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies signals. The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz. NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 950 supports Item

Description Standard Power ODU

High-Power ODU

Low Capacity for PDH ODU

ODU type

SP, SPA

HP, HPA

LP

Frequency band

7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU)

6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 15/18/23/26/28/32/3 8 GHz (HP ODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (LP ODU)

6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU)

7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (HPA ODU)

QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM

Microwave modulation scheme

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


QPSK/16QAM

4


Item

1 Introduction

Description

Channel spacing

Standard Power ODU

High-Power ODU


3.5/7/14/28 MHz

7/14/28/40/56 MHz (6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1 8/23/26/28/32/38 GHz)

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

7/14/28 MHz (10.5 GHz)

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 950 supports Item

Description High-Power ODU


ODU type

XMC-2

XMC-1

Frequency band

7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz

7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz

Microwave modulation scheme

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing

7/14/28/40/56 MHz

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting. l

The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting method. The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an orthomode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that for installing a hybrid coupler.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


5


1 Introduction

Figure 1-3 Direct mounting

l

The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and singleor dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom). Figure 1-4 Separate mounting

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 950 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the corresponding feeder system.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


6


1 Introduction

1.3 Radio Link Types The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios. Table 1-4 Radio link types that the OptiX RTN 950 supports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Radio Link Type

System Control, Switching, and Timing Board

IF Board

ODU

Low-capacity PDH microwave

CST

IF1

Low capacity for PDH ODU

SDH/PDH microwave

CST

IF1

Standard power ODU or high power ODU

High-capacity SDH microwave

CST

ISU2


High-capacity SDH microwave supporting XPIC

CST

ISX2


Integrated IP microwave

CSH

IFU2


Integrated IP microwave supporting XPIC

CSH

CSH

CSH

CSH

CSH

ISU2 IFX2 ISX2



7


2 Chassis

2

Chassis

About This Chapter The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.3 Air Flow An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. 2.4 IDU Labels Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


8


2 Chassis

2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled. Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950. Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950

H D

W

2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. The IDU 950 can be installed: l

In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet

l

In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

l

In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l

In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

l

In a 19-inch open rack

l

In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment

l

On a wall

l

On a table

2.3 Air Flow An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


9


2 Chassis

Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 950 chassis. Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis

2.4 IDU Labels Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Label Description Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Label Name

Description

ESD protection label

Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.

Grounding label

Indicates the grounding position of the IDU chassis.


10


2 Chassis

Label

Label Name

Description

Fan warning label

Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating.

High temperature warning label

Indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. Wear protective gloves to handle the board.

Power caution label

Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks. For details, see Labels in 3.17.4 Front Panel.

合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD

Qualification card label

Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.

RoHS label

Indicates that the equipment complies with the related requirements specified in the RoHS directive.

HUAWEI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

华为技术有限公司

中国制造

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA


11


2 Chassis

Label

Label Name

Description

Product nameplate label

Indicates the product name and certification.

Operation guidance label

Instructs you to slightly pull the switch lever outwards before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

PULL

Label Position Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 950. Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels 合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

50 HUAWEI 华为技术有限公司

中国制作

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

!

! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


12


3 Boards

3

Boards

About This Chapter The IDU 950 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. 3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm. 3.2 Board List The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted. 3.3 CST The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board. 3.4 CSH The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. 3.5 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6 IFU2 The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7 IFX2 The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8 ISU2 The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.9 ISX2 The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


13


3 Boards

3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/ EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports. 3.11 EMS6 The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical modules. 3.12 EFP8 The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet plane through its bridging GE port. 3.13 SL1D/SL1DA The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function. 3.14 ML1/MD1 The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 3.15 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.16 AUX The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house only one AUX. 3.17 PIU The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply. 3.18 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling. 3.19 TCU6 The TDM connecting unit (TCU6) is a 6xE1 port conversion board. The TCU6 implements conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


14


3 Boards

3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm. NOTE

The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Board Appearance Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 950 chassis. Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board

H D

W

Bar Code The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code (as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers. Figure 3-2 Bar code Bar code

0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01

①

① ② ③ ④

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

②

③ ④

Internal code Board version Board name Board feature code


15


3 Boards

NOTE

Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example, the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the impedance of E1 ports.

3.2 Board List The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted. Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7 (CST/CSH)

Slot 8 (CST/CSH)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

NOTE

"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 3-1 List of IDU boards Board Acronym

Board Name

CST

TDM control, switching, and timing board

Valid Slot

Description

Slot 7 or slot 8

l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


16


Board Acronym

Board Name

CSH

Hybrid control, switching, and timing board

3 Boards

Valid Slot

Description

Slot 7 or slot 8

l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s. l Provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface.

ISU2

Universal IF board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes are Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the AM function. l Supports Ethernet frame header compression. l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA) function.

ISX2

Universal XPIC IF board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes are Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function. l Supports Ethernet frame header compression. l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA) function.

IF1

SDH IF board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.

IFU2

Universal IF board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave. l Supports the AM function.

IFX2

Universal XPIC IF board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave. l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


17


Board Acronym

Board Name

SL1D

3 Boards

Valid Slot

Description

2xSTM-1 interface board

Slot 1 to slot 6

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/ electrical interfaces.

SL1DA

2xSTM-1 interface board

Slot 1 to slot 6

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/ electrical interfaces.

EM6T/EM6TA

6-port RJ45 Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet interface board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

4-port RJ45 + 2port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet interface board

Slot 1 to slot 6

8-port RJ45 FE EoPDH processing board with the switching function

Slot 1 to slot 6

4-port RJ45 and 2-port SFP FE/ GE EoSDH processing board with the switching function

Slot 1 to slot 6

16xE1 (Smart) tributary board

Slot 1 to slot 6

EM6F/EM6FA

EFP8

EMS6

ML1

l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface. l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces. l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE interface. l Supports the processing of EoPDH services. l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services. l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. l Supports the processing of EoSDH services. l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services. l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

MD1

32xE1 (Smart) tributary board

Slot 1 to slot 6

l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

SP3S

16xE1 tributary board

Slot 1 to slot 6

Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces.

SP3D

32xE1 tributary board

Slot 1 to slot 6

Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or TDM 120-ohm E1 interfaces.

AUX

Auxiliary interface board

Slot 1 to slot 6

Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and fourinput and two-output external alarm interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


18


Board Acronym

Board Name

TCU6

3 Boards

Valid Slot

Description

6xE1 connector conversion board

Slot 1 to slot 6

Provides one DB44 connector and six RJ45 connectors. When being used with an E1 tributary board and an Anea 96 to DB44 transit cable, it converts E1 interfaces 1 to 6 on the Anea 96 connector into RJ45 connectors.

PIU

Power board

Slot 9 or slot 10

Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.

FAN

Fan board

Slot 11

Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CST The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the CST is SL91.

3.3.2 Functions and Features The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports. Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CST supports. Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Cross-connect capacity

Supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

System control and communication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE.

Clock source

Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.

Clock

The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Radio link clock Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


19


Function and Feature Clock protection

3 Boards

Description Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

External clock port

1

DCN

Outband DCN

Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.

Protection

1+1 hot standby

Supported

Auxiliary ports and management ports

Ethernet NM port

1

NM serial port

1

NE cascading port

1

Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet

1

Warm reset and cold reset

Supported

In-service FPGA loading

Supported

Board manufacturing information query

Supported

Board power consumption information query

Supported

Board temperature detection

Supported

Board voltage detection

Supported

Detection of indicators on the other boards

Supported

Hot swapping function

Supported

OM

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The specifications of port comply with RS-485.


20


3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description

Pluggable CF card

Supported

3.3.3 Working Principle The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST Backplane

Cross-connect unit

TDM service Service board

Control bus

FE signal

Ethernet NM port NM serial port

NE cascading port

System control and communication unit of the paired board

System control and communication unit

Clock signal required by other boards

Monitoring signal

Clock unit

Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet /Time port 2

Time port 1 Clock port

External clock signal Power supplied to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Clock unit of the paired board

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans

System Control and Communication Unit The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.

l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


21


3 Boards

l

The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.

l

The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit.

l

The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port.

l

The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus.

l

The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus.

l

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading.

l

The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

l

The system control and communication unit on a CST board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the paired CST board by carrying FE signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards is achieved.

Cross-Connect Unit The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit Source TDM service unit

Higher order cross-connect module HOXC

SinkTDM service unit

Lower order cross-connect module LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


22


3 Boards

If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

Clock Unit l

The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.

l

The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.

Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.

l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU.

l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.

3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

CST

STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1

TOD2

Indicators Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)

The board is working properly.

On (red)

The board hardware is faulty.


23


Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.


The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (green)

l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red)

l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

SRV

On (green)

The clock is working properly.

On (red)

The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs.

On (green)

The system is working properly.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.

Off

In an unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


24


3 Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT

On (green)

In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Clock Ports and Management Ports Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports Port

Description

NMS/COM

Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

EXT

NE cascade port

CLK/TOD1

External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), or wayside E1 port

TOD2


Connector Type

RJ45

NOTE

l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time. l The TOD2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900 V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only. l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


25


3 Boards

Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port

NMS/COM

Pin

Signal

1

Transmitting data (+)

2

Transmitting data (-)

3

Receiving data (+)

4

Grounding end of the NM serial port

5

Receive end of the NM serial port

6

Receiving data (-)

7

Not defined

8

Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port

EXT

Pin

Signal

1


2


3

Receiving data (+)

6

Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8

Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-7 provides status explanation for these indicators. Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On

The link is working properly.

Off

The link is interrupted.

On or blinking

The port is transmitting or receiving data.

Off

The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

ACT (yellow)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


26


3 Boards

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.

Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.

CST


Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1 TOD2

CST


LAN

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1 TOD2

NOTE

When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CST boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port of the working CST board, if possible.

Table 3-8 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port Pin

Working Mode External Clock

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1

Signal input (-)

2

Signal input (+)

3

Not defined

4

Signal output (-)

5

signal output (+)

6

Not defined

7

Not defined

8

Not defined


27


3 Boards

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-9 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port. Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port Pin

Working Mode Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet

1

Not defined

2

Not defined

3

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

4

Grounding end

5

Grounding end

6

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

7

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

8

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

Buttons Table 3-10 Buttons Button

Name

Description

CF RCV

CF configuration restoration button

After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.

RST

Warm reset button

After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.

Latches There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board, you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition, rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/ protection switching. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


28


3 Boards

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function. NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

ON DIP

1 2 3 4

2

1

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1

2

3

4

0

0

0

0

Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.

0

0

0

1

The value is reserved.


29


3 Boards

Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa 1

2

3

4

0

0

1

0

Indicates that a memory self-check is running.

0

0

1

1

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

0

1

0

0

Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running.

0

1

0

1

Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

0

1

1

0

Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

0

1

1

1

The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.)

1

0

0

0


1

0

0

1

Restores the data of the CF card.

1

0

1

0

Erases data in the system parameter area.

1

0

1

1

Erases databases.

1

1

0

0

Erases NE software, including patches.

1

1

0

1

Erases databases and NE software, including patches.

1

1

1

0

Erases all data in the file system.

1

1

1

1

Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.3.6 Valid Slots The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on the NMS is the same as its physical slot.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


30


3 Boards

Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7 (CST)

Slot 8 (CST)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7 (CST)

Slot 8 (CST)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Table 3-12 Slot allocation Item

Description

Slot allocation priority

Slot 7 > Slot 8

3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.

Related References A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


31


3 Boards

3.3.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Cross-Connection Capability The CST supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item

Performance

External synchronization source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy

Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)

2048

Impedance (ohm)

120

Interface characteristics

Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.


32


3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior Item

Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D)

22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm

Weight

0.72 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption: < 20.7 W

3.4 CSH The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.

3.4.1 Version Description The functional version of the CSH is SL91.

3.4.2 Working Principle The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


33


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH Backplane

GE bus

Packet switching unit

Service board

TDM service

Cross-connect unit

Service board

Control bus

Ethernet NM port NM serial port

FE signal System control and communication unit

NE cascading port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet /Time port 2 Time port 1 Clock port

System control and communication unit of the paired board

Monitoring signal

Clock unit

Clock signal required by other boards Clock unit of the paired board

External clock signal Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supplied to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans

System Control and Communication Unit The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.

l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.

l

The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.

l

The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet service packets.

l

The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the control bus.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


34


3 Boards

l

The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit.

l

The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port.

l

The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus.

l

The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus.

l

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading.

l

The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

l

The system control and communication unit on a CSH board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the paired CSH board by carrying FE signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards is achieved.

Packet Switching Unit The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet). l

After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.

l

After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet board.

Cross-Connect Unit The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-13 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


35


3 Boards

Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit Source TDM service unit

Higher order cross-connect module HOXC

SinkTDM service unit

Lower order cross-connect module LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

Clock Unit l

The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.

l

The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.


Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.

l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU.

l

Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.

3.4.3 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


36


3 Boards

Front Panel Diagram

CSH


Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1 TOD2

Indicators Table 3-16 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


PROG





On (green)




On (red)


SYNC Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)



37


Indicator

SRV

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


ACT

On (green)


Off


Clock Ports and Management Ports Table 3-17 Description of the clock ports and management ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Port

Description

NMS/COM

Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

EXT

NE cascade port

CLK/TOD1

External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), or wayside E1 port

TOD2



Connector Type

RJ45

38


3 Boards

NOTE

l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time. l The TOD2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900 V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only. l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-15 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-18 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port

NMS/COM

Pin

Signal

1


2


3

Receiving data (+)

4

Grounding end of the NM serial port

5

Receive end of the NM serial port

6

Receiving data (-)

7

Not defined

8

Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-19 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port

EXT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Pin

Signal

1


2


3

Receiving data (+)

6

Receiving data (-)


39


Port

3 Boards

Pin

Signal

4, 5, 7, 8

Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-20 provides status explanation for these indicators. Table 3-20 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On


Off


On or blinking


Off


ACT (yellow)

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.

Figure 3-16 shows the two common incorrect connections.

CSH


Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1 TOD2

CSH

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


LAN

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD1 TOD2


40


3 Boards

NOTE

When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CSH boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port of the working CSH board, if possible.

Table 3-21 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port Pin

Working Mode External Clock

1

Signal input (-)

2

Signal input (+)

3

Not defined

4

Signal output (-)

5

signal output (+)

6

Not defined

7

Not defined

8

Not defined

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-22 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port. Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port Pin


1

Not defined

2

Not defined

3

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

4

Grounding end

5

Grounding end

6

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


41


Pin

3 Boards


7

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

8

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

Buttons Table 3-23 Buttons Button

Name

Description

CF RCV

CF configuration restoration button

After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.

RST

Warm reset button

After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.

Latches There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board, you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition, rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/ protection switching.

3.4.4 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function. NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


42


3 Boards

Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

ON DIP

1 2 3 4

2

1

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-24 Setting DIP switches Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1

2

3

4

0

0

0

0

Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.

0

0

0

1

The value is reserved.

0

0

1

0

Indicates that a memory self-check is running.

0

0

1

1

Indicates that the board is being debugged.

0

1

0

0

Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running.

0

1

0

1

Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

0

1

1

0

Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

0

1

1

1



43


3 Boards

Meaning

Setting of DIP Switchesa 1

2

3

4

1

0

0

0


1

0

0

1

Restores the data of the CF card.

1

0

1

0

Erases data in the system parameter area.

1

0

1

1

Erases databases.

1

1

0

0

Erases NE software, including patches.

1

1

0

1

Erases databases and NE software, including patches.

1

1

1

0

Erases all data in the file system.

1

1

1

1

Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.4.5 Valid Slots The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on the NMS is the same as its physical slot. Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7 (CSH)

Slot 8 (CSH)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7 (CSH)

Slot 8 (CSH)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)


44


3 Boards


Description


Slot 7 > Slot 8

3.4.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.

Related References A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

3.4.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching Capacity The CSH supports a 10 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.

Cross-Connection Capability The CSH supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance

External synchronization source

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)


45


3 Boards

Item

Performance

Frequency accuracy

Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance Table 3-27 Wayside service interface performance Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame.


2048

Impedance (ohm)

120




Performance


22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm

Weight

0.74 kg

Power Consumption Power Consumption: < 25.3 W

3.5 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


46


3 Boards

3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.5.2 Functions and Features The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports. Table 3-29 Functions and features that the IF1 supports Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type

TU/STM-1-based radio

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the IF1.

Protection

1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

SNCP

Supported

License

Supports control on the air interface capacity by using the license file.

K byte pass-through

Supported

Clock

Clock source

Clock at the air interface

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode) l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode)

DCN

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Inband DCN

Not supported


47


Function and Feature Outband DCN

3 Boards

Description l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less than 16xE1. l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is equal to or more than 16xE1. l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at IF ports l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported

Board power detection

Supported

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


48


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1 Backplane

SMODEM unit

HSM signal bus

Paired board

ODU control signal Service bus

Overhead bus

Logic processing unit

Microwave MODEM unit frame signal

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

Combiner Interface unit

IF

Control bus

Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit

System control and communication unit Logic control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board

Power supply unit


Clock unit

-48 V +3.3 V

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-30 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1

Combiner interface unit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals.

2

SMODEM unit

l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.

3

IF processing unit

l Controls the level of service signals through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


49


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

4

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

5

MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)

l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/ s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the logic processing unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


50


Step

3 Boards

Function Unit

Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)

l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts TU pointers. l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.


6

l Processes clock signals. l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-31 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Processes clock signals. l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/ s overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


51


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

2

MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)

l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.

3

MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio mode.

l Performs digital modulation. 4

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation.

5

SMODEM unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit.

6


Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.


Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.

l

Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


52


3 Boards

3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1

I

O

PULL

IF1

WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IF1

ODU-PWR

IF

Indicators Table 3-32 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)

The services are normal.

On (red)

A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.

On (yellow)

A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.

On (green)

The radio link is normal.

On (red)

The radio link is faulty.

On (green)

The ODU is working properly.

On (red)

l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

53


3 Boards

Indicator

RMT

ACT

State

Meaning

Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

On (yellow)

The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off

The remote equipment is free of defects.

On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.

Off

l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports Table 3-33 Description of the Ports Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

-

-

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


54


3 Boards

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.5.5 Valid Slots The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (IF1)

Slot 6 (IF1)

Slot 3 (IF1)

Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 1 (IF1)

Slot 2 (IF1)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS

Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 25 (ODU)

Slot 26 (ODU)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 21 (ODU)

Slot 22 (ODU)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (IF1)

Slot 6 (IF1)

Slot 3 (IF1)

Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 1 (IF1)

Slot 2 (IF1)

Table 3-34 Slot allocation

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Description


Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2


55


3 Boards

NOTE

Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.

3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.5.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes Table 3-35 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board) Service Capacity

Modulation Scheme

Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1

QPSK

7

4xE1

16QAM

3.5

8xE1

QPSK

14 (13.75)

8xE1

16QAM

7

16xE1

QPSK

28 (27.5)

16xE1

16QAM

14 (13.75)

22xE1

32QAM

14 (13.75)

26xE1

64QAM

14 (13.75)

35xE1

16QAM

28 (27.5)

44xE1

32QAM

28 (27.5)

53xE1

64QAM

28 (27.5)

STM-1

128QAM

28 (27.5)

NOTE

The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 950 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings 3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 3.5/7/13.75/27.5/40/55 MHz apply to the 18 GHz frequency band.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


56


3 Boards

IF Performance Table 3-36 IF performance Item

Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

140

Modulation scheme

ASK


5.5


10

Interface impedance (ohm)

50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem Table 3-37 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item

Performance

Encoding mode

l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH microwave signals

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals

Supported


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.72 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption: < 12 W

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


57


3 Boards

3.6 IFU2 The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-39 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-39 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions


Radio type

Integrated IP radio NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.

Service categories

Native E1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.

Protection

License

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

SNCP for TDM services

Supported

Air interface capacity license

Supported


58



Clock at the physical layer

3 Boards

Description

AM license

Supported

Clock source


Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Inband DCN

Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN

Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes.

Ethernet service functions

See Table 3-40.

MPLS functions

See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.

PWE3 functions OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cold reset and warm reset

Supported


Supported

PRBS BER test at IF ports

Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


59


Function and Feature Board power detection

3 Boards

Description Supported

Table 3-40 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet services

Supports the following types of E-Line services:

E-Line services

l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

ERPS

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.

OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731.

LAG

Supported

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

QoS

See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.

RMON

Supported

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


60


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2 Backplane SMODEM unit

HSM signal bus Paired board

ODU control signal

MODEM unit

Overhead bus


Microwave frame signal

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit


IF

Service bus

Ethernet processing unit


GE bus

Control bus




Power supply unit

+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-41 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

SMODEM unit


3

IF processing unit

l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


61


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

4

MODEM unit


5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6


l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.

7


l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


62


3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-42 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.

2

3


l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Processes GE signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4

MODEM unit

l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.

5

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.

6

SMODEM unit


7




Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


63


3 Boards

l


l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.


Front Panel Diagram


I

O

PULL

IFU2

ODU-PWR

IF


IFU2

Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2

Indicators Table 3-43 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LINK

ODU Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)



64


Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)


RMT

ACT

On (yellow)




On (yellow)


Off


On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports Table 3-44 Description of the Ports Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

-

-

NOTE


Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


65


3 Boards

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.6.5 Valid Slots The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (IFU2)

Slot 6 (IFU2)

Slot 3 (IFU2)

Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 1 (IFU2)

Slot 2 (IFU2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS


Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 25 (ODU)

Slot 26 (ODU)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 21 (ODU)

Slot 22 (ODU)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (IFU2)

Slot 6 (IFU2)

Slot 3 (IFU2)

Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 1 (IFU2)

Slot 2 (IFU2)


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Description




66


3 Boards

NOTE


3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes Table 3-46 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Modulation Scheme

Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

7

QPSK

5

9 to 12

7

16QAM

10

20 to 24

7

32QAM

12

24 to 29

7

64QAM

15

31 to 37

7

128QAM

18

37 to 44

7

256QAM

21

43 to 51

14 (13.75)

QPSK

10

20 to 23

14 (13.75)

16QAM

20

41 to 48

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

50 to 59

14 (13.75)

64QAM

31

65 to 76


67


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme



14 (13.75)

128QAM

37

77 to 90

14 (13.75)

256QAM

43

90 to 104

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 48

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 97

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

108 to 125

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

130 to 150

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

160 to 180

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

180 to 210

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 97

56 (55)

16QAM

75

165 to 190

56 (55)

32QAM

75

208 to 240

56 (55)

64QAM

75

260 to 310

56 (55)

128QAM

75

310 to 360

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 420

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.


Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


350


140

Modulation scheme

ASK


5.5


68


3 Boards

Item

Performance Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)


10 50


Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding


Supported


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.79 kg


3.7 IFX2 The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


69


3 Boards

3.7.2 Functions and Features The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals. Table 3-50 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports. Table 3-50 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions


Radio type

Integrated IP radio NOTE Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet radio.

Service categories

Native E1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which native TDM services are E1 services

XPIC

Supported

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.

Protection

License



Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

SNCP for TDM services

Supported


Supported

AM license

Supported

Clock source

Clock at an air interface

Clock protection


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


70


3 Boards


Description

DCN

Supported.

Inband DCN

The DCN bandwidth is configurable. Outband DCN

Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes.

Ethernet service features

See Table 3-51.

MPLS functions

See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports.

PWE3 functions OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


71


3 Boards

Table 3-51 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet services


E-Line services



ERPS


ETH-OAM


LAG

Supported



QoS

See the description of the QoS functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports.

RMON

Supported

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


72


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2 Backplane SMODEM unit



MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

Paired XPIC board


IF

Service bus

Overhead bus


ODU control signal


GE bus



XPIC signal Control bus



Power supply unit


-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-52 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

SMODEM unit


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


73


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

3

IF processing unit

l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. – Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. – Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.

4

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


74


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

7



NOTE


Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-53 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

3


l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.


l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4

MODEM unit


5

IF processing unit


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

6

SMODEM unit


7




75


3 Boards




l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after performing DC-DC conversion.


3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


PULL

I X-IN

X-OUT

O

IFX2

ODU-PWR

IF

XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IFX2

Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2

Indicators Table 3-54 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)

The XPIC input signal is normal.

On (red)

The XPIC input signal is lost.


76


Indicator

STAT

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

The XPIC function is disabled.

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

ACT

On (yellow)




On (yellow)


Off


On (green)


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


77


3 Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

Off


Ports Table 3-55 Description of the ports Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

-

-

X-IN

XPIC signal input port

SMA

XPIC cable

X-OUT

XPIC signal output port

SMA

NOTE


Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.7.5 Valid Slots The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


78


3 Boards

Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (IFX2)

Slot 6 (IFX2)

Slot 3 (IFX2)

Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 1 (IFX2)

Slot 2 (IFX2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2


Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 25 (ODU)

Slot 26 (ODU)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 21 (ODU)

Slot 22 (ODU)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (IFX2)

Slot 6 (IFX2)

Slot 3 (IFX2)

Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 1 (IFX2)

Slot 2 (IFX2)


Description



NOTE

Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively. NOTE

One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


79


3 Boards

Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes Table 3-57 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Modulation Scheme



7

QPSK

4

9 to 11

7

16QAM

9

19 to 23

7

32QAM

11

24 to 29

7

64QAMa

14

31 to 36

14 (13.75)

QPSK

9

20 to 23

14 (13.75)

16QAM

19

40 to 47

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

50 to 59

14 (13.75)

64QAM

30

63 to 73

14 (13.75)

128QAMa

36

75 to 88

28 (27.5)

QPSK

19

41 to 48

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

84 to 97

28 (27.5)

32QAM

49

103 to 120

28 (27.5)

64QAM

63

130 to 150

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

160 to 180

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

180 to 210


80


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme



56 (55)

QPSK

39

83 to 97

56 (55)

16QAM

75

165 to 190

56 (55)

32QAM

75

210 to 245

56 (55)

64QAM

75

260 to 305

56 (55)

128QAM

75

310 to 360

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 410

NOTE For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled. a: When the XPIC function is enabled for the IFX2 board, the 64QAM/7MHz and 128QAM/14MHz modulation schemes do not apply to ODUs whose frequency band ranges from 26 GHz to 38 GHz.

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.


Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal


350


140

Modulation scheme

ASK


5.5


10


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


50

81


3 Boards


Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding


Supported


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.80 kg


3.8 ISU2 The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

3.8.2 Functions and Features The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-61 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


82


3 Boards

Table 3-61 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. l Integrated IP radio

Radio type

l SDH radio NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode

l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio mode

l STM-1

AM

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode

Ethernet frame header compression

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.

Link-level protection


Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

LAG protection at air interfaces

Supported

TDM service protection

SNCP

K byte pass-through

Supported

PLA

Supported


See Table 3-62.

MPLS functions


PWE3 functions License

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

l 2xSTM-1


Supported

AM license

Supported


83


3 Boards


Description


Clock source


Clock protection


DCN

Inband DCN

Supported

Outband DCN

l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


84


3 Boards

Table 3-62 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet services


E-Line services



ERPS


OAM


LAG

Supported



QoS


RMON

Supported

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2. NOTE

The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service categories.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


85


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2 Backplane SMODEM unit

HSM signal bus

Microwave frame signal

Overhead bus


MUX/DEMUX unit

MODEM unit

IF processing unit


IF

Service bus


ODU control signal

GE bus

Control bus

Paired board





Power supply unit

-48 V2 +3.3 V


-48 V1

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-63 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

SMODEM unit


3

IF processing unit

l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.

4

MODEM unit


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


86


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6



7



NOTE


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


87


3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-64 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

3



MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.


l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4

MODEM unit


6

IF processing unit


7

SMODEM unit


8



Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


88


3 Boards



l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.



Front Panel Diagram


PULL

I

O

ISU2

ODU-PWR

IF


ISU2

Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2

Indicators Table 3-65 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


On (red)



89


3 Boards

Indicator

LINK

ODU

State

Meaning

On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

ACT

On (yellow)




On (yellow)


Off


On (green)


Off


Ports Table 3-66 Description of the Ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

-

-


90


3 Boards

NOTE


Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.8.5 Valid Slots The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (ISU2)

Slot 6 (ISU2)

Slot 3 (ISU2)

Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 1 (ISU2)

Slot 2 (ISU2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


91


3 Boards

Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS


Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 25 (ODU)

Slot 26 (ODU)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 21 (ODU)

Slot 22 (ODU)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (ISU2)

Slot 6 (ISU2)

Slot 3 (ISU2)

Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 1 (ISU2)

Slot 2 (ISU2)


Description



NOTE


3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.

Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.8.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


92


3 Boards

Radio Work Modes Table 3-68 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board) Service Capacity

Modulation Scheme


STM-1

128QAM

28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1

128QAM

56 (55)

Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme


Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n

With L2 Frame Header Compressio n

With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4)


3.5

QPSK

2

4 to 5

4 to 6

4 to 6

4 to 10

3.5

16QAM

4

9 to 11

9 to 13

9 to 13

9 to 20

7

QPSK

5

10 to 13

10 to 15

10 to 22

10 to 33

7

16QAM

10

20 to 26

20 to 30

20 to 44

20 to 66

7

32QAM

12

25 to 32

25 to 36

25 to 54

25 to 80

7

64QAM

15

31 to 40

31 to 47

31 to 67

31 to 100

7

128QAM

18

37 to 47

37 to 56

37 to 80

37 to 119

7

256QAM

20

41 to 53

41 to 62

41 to 90

42 to 134

14 (13.75)

QPSK

10

20 to 26

20 to 31

20 to 44

20 to 66

14 (13.75)

16QAM

20

41 to 52

41 to 61

41 to 89

41 to 132

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

51 to 65

51 to 77

51 to 110

51 to 164

14 (13.75)

64QAM

31

65 to 83

65 to 96

65 to 140

65 to 209

14 (13.75)

128QAM

37

76 to 97

76 to 113

76 to 165

76 to 245

14 (13.75)

256QAM

42

87 to 111

87 to 131

87 to 189

88 to 281

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 52

41 to 62

41 to 89

41 to 132

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

107 to 136

107 to 161

107 to 230

107 to 343

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

131 to 168

131 to 198

131 to 283

132 to 424

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


93


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme






28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

QPSK

27

56 to 72

56 to 84

56 to 122

57 to 182

40

16QAM

55

114 to 145

114 to 172

114 to 247

114 to 366

40

32QAM

71

147 to 187

147 to 221

147 to 318

148 to 474

40

64QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

75

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

75

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

56 (55)

16QAM

75

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

75

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

75

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

75

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

Table 3-70 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme

Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave





28 (27.5)

128QAM

1

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

1

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

64QAM

1

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

1

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

1

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

16QAM

1

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

1

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


94


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme






56 (55)

64QAM

1

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

1

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

1

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions. l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92 bytes to 9600 bytes l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.


Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal


350


140

Modulation scheme

ASK


5.5


10


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


50

95


3 Boards


Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding


Supported


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.60 kg


3.9 ISX2 The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.9.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and Features The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving XPIC reference signals. Table 3-74 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


96


3 Boards


Description

Basic functions

l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. l Integrated IP radio

Radio type

l SDH radio NOTE The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode

l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio mode

l STM-1

AM

Supported only in integrated IP radio mode

Ethernet frame header compression

Supported

E1 priority

Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services

XPIC

Supported

Radio work mode

See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.

Link-level protection


Supported

N+1 protection

Supported

LAG protection at air interfaces

Supported

TDM service protection

SNCP

K byte pass-through

Supported

PLA

Supported


See Table 3-75.

MPLS functions


PWE3 functions License

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

l 2xSTM-1


Supported


97




3 Boards

Description

AM license

Supported

Clock source


Clock protection


DCN

Inband DCN

Supported

Outband DCN

l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


98


3 Boards

Table 3-75 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature

Description

Ethernet services


E-Line services



ERPS


OAM


LAG

Supported



QoS


RMON

Supported

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2. NOTE

The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service types.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


99


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2 Backplane SMODEM unit



MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

Paired XPIC board


IF

Service bus

Overhead bus


ODU control signal


GE bus



XPIC signal Control bus



Power supply unit


-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-76 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

SMODEM unit


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


100


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

3

IF processing unit

l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. – Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. – Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.

4

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


101


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

6



7



NOTE


Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-77 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2

3



MUX/DEMUX unit

l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.


l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4

MODEM unit


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


102


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

5

IF processing unit


6

SMODEM unit


7






l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.


3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


PULL

I X-IN

X-OUT


O

ISX2

ODU-PWR

IF

XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

ISX2

Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2

103


3 Boards

Indicators Table 3-78 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)


On (red)


Off


On (green)


On (red)


Off

l The board is not working.

STAT

l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (yellow)




On (yellow)



104


3 Boards

Indicator

ACT

State

Meaning

Off


On (green)


Off



Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

IF

IF port

TNC

IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa

ODU power switch

-

-

X-IN

XPIC signal input port

SMA

XPIC cable

X-OUT

XPIC signal output port

SMA

NOTE


Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


105


3 Boards

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.9.5 Valid Slots The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (ISX2)

Slot 6 (ISX2)

Slot 3 (ISX2)

Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 1 (ISX2)

Slot 2 (ISX2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS


Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 25 (ODU)

Slot 26 (ODU)

Slot 23 (ODU)

Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 21 (ODU)

Slot 22 (ODU)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (ISX2)

Slot 6 (ISX2)

Slot 3 (ISX2)

Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 1 (ISX2)

Slot 2 (ISX2)


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Description




106


3 Boards

NOTE

Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively. NOTE

One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.

Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes Table 3-81 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board) Service Capacity

Modulation Scheme


STM-1

128QAM

28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1

128QAM

56 (55)

NOTE For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


107


3 Boards

Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled) Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme






7

QPSK

5

10 to 13

10 to 15

10 to 22

10 to 33

7

16QAM

10

20 to 26

20 to 30

20 to 44

20 to 66

7

32QAM

12

25 to 32

25 to 36

25 to 54

25 to 80

7

64QAM

15

31 to 40

31 to 47

31 to 67

31 to 100

7

128QAM

18

37 to 47

37 to 56

37 to 80

37 to 119

7

256QAM

20

41 to 53

41 to 62

41 to 90

42 to 134

14 (13.75)

QPSK

10

20 to 26

20 to 31

20 to 44

20 to 66

14 (13.75)

16QAM

20

41 to 52

41 to 61

41 to 89

41 to 132

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

51 to 65

51 to 77

51 to 110

51 to 164

14 (13.75)

64QAM

31

65 to 83

65 to 96

65 to 140

65 to 209

14 (13.75)

128QAM

37

76 to 97

76 to 113

76 to 165

76 to 245

14 (13.75)

256QAM

42

87 to 111

87 to 131

87 to 189

88 to 281

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 52

41 to 62

41 to 89

41 to 132

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

107 to 136

107 to 161

107 to 230

107 to 343

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

131 to 168

131 to 198

131 to 283

132 to 424

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

QPSK

27

56 to 72

56 to 84

56 to 122

57 to 182

40

16QAM

55

114 to 145

114 to 172

114 to 247

114 to 366

40

32QAM

71

147 to 187

147 to 221

147 to 318

148 to 474

40

64QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

75

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

75

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

56 (55)

16QAM

75

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


108


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme






56 (55)

32QAM

75

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

75

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

75

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

Table 3-83 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC enabled) Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme






7

QPSK

4

10 to 13

10 to 15

10 to 22

10 to 33

7

16QAM

9

20 to 26

20 to 30

20 to 44

20 to 66

7

32QAM

11

25 to 32

25 to 36

25 to 54

25 to 80

7

64QAMa

14

31 to 40

31 to 47

31 to 67

31 to 100

14 (13.75)

QPSK

9

20 to 26

20 to 31

20 to 44

20 to 66

14 (13.75)

16QAM

19

41 to 52

41 to 61

41 to 89

41 to 132

14 (13.75)

32QAM

24

51 to 65

51 to 77

51 to 110

51 to 164

14 (13.75)

64QAM

30

65 to 83

65 to 96

65 to 140

65 to 209

14 (13.75)

128QAMa

36

76 to 97

76 to 113

76 to 165

76 to 245

28 (27.5)

QPSK

20

41 to 52

41 to 62

41 to 89

41 to 132

28 (27.5)

16QAM

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

28 (27.5)

32QAM

52

107 to 136

107 to 161

107 to 230

107 to 343

28 (27.5)

64QAM

64

131 to 168

131 to 198

131 to 283

132 to 424

28 (27.5)

128QAM

75

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

QPSK

27

56 to 72

56 to 84

56 to 122

57 to 182

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


109


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme






40

16QAM

55

114 to 145

114 to 172

114 to 247

114 to 366

40

32QAM

71

147 to 187

147 to 221

147 to 318

148 to 474

40

64QAM

75

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

75

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

75

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

QPSK

40

82 to 105

82 to 124

82 to 178

83 to 265

56 (55)

16QAM

75

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

75

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

56 (55)

64QAM

75

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

75

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

NOTE a: In 7MHz/64QAM or 14MHz/128QAM mode, ISX2 boards do not support cooperation with 26 GHz to 38 GHz ODUs if XPIC is enabled on the ISX2 boards.

Table 3-84 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme






28 (27.5)

128QAM

1

155 to 198

155 to 233

155 to 333

156 to 495

28 (27.5)

256QAM

1

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 577

40

64QAM

1

181 to 230

181 to 272

181 to 388

182 to 583

40

128QAM

1

215 to 272

215 to 323

215 to 456

216 to 691

40

256QAM

1

249 to 318

249 to 375

249 to 538

251 to 800

56 (55)

16QAM

1

166 to 212

166 to 250

165 to 356

167 to 533

56 (55)

32QAM

1

206 to 262

206 to 308

206 to 437

207 to 659

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


110


3 Boards


Modulation Scheme






56 (55)

64QAM

1

262 to 333

262 to 388

262 to 567

264 to 836

56 (55)

128QAM

1

309 to 396

309 to 466

309 to 656

311 to 983

56 (55)

256QAM

1

360 to 456

360 to 538

360 to 777

362 to 1000

NOTE For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions. l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92 bytes to 9600 bytes l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.


Performance

IF signal

ODU O&M signal


350


140

Modulation scheme

ASK


5.5


10


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


50

111


3 Boards


Performance

Encoding mode

LDPC encoding


Supported


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.60 kg


3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/ EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports. NOTE

EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that EM6TA/EM6FA boards reserve hardware resources for the IEEE 1588v2 function.

3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.

3.10.2 Functions and Features The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


112


3 Boards

Table 3-88 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports. The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-88 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description EM6T/EM6TA

Basic functions

Port specifications

EM6F/EM6FA

Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals. FE electrical port

Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.


GE port

Provides two 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) ports (fixed).

Provides two GE ports by using SFP modules of any of the following types: l Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE optical module l Colored CWDM GE optical module l Single-fiber bidirectional FE/GE module l 10/100/1000BASE-T (X) GE electrical module

Backplane bus bandwidth

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1 Gbit/s


1 Gbit/s

113



3 Boards


Port attributes

Working mode

EM6F/EM6FA

l The FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation. l The FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes

l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port.

Services

Jumbo frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.

Traffic control function

Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

E-Line services

Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

E-LAN services


LAG

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Inter-board LAG

Supported

Supported

Intra-board LAG

Supported

Supported


114



3 Boards


EM6F/EM6FA

ERPS




LPT

Supported

QoS

Supported

DiffServ

Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets.

Complex traffic classification

Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets.

CAR

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Shaping

Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.

Queue scheduling policies

Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR

ETH OAM

Ethernet service OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731.

Ethernet port OAM RMON Clock

Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. Supported

Supported

Clock source

Synchronous Ethernet

Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module)

Clock protection


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


115



3 Boards


EM6F/EM6FA

DCN

Inband DCN

Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports


Supported

Supported


Supported

Supported


Supported

Supported


Supported

Supported


Supported

Supported

Query of SFP module information

Not supported

Supported

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


116


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram Backplane GE signal

GE signal GE signal access unit

Control signal Ethernet processing unit

FE signal

FE signal access unit

Ethernet signal


Ethernet signal Packet switching unit

Control signal FE signal Control bus of the board

Logic control unit

Control bus

+3.3 V power supplied to the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2

+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O circuits on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board


+3.3 V Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-89 Signal processing in the receive direction Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1

GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit

l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE/FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals.

2


l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data frames. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


117


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

3


Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby packet switching units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-90 Signal processing in the transmit direction Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit.

2


l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames.

3

GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit

l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/ FE signals through Ethernet ports.

Control Signal Processing The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


118


3 Boards

l

Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

l

Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power to some I/O circuits on the board.


3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

STAT PROG SRV

EM6T

Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

STAT PROG SRV

EM6TA

Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6TA

GE1

GE2

EM6F

STAT PROG SRV LINK1 LINK2

Figure 3-43 Front panel of the EM6F CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

STAT PROG SRV L/A1 L/A2

EM6FA

Figure 3-44 Front panel of the EM6FA CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

GE1


119


3 Boards

Indicators Table 3-91 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

PROG

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)

A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off

There is no power supplied to the system.





On (green)




On (red)


LINK1a

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green)

The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data.


120


Indicator

LINK2a

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off

The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.

On (green)


Blinking (green)


Off


NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Table 3-92 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

PROG

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off






On (green)


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


121


Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning



On (red)

The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a

L/A2a

On (green)


Blinking (yellow)


Off


On (green)


Blinking (yellow)


Off


NOTE

a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Ports Table 3-93 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

GE1

GE service port (fixed electrical port)

RJ45

Network cable

GE2 FE1

FE service port

FE2 FE3 FE4

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


122


3 Boards

Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

GE1

GE service port (using SFP modules)

RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC SFP optical module

5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber Jumper

FE service port

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

NOTE

On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/ EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-95 and Table 3-96. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-45. Figure 3-45 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-95 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

1

TX+


BIDA+

Bidirectional data wire A (+)

2

TX-


BIDA-

Bidirectional data wire A (-)

3

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+

Bidirectional data wire B (+)


123


Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

4

Reserved

-

BIDC+

Bidirectional data wire C (+)

5

Reserved

-

BIDC-

Bidirectional data wire C (-)

6

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-

Bidirectional data wire B (-)

7

Reserved

-

BIDD+

Bidirectional data wire D (+)

8

Reserved

-

BIDD-

Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

1

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+


2

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-


3

TX+


BIDA+


4

Reserved

-

BIDD+


5

Reserved

-

BIDD-


6

TX-


BIDA-


7

Reserved

-

BIDC+


8

Reserved

-

BIDC-


The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-97.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


124


3 Boards

Table 3-97 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On


Off


On or blinking


Off


ACT (yellow)

When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required. l

When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-46, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port.

l

When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

Figure 3-46 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

Labels There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F/EM6FA. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.10.5 Valid Slots The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/ EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-47 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU)

Slot 7

Slot 11 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) (FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 9 (PIU) Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Slot 8 Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)


125


3 Boards

Figure 3-48 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS Slot 7

Slot 10 (PIU)

Slot 8

Slot 11 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) (FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 9 (PIU) Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)


Description



3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple types of SFP modules. Table 3-99 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and Transmission Distance

Dual-fiber bidirectional GE module

34060286

1000Base-SX

850 nm, 0.5 km

34060473

1000Base-LX

1310 nm, 10 km

34060298

1000BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060513

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1550 nm, 40 km

34060360

1000BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060416

1000BASE-CWDM

1471 nm, 40 km

34060417

1491 nm, 40 km

34060418

1511 nm, 40 km

34060419

1531 nm, 40 km

34060420

1551 nm, 40 km

34060421

1571 nm, 40 km

34060422

1591 nm, 40 km


126


Category

Part Number

Single-fiber bidirectional GE module

3 Boards

Type

Wavelength and Transmission Distance

34060423

1611 nm, 40 km

34060483

1471 nm, 80 km

34060481

1491 nm, 80 km

34060479

1511 nm, 80 km

34060482

1531 nm, 80 km

34060478

1551 nm, 80 km

34060476

1571 nm, 80 km

34060477

1591 nm, 80 km

34060480

1611 nm, 80 km

34060475

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 10 km

34060470

1000BASE-BX-U


34060540

1000BASE-BX-D


34060539

1000BASE-BX-U


Dual-fiber bidirectional FE module

Single-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060287

100BASE-FX

1310 nm, 2 km

34060276

100BASE-LX

1310 nm, 15 km

34060281

100BASE-VX

1310 nm, 40 km

34060282

100BASE-ZX

1550 nm, 80 km

34060364

100BASE-BX-D


34060363

100BASE-BX-U


Electrical module

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T (X)


-

127


3 Boards

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-101-Table 3-106 in 3.10.8 Technical Specifications.

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code. Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F Board Feature Code

Module Type

Part Number of the Module

01

1000BASE-SX

34060286

02

1000BASE-LX

34060473

03

10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

34100052

10

100BASE-FX

34060287

11

100BASE-LX

34060276

NOTE

If the board feature code in the bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EM6T/EM6TA.

3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA.

Related References A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.10.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


128


3 Boards

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-101 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance transmission) Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm)

850

1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Transmission distance (km)

0.5

10

Operating wavelength (nm)

770 to 860

1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm)

-9 to -3

-9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)

-17

-20

Minimum overload (dBm)

0

-3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

9.5

9.5

Table 3-102 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

1000BASE-ZX (80 km)


1310

1550

1550


1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode


40

40

80


1270 to 1350

1480 to 1580

1500 to 1580


-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-2 to +5


-23

-22

-22


-3

-3

-3


129


3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

1000BASE-ZX (80 km)


9

9

9

Table 3-103 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-CWDM (40 km)

1000BASE-CWDM (80 km)


l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 2: 1491

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 3: 1511

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 4: 1531

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 5: 1551

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 6: 1571

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 7: 1591

l Channel 8: 1611

l Channel 8: 1611


1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode


40

80


Nominal wavelength ±6.5

Nominal wavelength ±6.5


0 to +5

0 to +5


-19

-28


0

-9


8.2

8.2


130


3 Boards

Table 3-104 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item

Performance 1000BASEBX-D (10 km)

1000BASEBX-U (10km)

1000BASEBX-D (40 km)

1000BASEBX-U (40km)

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Tx: 1490

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1490


1000

1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Multi-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode


10

10

40

40


Tx: 1480 to 1500

Tx: 1260 to 1360

Tx: 1260 to 1360

Tx: 1480 to 1500

Rx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1480 to 1500

Rx: 1480 to 1500

Rx: 1260 to 1360


-9 to -3

-9 to -3

-3 to +3

-3 to +3


-19.5

-19.5

-23

-23


-3

-3

-3

-3


6

6

6

6


Table 3-105 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional) Item

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Performance 100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)


1310

1310

1310

1550


100

100

100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode


2

15

40

80


1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580


-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0


-30

-28

-34

-34


-14

-8

-10

-10


131


Item

3 Boards

Performance


100BASEFX (2 km)

100BASELX (15 km)

100BASEVX (40 km)

100BASEZX (80 km)

10

8.2

10

10.5

Table 3-106 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item

Performance

Classification code

100BASE-BX-D (15 km)

100BASE-BX-U (15 km)


Tx: 1550

Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310

Rx: 1550


100

100

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode


15

15


Tx: 1480 to 1580

Tx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1480 to 1580


-15 to -8

-15 to -8


-32

-32


-8

-8


8.5

8.5

Performance of GE Electrical Ports The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical ports. Table 3-107 GE electrical interface performance Item

Performance


10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


132


3 Boards

Item

Performance

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type

RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-108 FE electrical interface performance Item

Performance


10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type

RJ45


Performance EM6T

EM6TA

EM6F


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.37 kg

0.40 kg

0.40 kg

EM6FA

0.40 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


133


3 Boards

3.11 EMS6 The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical modules.

3.11.1 Version Description The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.

3.11.2 Functions and Features The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching. Table 3-110 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports. Table 3-110 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and 1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH processing.

Port specifications

FE electrical port


GE port

Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types: l 1000Base-SX l 1000Base-LX l 1000Base-VX l 1000Base-ZX l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

Port attributes

Working mode

l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


134


3 Boards

Function and Feature TAG attributes

Description l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.

Services

Encapsulation and mapping

Jumbo frame




Ethernet private line (EPL) services

Supports the EPL services based on ports.

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services

Supports the following types of EVPL services:

Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services

Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges.

Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services

Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

Encapsulati on format

Supports the following encapsulation formats:

l EVPL services based on port+VLAN l EVPL services based on QinQ

l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)

Maximum TDM service capacity supported by the backplane

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

4xVC-4


135


3 Boards


Link aggregation group (LAG)

Description

Maximum number of VCTRUN Ks supported by the board

8

Maximum bandwidth supported by each VCTRUN K

l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s

Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

Supported

Inter-board LAG

Not supported

Intra-board LAG

Supported

l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s

NOTE Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intraboard LAG.

Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)


Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP Snooping

Supported

Link state pass through (LPT)a

Supported NOTE Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.

QoS

Traffic classificatio n

Supports the following traffic classification modes: l Traffic classification based on ports l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID +S-VLAN ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


136


3 Boards

Function and Feature CoS

Description Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress queues of different CoSs by: l Simple l VLAN priority l IP TOS value l DSCP value

Committed access rate (CAR)

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

Shaping

Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress queue.

Queue scheduling policy

Supports the following scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function.

ETH OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. NOTE Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.

Remote monitoring (RMON)

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Clock

Clock source

Synchronous Ethernet

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:

NOTE Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not support synchronous Ethernet.

l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports). l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports excluding port 8 (bridging port). l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


137


3 Boards


Description

Traffic monitoring

Supported


Supported

Board manufactur ing information query

Supported

Board power consumptio n information query

Supported


Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal processing as an example.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


138


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-49 Functional block diagram of the EMS6 Backplane Ethernet signal FE signal

GE signal

FE signal access unit GE signal access unit


Encapsulation unit

SDH signal Logic processing unit

Mapping unit

GE signal

Management control signal

Cross-connect unit


Control signal of the board Control bus

Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board

Power supply unit

+3.3 V backup power supplied to certain auxiliary circuits on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

System control and communication unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1

FE/GE signal access unit

l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE/GE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and Ethernet performance measurement for frames.

2


l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal access unit and GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) control, for Ethernet data frames based on service types. l Processes tags based on service types. l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.

3

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Encapsulation unit

Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC), Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.


139


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

4

Mapping unit

Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s, VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.

5


Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.

2

Mapping unit

Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s, VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.

3

Encapsulation unit

Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are demapped.

4


l Processes tags based on service types. l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames. l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal access unit or the GE port connected to the packet switching unit based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames.

5


Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

Control Signal Processing The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit, and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


140


3 Boards

responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.


3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

EMS6

STAT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

Figure 3-50 Front panel of the EMS6

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Indicators Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


PROG

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)




141


Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning



On (green)

l The upper layer software is being initialized during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The software is running properly during the running process of the board.



On (red)


SRV

LINK1

ACT1

LINK2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)

The system is working normally.

On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


On (green)

The GE1 port is connected correctly.


The receive optical power at the GE1 optical port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 ms off

The receive optical power at the GE1 optical port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off


Blinking (yellow)


Off

The GE1 port is not receiving or transmitting data.

On (green)





142


Indicator

ACT2

3 Boards

State

Meaning



Off


Blinking (yellow)


Off


Ports Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the EMS6 Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

GE1 GE2

GE service port (using SFP modules)

RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC SFP optical module

5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber Jumper

FE1

FE service port

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

FE2 FE3 FE4

NOTE

On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively, and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-51. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-115 and Table 3-116. Figure 3-51 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


143


3 Boards


10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

1

TX+


BIDA+


2

TX-


BIDA-


3

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+


4

Reserved

-

BIDC+


5

Reserved

-

BIDC-


6

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-


7

Reserved

-

BIDD+


8

Reserved

-

BIDD-



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

1

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+


2

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-


3

TX+


BIDA+


4

Reserved

-

BIDD+


5

Reserved

-

BIDD-


6

TX-


BIDA-



144


Pin

3 Boards

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

7

Reserved

-

BIDC+


8

Reserved

-

BIDC-


The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-117. Table 3-117 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On


Off


On or blinking


Off


ACT (yellow)

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-52, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. Figure 3-52 Ports of an SFP optical module

RX

TX

3.11.5 Valid Slots The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-53 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (EMS6)

Slot 6 (EMS6)

Slot 3 (EMS6)

Slot 4 (EMS6)

Slot 1 (EMS6)

Slot 2 (EMS6)


145


3 Boards

Figure 3-54 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (EMS6)

Slot 6 (EMS6)

Slot 3 (EMS6)

Slot 4 (EMS6)

Slot 1 (EMS6)

Slot 2 (EMS6)

Table 3-118 Slot configuration for the EMS6 Item

Description



3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules. Table 3-119 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports Part Number

Type

34060286

1000Base-SX

34060473

1000Base-LX

34060298

1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)

34060513

1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)

34060360

1000Base-ZX

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar code. Table 3-120 Board feature codes of the EMS6

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Board Feature Code

Module Type

01

1000Base-SX Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146


3 Boards

Board Feature Code

Module Type

02

1000Base-LX

03

10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

NOTE

If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EMS6.

Related References A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.11.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of GE Optical Ports The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE optical ports. Table 3-121 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance transmission)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance

Classification code


1000BASE-LX (10 km)


850

1310


1000

Fiber type

Multi-mode

Single-mode


0.5

10


770 to 860

1270 to 1355


-9 to -3

-9 to -3


-17

-20


147


3 Boards

Item

Performance

Classification code


1000BASE-LX (10 km)


0

-3


9.5

9.5

Table 3-122 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission) Item

Performance

Classification code

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

1000BASE-VX (40 km)

1000BASE-ZX (80 km)


1310

1550

1550


1000

1000

1000

Fiber type

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode


40

40

80


1270 to 1350

1480 to 1580

1500 to 1580


-5 to 0

-5 to 0

-2 to +5


-23

-22

-22


-3

-3

-3


9

9

9

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Performance of GE Electrical Ports The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


148


3 Boards

Table 3-123 GE electrical interface performance Item

Performance


10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern

Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type

RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-124 FE electrical interface performance Item

Performance


10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern


Interface type

RJ45


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.50 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


149


3 Boards

3.12 EFP8 The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet plane through its bridging GE port.

3.12.1 Version Description The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.

3.12.2 Functions and Features The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals on the PDH network. Table 3-126 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports. Table 3-126 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.

Port specifications

FE electrical port: 10/100BASE-T (X)

8

Port attributes

Working mode

The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.

Services

Jumbo frame




EPL services

Supports the EPL services that are based on port.

EVPL services

Supports the following types of EVPL services: l EVPL services based on port+VLAN l EVPL services based on QinQ

EPLAN services

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1d bridges.


150


Function and Feature EVPLAN services

3 Boards

Description Supports the following types of EVPLAN services: l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

Encapsulation and mapping

LAG

Encapsulation format

Generic framing procedure (GFP)

Maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the board

16

Maximum TDM service capacity supported by the backplane

1xVC-4 (63xE1)

Maximum number of E1s that can be bound with a single VCTRUNK

16xE1

Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

Supported

Inter-board LAG

Not supported

Intra-board LAG

Supported NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intraboard LAG.



IGMP snooping function

Supported

LPTa

Supported NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.

QoS

Traffic classification

l Traffic classification based on ports l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID +VLAN PRI l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID +S-VLAN ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


151


Function and Feature CoS

3 Boards

Description Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress queues that belong to different service classes based on the following conditions: l Simple l VLAN priority l IP TOS value l DSCP value

CAR

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

Shaping

Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.

Queue scheduling policies

Supports SP+WRR. l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function.

ETH OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.

RMON

Supported

Port mirroring

Supported

Clock

Clock source

Synchronous Ethernet NOTE Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not support synchronous Ethernet.

Clock protection


OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports excluding port 10 (bridging port) l Inloops on VC-12 paths

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Supported


Supported


152


3 Boards


Description


Supported


Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of important data.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-55 Functional block diagram of the EFP8 Backplane Ethernet signal FE signal



Encapsulation unit

PDH signal Logic processing unit

Mapping unit

Management control signal

GE signal

Cross-connect unit


Control signal of the board Control bus


Power supply unit

+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


System control and communication unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

153


3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-127 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Receives/Transmits FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals.

2


l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service categories. l Processes tags based on service categories. l Forwards data frames based on service categories.

3

Encapsulation unit

Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

4

Mapping unit

l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames to proper VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.

5


Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-128 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the main cross-connect unit.


154


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

2

Mapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.

3

Encapsulation unit

Decapsulates signals after demapping.

4

Ethernet signal processing unit

l Processes tags based on service categories. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet switching unit according to the egress flag.


5

Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals to an Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit, and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.



l

Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


155


3 Boards


3.12.4 Front Panel There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

PROG

SRV

STAT

EFP8

Figure 3-56 Front panel of the EFP8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Indicators Table 3-129 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


PROG





On (green)



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)



156


Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

On (red)


SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


Ports Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the EFP8 Port

Description

FE1 to FE8

FE port

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

RJ45

5.9 Network Cable

The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-131 and Table 3-132. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-57. Figure 3-57 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


157


3 Boards


10/100BASE-T(X) Signal

Function

1

TX+


2

TX-


3

RX+

Receiving data (+)

4

Reserved

-

5

Reserved

-

6

RX-

Receiving data (-)

7

Reserved

-

8

Reserved

-


10/100BASE-T(X) Signal

Function

1

RX+

Receiving data (+)

2

RX-

Receiving data (-)

3

TX+


4

Reserved

-

5

Reserved

-

6

TX-


7

Reserved

-

8

Reserved

-

The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-133. Table 3-133 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK (green)

On


Off



158


3 Boards

Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT (yellow)

On or blinking


Off


3.12.5 Valid Slots The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-58 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (EFP8)

Slot 6 (EFP8)

Slot 3 (EFP8)

Slot 4 (EFP8)

Slot 1 (EFP8)

Slot 2 (EFP8)

Figure 3-59 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (EFP8)

Slot 6 (EFP8)

Slot 3 (EFP8)

Slot 4 (EFP8)

Slot 1 (EFP8)

Slot 2 (EFP8)


Description



3.12.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


159


3 Boards

Related References A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.12.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE Electrical Ports The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-135 FE electrical interface performance Item

Performance


10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern


Interface type

RJ45


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.6 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W

3.13 SL1D/SL1DA The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


160


3 Boards

3.13.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.

3.13.2 Functions and Features The SL1D/SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals. Table 3-137 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/SL1DA supports. Table 3-137 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.

Port specifications

Optical ports

l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types. l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.

Electrical ports

l Adopts SFP electrical modules. l The performance of the electrical ports complies with ITU-T G.703.

Protection

Clock

Linear MSP

Supported

SNCP

Supported

Clock source

Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock protection


DCN

Outband DCN

Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes.

K byte pass-through

Supported only by the SL1DA

OM

Supports the following loopback types:

Loopback

l Outloops at optical/electrical ports l Inloops at optical/electrical ports l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops on VC-4 paths Warm reset and cold reset

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Supported


161



3 Boards

Description

Setting of the on/off state of a laser

Supported

ALS functiona

Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported

Detection and query of SFP module information

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


162


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-60 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA Backplane

Service bus

Overhead bus


Overhead processing unit

STM-1

O/E conversion unit

STM-1

Crossconnect unit System control and communication unit


Control bus

Logic control unit Power supplied to the other units on the board

+3.3 V


Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-138 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1

O/E conversion unit

l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


163


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

2


l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the logic processing unit.

3


l Processes clock signals. l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-139 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1



2


l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


164


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

3

O/E conversion unit

Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.


3.13.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

SL1D

SL1D

STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

Figure 3-61 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)

STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

SL1DA

Figure 3-62 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports) CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2


SL1D

SL1D

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)

165


3 Boards

SL1DA

STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Indicators Table 3-140 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LOS1

LOS2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off

The services are not configured.

On (red)

The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms.

On (red)

The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms.


166


3 Boards


Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

TX1

Transmit port of the first STM-1 port

RX1

Receive port of the first STM-1 port

l SFP optical module: LC l SFP electrical module: SAA straight/female

TX2

Transmit port of the second STM-1 port

l SFP optical module: 5.5 Fiber Jumper l SFP electrical module: 5.6 STM-1 Cable

RX2

Receive port of the second STM-1 port

l SFP optical module: LC l SFP electrical module: SAA straight/female

Labels There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.13.5 Valid Slots The SL1D/SL1DA can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-65 Slots for the SL1D/SL1DA in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Figure 3-66 Logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)


167


3 Boards


Description



3.13.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-143 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA Feature Code

Type of Optical Module

Part Number of the Optical Module

01

Ie-1

34060287

02

S-1.1

34060276

03

L-1.1

34060281

04

L-1.2

34060282

05

STM-1e

34100104

3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D/SL1DA.

Related References A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.13.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


168


3 Boards

Table 3-144 STM-1 optical interface performance Item

Performance


155520

Classification code

Ie-1

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

Fiber type

Multi-mode fiber

Single-mode fiber

Single-mode fiber

Single-mode fiber


2

15

40

80


1270 to 1380

1261 to 1360

1263 to 1360

1480 to 1580


-19 to -14

-15 to -8

-5 to 0

-5 to 0


-30

-28

-34

-34


-14

-8

-10

-10


10

8.2

10

10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-145 STM-1 electrical interface performance Item

Performance


155520

Code type

CMI

Wire pair in each transmission direction

One coaxial wire pair

Impedance (ohm)

75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


169


3 Boards


Performance SL1D

SL1DA


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.30 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption of the SL1D: < 3.4 W Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W

3.14 ML1/MD1 The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

3.14.1 Version Description The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.

3.14.2 Functions and Features The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports. Table 3-147 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description ML1

MD1

Basic functions

Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible configuration of E1 service categories.

E1 service categories

Supports the following E1 service categories: l CES E1 l ATM/IMA E1

Port specifications Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

16


32

170



3 Boards

Description ML1

Fractional E1 ATM/IMA

MD1

Supports transparent service transmission at the 64 kbit/s level. Maximum number of ATM services

64

Maximum number of ATM connections

256

ATM traffic management

Supported

ATM encapsulation mode

Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes: l N-to-one VPC l N-to-one VCC l One-to-one VPC l One-to-one VCC

Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells

31

ATM OAM

Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level), including the following functions: l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication (RDI) l Continuity check test l Loopback test

CES

Maximum number of IMA groups

16

32

Maximum number of members in an IMA group

16

Maximum number of services

16

Encapsulation mode

Supports the following encapsulation modes:

32

l CESoPSN l SAToP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


171



3 Boards

Description ML1

Service category

Point-to-point services

Compression of vacant slots

Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

Jitter buffering time (us)

375-16000

Packet loading time (us)

125-5000

CES ACR

Supported

Retiming

Supported

Clock protection OM

MD1

Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.


Supported

PRBS tests at E1 ports

Supported


Supported


Supported

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


172


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-67 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1 Backplane

Service bus


Service processing unit

E1

Signal interface unit

E1

GE bus


Control bus


Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board

Power supply unit

Clock signal provided to the other units of the board

Clock unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-148 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Receives external E1 signals. l Matches the resistance. l Equalizes signals. l Converts the level. l Recovers clock signals. l Buffers the received data. l Performs HDB3 decoding.

2


l Frames E1 signals. l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA services. l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3 services into Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


173


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

3


l Implements the conversion from the internal service bus into the GE bus in the backplane. l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-149 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1 Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Receives service signals from the packet switching unit. l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the backplane into the internal service bus.

2


l Decapsulates service signals. l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA services. l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1 signals to the signal interface unit.

3


l Performs HDB3 coding. l Performs clock re-timing. l Performs pulse shaping. l Drives the line. l Sends E1 signals to a port.




l


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


174


3 Boards


3.14.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

ML1

STAT SRV

Figure 3-68 Front panel of the ML1 16 E1

1

MD1

STAT SRV

Figure 3-69 Front panel of the MD1 16 1

32 17

Indicators Table 3-150 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)



175


Indicator

3 Boards

State

Meaning

Off


Ports Table 3-151 Description of the ports on the ML1 Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

1 to 16

The first to sixteenth E1 ports

Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

Table 3-152 Description of the ports on the MD1 Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

1 to 16


Anea 96


17 to 32

The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports

Anea 96


The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-70 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-153 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-70 Front view of an Anea 96 connector POS.1

POS.96

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


176


3 Boards

Table 3-153 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

The first received E1 differential signal (+)

25

The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

2

The first received E1 differential signal (-)

26

The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3

The second received E1 differential signal (+)

27

The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

4

The second received E1 differential signal (-)

28

The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

5

The third received E1 differential signal (+)

29

The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

6

The third received E1 differential signal (-)

30

The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

7

The fourth received E1 differential signal (+)

31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

8

The fourth received E1 differential signal (-)

32

The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

9

The fifth received E1 differential signal (+)

33

The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

10

The fifth received E1 differential signal (-)

34

The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

11

The sixth received E1 differential signal (+)

35

The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

12

The sixth received E1 differential signal (-)

36

The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

13

The seventh received E1 differential signal (+)

37

The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

14

The seventh received E1 differential signal (-)

38

The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

15

The eighth received E1 differential signal (+)

39

The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

16

The eighth received E1 differential signal (-)

40

The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

17

The ninth received E1 differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1 differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)


177


3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

19

The tenth received E1 differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1 differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

22

The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

52

The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.14.5 Valid Slots The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


178


3 Boards

Figure 3-71 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)


Description



3.14.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-155 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1 Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

A

75

B

120

3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.

Related References A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


179


3 Boards

A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

3.14.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

E1 Interface Performance Table 3-156 E1 interface performance Item

Performance


2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120



One symmetrical wire pair


Performance ML1

MD1


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.45 kg

0.50 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W

3.15 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board.

3.15.1 Version Description The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


180


3 Boards

between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board power consumption is reduced.

3.15.2 Functions and Features The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-158 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports. Table 3-158 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description SP3S

Basic functions

SP3D

Receives and transmits E1 signals.

Port specifications

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

16

Clock

Clock source

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock protection

Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities.

E1 retiming function

Supported

Loopback

Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.


Supported

PRBS tests at E1 ports

Supported


Supported


Supported

OM

32

3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


181


3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D Backplane

Codec unit

Interface unit

E1

Service bus


Mapping/Demapping unit

E1 signal

E1

Control bus

Cross-connect unit



Power supply unit

+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

NOTE

The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48 V power into +3.3 V power.

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-159 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1

Interface unit

External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to the board.

2

Codec unit

l Equalizes the received signals. l Recovers clock signals. l Detects T_ALOS alarms. l Performs HDB3 decoding.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


182


3 Boards

Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

3

Mapping/ Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s. l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.

4


l Processes clock signals. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-160 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step

Function Unit

Processing Flow

1


l Processes clock signals.

Mapping/ Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

2

l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects specific alarms and performance events. l Extracts E1 signals.

3

Codec unit

Performs HDB3 coding.

4

Interface unit

E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to an external cable.

Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


183


3 Boards

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.


Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48 V power into +3.3 V power.

l



3.15.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

SP3S

SP3S

STAT SRV

Figure 3-74 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B E1 1-16

SP3S

STAT SRV

Figure 3-75 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C 16

E1 1

21 1

42 22

SP3D

SP3D

STAT SRV

Figure 3-76 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B

SP3D

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

STAT SRV

Figure 3-77 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C 16 1

32 17


184


3 Boards

Indicators Table 3-161 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


Ports Table 3-162 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

1-16


Anea 96

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment, 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel or 5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and a DB44 Connector


185


3 Boards

Table 3-163 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

1-21


Anea 96


22-42


Anea 96


NOTE

On the OptiX RTN 950, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

Table 3-164 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

1-16


Anea 96


17-32


Anea 96


The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-78 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-165 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-78 Front view of an Anea 96 connector POS.1

POS.96

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


186


3 Boards

Table 3-165 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1


25


2


26


3


27


4


28


5


29


6


30


7


31

The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

8


32


9


33


10


34


11


35


12


36


13


37


14


38


15


39


16


40


17

The ninth received E1 differential signal (+)

41

The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

18

The ninth received E1 differential signal (-)

42

The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)


187


3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

19

The tenth received E1 differential signal (+)

43

The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

20

The tenth received E1 differential signal (-)

44

The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

21

The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+)

45

The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

22

The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-)

46

The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

23

The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+)

47

The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

24

The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-)

48

The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

49

The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

73

The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

50

The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

74

The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

51

The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

75

The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

52

The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

76

The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

53

The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

77

The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

54

The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

78

The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

55

The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

79

The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

56

The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

80

The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.15.5 Valid Slots The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


188


3 Boards

Figure 3-79 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Figure 3-80 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)


Description



3.15.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-167 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D Board Feature Code

Port Impedance (Ohm)

A

120

B

75

3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

Related References A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


189


3 Boards

A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.15.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

E1 Interface Performance Table 3-168 E1 interface performance Item

Performance


2048

Code pattern

HDB3

Impedance (ohm)

75

120





Performance SP3SVER.B

SP3SVER.C

Dimensio ns (H x W x D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.50 kg

0.40 kg

SP3DVER.B

SP3SVER.C

0.64 kg

0.54 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W

3.16 AUX The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house only one AUX.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


190


3 Boards

3.16.1 Version Description The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

3.16.2 Functions and Features The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port. Table 3-170 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports. Table 3-170 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description

Orderwire phone port

1

Synchronous data port

1 The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

Asynchronous data port

1 The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.

External alarm port

Four inputs and two outputs

Hot swapping function

Supported


Supported

Power detection

Supported

3.16.3 Working Principle The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-81 Functional block diagram of the AUX Backplane Power supply unit 4-input/2-output alarm port One orderwire phone port 64 kbit/s synchronous data port

Orderwire unit

Logic control unit

+3.3 V Power dip detection signal

System bus


19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data port

Clock unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Clock signal

Board status detection unit



191


3 Boards

Power Supply Unit l

Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on the AUX.

l

Receives and shuts down control signals.

Orderwire Unit l

Supports the input of four channels of alarms.

l

Supports the output of two channels of alarms.

l

Provides one orderwire port.

l

Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.

l

Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port. NOTE

The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.

Logic Control Unit l

Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the board control function.

l

Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.

l

Processes clock signals.

l

Provides board status information.

l

Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.

l

Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.

l

Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running specific commands.

l

Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.

Board Status Detection Unit l

Detects board performance data such as board voltage.

l

Stores board manufacturing information.

Clock Unit Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.

3.16.4 Front Panel There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-82 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


192


3 Boards

AUX

STAT SRV

Figure 3-82 Front panel of the AUX

F1/S1

PHONE

ALMO

ALMI

Indicators Table 3-171 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports Table 3-172 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports Port

Description

F1/S1

Synchronous/Asynchronous data port

ALMI

Alarm input port

ALMO

Alarm output port

PHONE

Orderwire phone port

Connector Type RJ45

The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-83 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


193


3 Boards

Figure 3-83 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-173 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port. Table 3-173 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port Port

Pin

Signal

F1/S1

1

Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2

Grounding end

3

Receiving asynchronous data signals

4

Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5

Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6

Grounding end

7

Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8

Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-174 and see Table 3-175. Table 3-174 Pin assignments for the ALMI port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Port

Pin

Signal

ALMI

1

The first external alarm input signal

2

Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal

3

The second external alarm input signal

4

The third external alarm input signal

5

Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal

6

Grounding end for the second external alarm input signal

7

The forth external alarm input signal

8

Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal


194


3 Boards

Table 3-175 Pin assignments for the ALMO port Port

Pin

Signal

ALMO

1

The first external alarm output signal (+)

2

The first external alarm output signal (-)

3

The second external alarm output signal (+)

4

Connected in parallel with pin 1

5


6

The second external alarm output signal (-)

7


8


3.16.5 Valid Slots The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-84 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (AUX)

Slot 6 (AUX)

Slot 3 (AUX)

Slot 4 (AUX)

Slot 1 (AUX)

Slot 2 (AUX)

Figure 3-85 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5 (AUX)

Slot 6 (AUX)

Slot 3 (AUX)

Slot 4 (AUX)

Slot 1 (AUX)

Slot 2 (AUX)


195


3 Boards


Description



3.16.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance Table 3-177 Orderwire interface performance Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type

Addressing call



Impedance (ohm)

600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance Table 3-178 Synchronous data interface performance

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


64

Interface type

Codirectional




196


3 Boards

Asynchronous Data Interface Table 3-179 Asynchronous data interface performance Item

Performance

Transmission path

Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


≤ 19.2


Meets the RS-232 standard.


Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.27 kg

Power Consumption Power consumption: < 1.3 W

3.17 PIU The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

3.17.1 Version Description The functional version of the PIU is TND1.

3.17.2 Functions and Features The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and information reporting. Table 3-181 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


197


3 Boards


Description

Basic functions

Power access

Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V DC or -60 V DC power input.

Power output

The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.

Protection

Supports 1+1 HSB protection.

Power protection

l Protection against overcurrent

Surge protection

Supported

Protection

l Protection against short circuits


Supported

Surge protection status monitoring

Supported

3.17.3 Working Principle The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-86 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU. Figure 3-86 Functional block diagram of the PIU Backplane

-48 V/-60 V

Protection and detection unit

EMI filtering unit

Detection signal

-48 V

Detection signal Communicatio n control unit

Board operating in distributed power supply mode

System control and communication unit +3.3 V

Protection and Detection Unit The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the following functions: l Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Provides protection against lightning strike and surge. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198


3 Boards

l

Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure alarm.

l

Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and communication unit through the communication control unit.

EMI Filtering Unit The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.

Communication Control Unit The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control and communication unit: l

PIU manufacturing information

l

PCB version information

l

Surge-protection failure information

l

PIU temperature

3.17.4 Front Panel There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-87 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

-48V PWR

NEG(-) RTN(+)

-60V

Figure 3-87 Front panel of the PIU

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


199


3 Boards

Indicators Table 3-182 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator

Status

Description

PWR

On (green)

The power supply is connected.

Off

There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.

Ports The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-183 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their respective usage. Table 3-183 Description of the ports on the PIU Port

Port Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

NEG1(-)

-48 V power input port

2 mm HM power connector

5.1 Power Cable

RTN1(+)

BGND power input port

Labels Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power operations.

CAUTION Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.

3.17.5 Valid Slots The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-88 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 11 Slot 9 (PIU)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 1

Slot 2


200


3 Boards

Figure 3-89 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 11 Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 1

Slot 2

3.17.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. Table 3-184 lists the technical specifications for the PIU. Table 3-184 Technical specifications for the PIU Item

Performance

Dimensions

21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 229.9 mm

Weight

0.12 kg

Power consumption

< 0.5 W

Input voltage

-38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.18 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.18.1 Version Description The functional version of the FAN is TND1.

3.18.2 Functions and Features The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. Table 3-185 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


201


3 Boards


Description

Power input

Accesses one +12 V power input from the active system control, switching, and timing board and one +12 V power input from the standby system control, switching, and timing board to provide 1+1 protection.

Number of fans

6

Intelligent fan speed adjustment

Supported

Protection

Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency signals.

OM

l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position status. l Provides alarm indicators. l Supports board power consumption information query

NOTE

l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature reaches 40°C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C. l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

3.18.3 Working Principle The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit. Figure 3-90 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN. Figure 3-90 Functional block diagram of the FAN Backplane

Fan unit

+12 V

+12 V Power unit +12 V

Communication detection signal

Communication monitoring unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Communication detection signal



202


3 Boards

Power Unit l

Receives +12 V power from the backplane.

l

Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply combining, and overcurrent protection.

Fan Unit Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.

Communication Monitoring Unit l

Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and communication unit.

l

Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width modulation signal from the system control and communication unit. The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in Table 3-186. Table 3-186 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed Working Temperature

Rotating Speed

≤ 25°C

4800 rounds/minute

25°C to 60°C

Linear increase in accordance with the temperature

≥ 60°C

16000 rounds/minute

3.18.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-91 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


203


3 Boards

Figure 3-91 Front panel of the FAN

FAN

CRIT

MAJ

MIN

Indicators Table 3-187 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator

State

Meaning

FAN

On (green)

The fan is working properly.

On (red)

The fan is faulty.

Off

The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

NOTE

The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the subrack.

ESD Wrist Strap Jack An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper grounding of the human body.

Labels The front panel of the FAN has the following labels: l Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204


l

3 Boards

Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.

3.18.5 Valid Slots The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-92 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis Slot 10 Slot 11 (FAN) Slot 9

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 1

Slot 2

Figure 3-93 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS Slot 10 Slot 11 (FAN) Slot 9

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 1

Slot 2

3.18.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board power consumption. Table 3-188 lists the technical specifications for the FAN. Table 3-188 Technical specifications for the FAN Item

Performance


28.5 mm x 86.2 mm x 217.6 mm

Weight

0.302 kg

Power consumption

< 4.1 W (room temperature) < 29.6 W (high temperature)

3.19 TCU6 The TDM connecting unit (TCU6) is a 6xE1 port conversion board. The TCU6 implements conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


205


3 Boards

3.19.1 Version Description The functional version of the TCU6 is SL91.

3.19.2 Functions and Features The TCU6 implements conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports for 6xE1 services. In application, the TCU6 usually works with the SP3S (120 ohms) by connecting them using an E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector, therefore enabling conversion between Anea 96 ports and RJ45 ports. Table 3-189 lists the functions and features that the TCU6 supports. Table 3-189 Functions and features Function and Feature

Description

Basic functions

Enables conversion between Anea 96 ports and RJ45 ports for E1 services when this board is connected to the DB44 connector of an E1 transit cable, the other end of which is terminated with an Anea 96 connector.

Port specifications

RJ45 port

6

DB44 port

1 (for receiving/transmitting 6xE1 signals)

Board information query and display on the NMS

Not supported

NOTE

The TCU6 is a passive port conversion board, which does not provide software interfaces and ports for connecting to the backplane.

3.19.3 Front Panel There are six RJ45 ports and one DB44 port on the front panel.

TCU6

Front Panel Diagram 1 1

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

2

3

4

5

6

6


206


3 Boards

Ports Table 3-190 Description of the ports on the TCU6 Port

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

1-6 (RJ45)

The first to sixth E1 RJ45 ports

RJ45

-

1-6 (DB44)

The first to sixth E1 DB44 ports

DB44

5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and a DB44 Connector

Figure 3-94 shows the front view of an RJ45 connector. Figure 3-94 Front view of an RJ45 connector

87654321

NOTE

The two indicators on an RJ45 connector do not indicate port status and are steady off.

Each RJ45 port transmits 1xE1 signals. Table 3-191 provides the pin assignments for an RJ45 port. Table 3-191 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Port

Pin

Signal

n (n = 1-6)

1

The nth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

2

The nth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3

Reserved

4

The nth received E1 differential signal (+)

5

The nth received E1 differential signal (-)

6

Reserved

7

Reserved

8

Reserved


207


3 Boards

Figure 3-95 shows the front view of a DB44 connector. Figure 3-95 Pin assignments for a DB44 port Pos. 15

Pos. 1

Pos. 30

Pos. 16

Pos. 31

Pos. 44

Table 3-192 Pin assignments for a DB44 port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

15


38


30


23


14


37


29


22


13


36


28


21


12


35


27


20

The four transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

11


34


26


19


10


33


25


18


9


32



208


3 Boards

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

24


17


8


31


7


16


1-6 and 39-4 4

Grounding

Othe rs

Not defined

3.19.4 Valid Slots The TCU6 can be inserted in slot 4 or 6 of the IDU chassis. The TCU6 has no logical slots and is not displayed on the NMS. The TCU6 usually works with the SP3S. The TCU6 is inserted in slot 6 and the SP3S is inserted in slot 4. Figure 3-96 Slots for the TCU6 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)

Slot 11 (FAN)

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 5

Slot 6 (TCU6)

Slot 3

Slot 4 (SP3S)

Slot 1

Slot 2

You can also insert the TCU6 in slot 4 and the SP3S in slot 6.

3.19.5 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including only the mechanical behavior.

Mechanical Behavior Table 3-193 Mechanical behavior

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Item

Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight

0.27 kg Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209


4 Accessories

4

Accessories

About This Chapter The accessories of the OptiX RTN 950 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. 4.2 PDU A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices in the cabinet.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


210


4 Accessories

4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

R11

R12

R13

R14

R15

R16

T1

T2

T3

T4

T5

T6

T7

T8

T9

T10

T11

T12

T13

T14

T15

T16

1-8 9-16

Ports Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel Port

Description

Connector Type

T1-T16

Transmit ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16

Receive ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment)

1-8

The first to eighth E1 ports (connected to an IDU)

9-16

The ninth to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt

Connecting a PGND cable

DB37

-

NOTE

The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


211


4 Accessories

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

20

The first E1 received differential signal (+)

21

The first E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

2

The first E1 received differential signal (-)

3

The first E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

22

The second E1 received differential signal (+)

23

The second E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

4

The second E1 received differential signal (-)

5

The second E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

24

The third E1 received differential signal (+)

25

The third E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

6

The third E1 received differential signal (-)

7

The third E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

26

The fourth E1 received differential signal (+)

27

The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

8

The fourth E1 received differential signal (-)

9

The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

36

The fifth E1 received differential signal (+)

35

The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

17

The fifth E1 received differential signal (-)

16

The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

34

The sixth E1 received differential signal (+)

33

The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

15

The sixth E1 received differential signal (-)

14

The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

32

The seventh E1 received differential signal (+)

31

The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

13

The seventh E1 received differential signal (-)

12

The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (-)


212


4 Accessories

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

30

The eighth E1 received differential signal (+)

29

The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)

11

The eighth E1 received differential signal (-)

10

The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)

Others

Reserved

-

-

4.2 PDU A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of a PDU.

Front Panel Diagram Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU 1

1

2

3

2

4

OUTPUT

3

4

A

B

ON

2

1

3

4

OUTPUT

ON RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

OFF 20A

20A 20A 20A

OFF

INPUT

20A

20A 20A 20A

5

6

1. Output power terminals (A)

2. PGND terminals

3. Input power terminals

4. Output power terminals (B)

5. Power switches (A)

6. Power switches (B)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


213


4 Accessories

Ports Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU Position

Port

Description

Output power terminals (A)

+

Power output (+)

-

Power output (-)

PGND terminals

Wiring terminal for a two-hole OT terminal

For connecting PGND cables

Input power terminals

RTN1(+)

The first power input (+)

RTN2(+)

The second power input (+)

NEG1(-)

The first power input (-)

NEG2(-)

The second power input (-)

Output power terminals (B)

+

Power output (+)

-

Power output (-)

Power switches (A)

20 A

Switches for power outputs

Power switches (B)

20 A

The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on side A. Switches for power outputs The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on side B.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.

Functions l

The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.

l

Each input power supply provides four outputs.

l

The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.

l

The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.

Working Principle A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple distribution operations for the input power. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


214


4 Accessories

Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU

OUTPUT A + SW1

SW2

INPUT

+ +

SW3

RTN1(+) BGND

+

SW4

RTN2(+)

-

1 2

3 4

OUTPUT B +

NEG1(-) BGND

SW1

NEG2(-) SW2

+ +

SW4

PGND

+

SW4

-

1 2

3 4

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default mode. A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution Mode To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1 (+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


215


4 Accessories

Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar. Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


216


5 Cables

5

Cables

About This Chapter This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on the IDU 950. 5.1 Power Cable A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU. 5.2 PGND Cable PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables. 5.3 IF Jumper An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. 5.4 XPIC Cable An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected. 5.6 STM-1 Cable An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required. 5.7 E1 Cables E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel. 5.8 Orderwire Cable An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


217


5 Cables

PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone. 5.9 Network Cable A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


218


5 Cables

5.1 Power Cable A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

Cable Diagram Figure 5-1 Power cable

Table 5-1 Power cable specifications Model

Cable

Terminal

6 mm2 power cable and terminal

Power cable, 450 V/ 750 V, H07Z-K-6 mm2, blue/black, low smoke zero halogen cable

Common terminal, single cord end terminal, conductor cross section 6 mm2, 30 A, insertion depth 12 mm, blue

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 950, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 43 m.

5.2 PGND Cable PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment share the same ground. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


219


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable Main label 1

Cable tie

H.S.tube

2

L 1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments None.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and external equipment share the same ground.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


220


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable Main label 1

L Bare crimping terminal, OT


5.3 IF Jumper An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected to the IF board. NOTE

l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required. l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable to the IF board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


221


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-4 IF jumper 1 H.S.tube 2 PCS

2

L = 3 cm

2000 mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male

2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female


5.4 XPIC Cable An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same XPIC work group. When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the XIN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals. XPIC cables are available in the following types: l

XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.

l

XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


222


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-5 XPIC cable 1

1

L1 2

2

L2

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male

2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male


5.5 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected.

Types of Fiber Jumpers Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1

Connector 2

Cable

LC/PC

FC/PC

2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

SC/PC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 mm single-mode fiber 223


Connector 1

5 Cables

Connector 2

Cable 2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC

LC/PC

2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 950, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.

Fiber Connectors The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector, SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector. Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


224


5 Cables

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 STM-1 Cable An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


225


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable

1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male

2. Main label

3. Coaxial cable


Cable Specifications Item

Description

Connector

Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male

Cable model

Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded

Number of cores

One

Core diameter

Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm)

Length

10 m

Fireproof class

CM

5.7 E1 Cables E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment. Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


226


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment Main label 1 W

A

X1

ViewA

Pos.96 Cable connector, Anea, 96-pin,female

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female NOTE

l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance. l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of 2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial connector.

Pin Assignments Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable Pin

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

W Core

Serial No.

1

Tip

1

2

Ring

3

Tip

4

Ring

5

Tip

6

Ring

7

Tip

3

5

7

Remark s

Pin

R0

R1

R2

R3

W

Remark s

Core

Serial No.

25

Tip

2

T0

26

Ring

27

Tip

4

T1

28

Ring

29

Tip

6

T2

30

Ring

31

Tip

8

T3


227


Pin

W Core

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

5 Cables

8

Ring

9

Tip

10

Ring

11

Tip

12

Ring

13

Tip

14

Ring

15

Tip

16

Ring

18

Ring

17

Tip

20

Ring

19

Tip

22

Ring

21

Tip

24

Ring

23

Tip

50

Ring

49

Tip

52

Ring

51

Tip

54

Ring

53

Tip

56

Ring

55 Shell

Serial No.

Remark s

Pin

W Core

32

Ring

33

Tip

34

Ring

35

Tip

36

Ring

37

Tip

38

Ring

39

Tip

40

Ring

42

Ring

41

Tip

44

Ring

43

Tip

46

Ring

45

Tip

48

Ring

47

Tip

74

Ring

73

Tip

76

Ring

75

Tip

78

Ring

75

Tip

80

Ring

Tip

79

Tip

Braid

Shell

Braid

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

R11

R12

R13

R14

R15


Serial No.

Remark s

10

T4

12

T5

14

T6

16

T7

18

T8

20

T9

22

T10

24

T11

26

T12

28

T13

30

T14

32

T15

228


5 Cables

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable Pin

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

W

Rema rks

Tape Color

Pin

Blue

Color of the Core

Relati onshi p

1

White

R0

2

Blue

Twiste d pair

3

White

R1

4

Green

Twiste d pair

5

White

R2

6

Grey

Twiste d pair

7

Red

R3

8

Orang e

Twiste d pair

9

Red

R4

10

Brown

Twiste d pair

11

Black

R5

12

Blue

Twiste d pair

13

Black

R6

14

Green

Twiste d pair

15

Black

Twiste d pair

R7

16

Grey

17

White

18

Blue

19

White

20

Green

21

White

22

Grey

23

Red

Twiste d pair

R8

Twiste d pair

R9

Twiste d pair

R10

Twiste d pair

R11

Orang e

W

Rema rks

Tape Color

Blue

Color of the Core

Relati onshi p

25

White

T0

26

Orang e

Twiste d pair

27

White

T1

28

Brown

Twiste d pair

29

Red

T2

30

Blue

Twiste d pair

31

Red

T3

32

Green

Twiste d pair

33

Red

T4

34

Grey

Twiste d pair

35

Black

T5

36

Orang e

Twiste d pair

37

Black

T6

38

Brown

Twiste d pair

39

Yello w

Twiste d pair

T7

40

Blue

41

White

T8

42

Orang e

Twiste d pair

43

White

T9

44

Brown

Twiste d pair

45

Red

T10

46

Blue

Twiste d pair

47

Red

Twiste d pair

T11


Orang e

229


Pin

W Color of the Core

24

Orang e

49

Red

50

Brown

51

Black

52

Blue

53

Black

54

Green

55

Black

56 Shell

Relati onshi p

5 Cables

Rema rks

Tape Color

Pin

W Color of the Core

48

Green

73

Red

74

Grey

75

Black

76

Orang e

77

Black

78

Brown

79

Yello w

Grey

80

Blue

Braid

Shell

Braid

Twiste d pair

R12

Twiste d pair

R13

Twiste d pair

R14

Twiste d pair

R15

Relati onshi p

Rema rks

Twiste d pair

T12

Twiste d pair

T13

Twiste d pair

T14

Twiste d pair

T15

Tape Color

5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF. One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU. The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


230


5 Cables

Cable Diagram Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel

X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female

X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male

Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"

Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Pin Assignments Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Wire

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2/X3

Remarks

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2/X3

Remarks

W1

X1.2

X2.20

R0

X1.10

X2.36

R4

X1.1

X2.2

X1.9

X2.17

X1.26

X2.21

X1.34

X2.35

X1.25

X2.3

X1.33

X2.16

X1.4

X2.22

X1.12

X2.34

X1.3

X2.4

X1.11

X2.15

X1.28

X2.23

X1.36

X2.33

X1.27

X2.5

X1.35

X2.14

X1.6

X2.24

X1.14

X2.32

T0

R1

T1

R2


T4

R5

T5

R6 231


Wire

W2

5 Cables

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2/X3

X1.5

X2.6

X1.30

X2.25

X1.29

X2.7

X1.8

X2.26

X1.7

X2.8

X1.32

X2.27

X1.31

X2.9

X1.18

X3.20

X1.17

X3.2

X1.42

X3.21

X1.41

X3.3

X1.20

X3.22

X1.19

X3.4

X1.44

X3.23

X1.43

X3.5

X1.22

X3.24

X1.21

X3.6

X1.46

X3.25

X1.45

X3.7

X1.24

X3.26

X1.23

X3.8

X1.48

X3.27

X1.47 Shell

Remarks

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2/X3

X1.13

X2.13

X1.38

X2.31

X1.37

X2.12

X1.16

X2.30

X1.15

X2.11

X1.40

X2.29

X1.39

X2.10

X1.50

X3.36

X1.49

X3.17

X1.74

X3.35

X1.73

X3.16

X1.52

X3.34

X1.51

X3.15

X1.76

X3.33

X1.75

X3.14

X1.54

X3.32

X1.53

X3.13

X1.78

X3.31

X1.77

X3.12

X1.56

X3.30

X1.55

X3.11

X1.80

X3.29

X3.9

X1.79

X3.10

Braid

Shell

Braid

T2

R3

T3

R8

T8

R9

T9

R10

T10

R11

T11

Remarks

T6

R7

T7

R12

T12

R13

T13

R14

T14

R15

T15

5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and a DB44 Connector When the TCU6 works with the SP3S, an E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector is required for connecting the two boards. For the E1 transit cable, the Anea 96 connector is connected to the E1 port on the SP3S, and the DB44 connector is connected to the DB44 E1 port on the TCU6. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


232


5 Cables

This E1 transit cable can transmit 6xE1 signals. The port impedance of the cable is 120 ohms, and therefore this cable can work only with the 120-ohm SP3S. The cable is 0.6 m long.

Cable Diagram Figure 5-12 E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector Main Label

A

X2

Pos.15

Pos.16

Pos.30

Pos.31

X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

X2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

Pin Assignments Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Wire

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2

Remarks

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2

Remarks

W1

X1.2

X2.15

R0

X1.8

X2.12

R3

X1.1

X2.30

X1.7

X2.27

X1.26

X2.38

X1.32

X2.35

X1.25

X2.23

X1.31

X2.20

X1.4

X2.14

X1.10

X2.11

X1.3

X2.29

X1.9

X2.26

X1.28

X2.37

X1.34

X2.34

X1.27

X2.22

X1.33

X2.19

X1.6

X2.13

X1.12

X2.10

T0

R1

T1

R2


T3

R4

T4

R5 233


Wire

5 Cables

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2

X1.5

X2.28

X1.30

X2.36

X1.29 Shell

Remarks

Connecto r X1

Connecto r X2

X1.11

X2.25

X1.36

X2.33

X2.21

X1.35

X2.18

Braid

Shell

Braid

T2

Remarks

T5

5.8 Orderwire Cable An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone.

Cable Diagram Figure 5-13 Orderwire cable 1

Main label 6

6

1

X1

X2

1

1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector

Pin Assignments Table 5-7 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable Connector X1

Connector X2

Function

X1.3

X2.3

Tip

X1.4

X2.4

Ring

5.9 Network Cable A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


234


5 Cables

Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs) and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-8. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-9. Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDIs Pin

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

1

TX+


BIDA+


2

TX-


BIDA-


3

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+


4

Reserved

-

BIDC+


5

Reserved

-

BIDC-


6

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-


7

Reserved

-

BIDD+


8

Reserved

-

BIDD-


Table 5-9 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs Pin

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

1

RX+

Receiving data (+)

BIDB+


2

RX-

Receiving data (-)

BIDB-


3

TX+


BIDA+


4

Reserved

-

BIDD+


5

Reserved

-

BIDD-



235


Pin

5 Cables

10/100BASE-T(X)

1000BASE-T

Signal

Function

Signal

Function

6

TX-


BIDA-


7

Reserved

-

BIDC+


8

Reserved

-

BIDC-


Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment. The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN 950 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.

Cable Diagram Figure 5-14 Network cable 1

Label 1 Main label

Label 2

8

8

1

1

1. Network port connector, RJ45

Pin Assignments Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relation

X1.1

X2.1

White/Orange

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Orange

X1.3

X2.3

White/Green

X1.6

X2.6

Green


Twisted pair

236


5 Cables

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relation

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

Twisted pair

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown

X1.8

X2.8

Brown

Twisted pair

Table 5-11 Pin assignments for the crossover cable

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Connector X1

Connector X2

Color

Relation

X1.6

X2.2

Orange

Twisted pair

X1.3

X2.1

White/Orange

X1.1

X2.3

White/Green

X1.2

X2.6

Green

X1.4

X2.4

Blue

X1.5

X2.5

White/Blue

X1.7

X2.7

White/Brown

X1.8

X2.8

Brown


Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

237


A Parameters Description

A

Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameters for Network Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management. A.2 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/ EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.8 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services. A.10 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


238



A.1 Parameters for Network Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.

A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


239



Parameters for the Search Field Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Address Type

IP Address of GNE

IP Address Range of GNE

l If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only.

NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE

l If the IP protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE, select IP Address Range of GNE. l To select the gateway NE only, select IP Address of GNE. NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments, ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


240



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Search Address

-

-

l If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE, enter the IP address of the gateway NE, such as 129.9.x.x. l If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE, enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located, such as 129.9.255.255. l If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE.

User Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE.

Password

-

-

This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


241



Parameter for Searching for NEs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Create NE after search

Selected

Deselected

l To create NEs in batches, it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. The NEs are automatically created after they are found.

Deselected

l After Create NE after search is selected, enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE. NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected, Search for NE is selected automatically.

NE User

-

-

l This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.

Password

-

-

l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


242



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Upload after create

Selected

Deselected

l This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created.

Deselected

l If only Upload after create is selected, Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.

Parameter for the Found NEs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE, which consists of extended ID and NE ID.

GNE Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE.

GNE ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE.

Created As GNE

Yes

Yes

l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created.

No

l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. Connection Mode

Common

Common

The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL.

1400

This parameter specifies the communication port.

Security SSL

Port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


243



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Status

Created

-

This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.

Uncreated

A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

Navigation Path 1.

Choose File > Creat > NE from the Main Menu.

2.

Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 950 from the Object Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the type of the NE to be created.

ID

1 to 49135

-

l The ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. l The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

Extended ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1 to 254

9


If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change Extended ID.

244



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Name

-

-

l This parameter specifies the name of the NE. l After you have specified the name of the NE, the name is displayed under the icon of the NE.

Remarks

-

-

This parameter specifies the remarks of the NE.

Gateway Type

Non-Gateway

Non-Gateway

l This parameter is set to Gateway if the new NE is a gateway NE.

Gateway

l This parameter is set to Non-Gateway if the new NE is a nongateway NE. l This parameter is set according to the DCN planning if the new NE can function as a gateway NE or a nongateway NE. Gateway

-

-

This parameter indicates the gateway NE of the new NE when Gateway Type is set to Non-Gateway.

Protocol

IP

IP

l This parameter needs to be set when Gateway Type is set to Gateway.

OSI

l When the OSI over DCC solution is used, this parameter is set to OSI. l In other cases, this parameter is set to IP. IP Address

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter indicates the IP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to IP.

245



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Connection Mode

Common

Common

The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL.

Security SSL

Port

-

1400

This parameter specifies the communication port.

NE User

-

-

This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created.

Password

-

-

This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created.

NSAP Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the NSAP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to OSI. You need to set the area ID only, and the other parts are automatically generated by the NE.

A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path 1.

In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.

2.

Choose Object Attributes.

3.

Click Modify NE ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


246



Parameters for Changing NE IDs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

New ID

-

-

l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

1 to 254

New Extended ID

9

If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.

A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path 1.

Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

2.

Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the NE.

NE ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


247



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronous Mode

Standard NTP

Null

l If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server.

NM Null

l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP. Standard NTP Authentication

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.

Disabled

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Standard NTP Server Identifier

NE ID

NE ID

l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP.

IP

l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


248



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Standard NTP Server

-

-

l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server Key

0 to 1024

0

l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0". l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronization Starting Time

-

-

l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


249



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

DST

Selected

Deselected

l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time.

Deselected

l This parameter is set according to the actual situation. Synchronization Period (days)

1 to 300

l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS.

1

l It is recommended that you use the default value.

A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time.

Navigation Path 1.

Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management from the Main Menu.

2.

Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click .

Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

-

-


TimeZone

-

-

This parameter indicates the time zone.

DST

-

-

This parameter indicates whether DST is enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


250



Parameters for Time Zone Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Time Zone

-

-

l After the time zone is changed, the current time of the NE is changed accordingly. l This parameter is set according to the place where the NE is located.

DST

Selected

Deselected

Deselected

l The parameters related to daylight saving time can be valid only when this parameter is selected. l This parameter is set according to the situation whether daylight saving time is used in the place where the NE is located.

1 to 120

Offset

-

This parameter specifies the offset value of the daylight saving time.

WEEK

This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time.

Unit: minute(s) Start Rule

WEEK DATE

Start Time

-

-

This parameter specifies the start daylight saving time.

End Rule

WEEK

WEEK

This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time.

-

This parameter specifies the end daylight saving time.

DATE End Time

-

A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

Navigation Path 1.

Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

2.

Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


251




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Key

1 to 1024

-

l This parameter indicates the key for NTP authentication. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server.

-

Password

-

l This parameter indicates the password that corresponds to Key. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server.

Yes

Trusted

Yes

No

l When this parameter is set to No, the key verification is not trusted. After receiving the key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. l When this parameter is set to Yes, the key verification is trusted. After receiving the key, the NE provides the clock synchronization service. l After receiving an unknown or incorrect key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. Hence, it is recommended that you set a trusted key only.

A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


252



Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the License Management tab.

Parameters for Managing Licenses Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

This parameter displays the boards that need to be supported by licenses.

License File Type

-

-

This parameter displays the license type corresponding to each board.

Capacity

-

-

This parameter displays the capacity of each board.

Loaded

-

-

This parameter displays whether the corresponding license file is loaded to each board.

A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.

Navigation Path 1.

On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function.

2.

Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and .

then click

Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-


NE Type

OptiX RTN 950

-

This parameter indicates the type of the NE.

Operation Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the type of the operation, such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Auto Disabling

Disabled

Enabled

This parameter specifies whether to automatically disable the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Enabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


253



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Auto Disabling Time(min)

1 to 2880

5

This parameter specifies the time of automatically disabling the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

-

Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID.

Gateway IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

-

255.255.0.0

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1.

Extended ID

1 to 254

9

l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


254



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NSAP Address

-

-

This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE.

Connection Mode

Common + Security SSL

Common + Security SSL

l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE.

Common Security SSL

l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS, Connection Mode can be set to Common. l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking, Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level, Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.

A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


255



Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port that is connected to the DCC channel.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:

Disabled

l If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. l If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. Channel

D1-D3 D4-D12 D1-D12 D1-D1

D1-D1 (for the PDH radio whose transmission capacity is less than 16xE1) D1-D3 (for other cases)

It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the IP DCN or OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Channel for the SDH line ports is set to a value that is the same as the value for third-party network. l If the DCC transparent transmission solution is adopted, the value of Channel for the SDH line ports should not conflict with the value that is set for the third-party network.

DCC Resources

-

-

This parameter indicates the DCC resources.

Communication Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the communication status.

Protocol Type

HWECC

HWECC

It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:

TCP/IP

l If the IP DCN solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.

OSI L2DCN

l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI. l When the L2 DCN solution is used, set Protocol Type to L2DCN.

IP Address

-

-

l IP Address is available only if Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the interface IP address of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


256



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Subnet Mask

-

-

l Subnet Mask is available only if Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the subnet mask of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.

3.

Click Create.

Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Timeslot/ Porta

-

-

This parameter specifies the source timeslot or port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


257



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port

D1

-

l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time.

D2

l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the customized overhead bytes that are used for transmitting asynchronous data services.

D3 D4 D5 D6

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.

D7 D8 D9

NOTE Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.

D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Sink Timeslot/ Porta

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or port.


258



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port

D1

-

l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time.

D2

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.

D3 D4 D5 D6

l Generally, Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be set to a value that is the same as or different from the value in the case of Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port.

D7 D8 D9 D10

NOTE Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.

D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4

NOTE

a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions the same regardless of the source port or sink port.

A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree.

Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ECC Extended Mode

Auto mode

Auto mode

It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Specified mode


259



Parameters for Setting the Server Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP

-

-

This parameter indicates the IP address of the server.

Port

1601 to 1699

0

l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the server of the extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE that is close to the NMS functions as the server. l This parameter can be set to any value from 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the Client Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Opposite IP

-

0.0.0.0

Port

1601 to 1699

0

l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the client of the extended ECC. Except for the NE that functions as the server, all other NEs that use the extended ECC can function as the client. l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set to the IP address of the server NE and the specified port number.

A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


260



Parameter for NE ECC Link Management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination NE

-

-

This parameter specifies the sink NE of the ECC connection.

Transfer NE

-

-

This parameter specifies the next transfer NE and the direction of the ECC route.

Distance

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of NEs (excluding the source NE and sink NE) through which the ECC route passes, namely, the number of ECC packet forwarding attempts. The value can be set to a value that is greater than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts. If the value is set to a value that is less than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts, however, the destination NE fails to be accessed. l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the source NE is adjacent to the destination NE.

-

Level

-

l This parameter indicates that multiple ECC routes from the source NE to the destination NE may be available. An ECC route of a higher priority is selected to transmit the packets to the destination NE. l If the ECC route is generated automatically, the priority is 4. l If the ECC route is added manually, the priority is 5.

Mode

-

-

This parameter indicates the ECC routing mode.

SCC No.

-

-

This parameter specifies the physical port through which the ECC route passes. The value of this parameter is automatically assigned the NE.

A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test This topic describes the parameters that are used to test ECC availability.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


261



Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.

Ping Test Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE

-

-

Specifies the NE for which a ping test will be performed.

Packet Length (Byte)

0-800

64

l Specifies the test packet length.

Packet Quantity

1-65535

l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. 3

l Specifies the number of test packets. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Sending Interval (ms)

0-65535

0

l Specifies the test packet transmission interval. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

To Be Translated (ms)

1-65535

1000

l Specifies the maximum time for test packet to wait until being responded to. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Traceroute Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE

-

-

Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test will be performed.


0-65535

1000


Forwarding NEs

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

0-255

64

Specifies the number of NEs that test packets will traverse during the forwarding process.


262



A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IP Route Management tab.

Parameters for IP Route Management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field.

Subnet Mask

-

-

This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.

Gateway

-

-

This parameter indicates the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.

Protocol

-

-

l DIRECT: indicates the route between the local NE and an adjacent NE. l STATIC: indicates the route that is created manually. l OSPF: indicates the route between the local NE and a non-adjacent NE. l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered by the routing information protocol. l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose Destination Address is beyond the OSPF domain. l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose Destination Address is in a not so stubby area (NSSA). l A route can be deleted in the case of STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the other cases. l Compared with a dynamic route, a static route has a higher priority. If any conflict occurs, the static route is preferred.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


263



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Interface

-

-

This parameter indicates the interface that is used on the route. Interface is a concept specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create multiple types of interface, such as a loopback interface (namely, the interface whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet interface, and PPP interface. Each interface must have a unique interface name.

Metric

-

-

This parameter indicates the maximum number of routers through which the packets are transmitted. Metric is used to indicate the overhead bytes that are transmitted to the destination address. The smaller the value, the less the overhead bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same destination address, a route whose overhead is less is preferred to transmit the packets.

A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the IP Route Management tab.

3.

Click New.

Parameters for Creating IP Routes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination Address

-

-

This parameter specifies the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field.

Subnet Mask

-

-

This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


264



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Gateway

-

-

This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.

A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test This topic describes the parameters that are used to test IP DCN availability.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.

Ping Test Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE IP

-

-

Specifies the NE for which a ping test will be performed.

Packet Length (Byte)

0-800

64

l Specifies the test packet length.

Packet Quantity

1-65535

l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. 3

l Specifies the number of test packets. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Sending Interval (ms)

0-65535

0

l Specifies the test packet transmission interval. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.


1-65535

5000


Traceroute Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Target NE IP

-

-

Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test will be performed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


265



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Max Hops

1-30

10

Specifies the number of hops which test packets traverse during the packet transmission process.

A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

OSPF Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Area

-

0.0.0.0

l If only an OSPF area is configured on an NE, set this parameter according to the planning information. l If multiple OSPF areas are configured on an NE, this parameter takes its default value 0.0.0.0.

DCC Hello Timer (s)

1 to 255

10

l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello packet timer for the DCC channel or inband DCN. l The Hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


266



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535

40

l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router for the DCC channel or inband DCN. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of twice the value of DCC Hello Timer (s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

DCC Retransmission Timer(s)

1 to 65535

5

l DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the interval for transmitting a request through the DCC channel or inband DCN to retransmit the link state advertisement (LSA) packets. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

DCC Delay(s)

1 to 3600

1

l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the DCC channel or inband DCN. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of DCC Delay(s). l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


267



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAN Hello Timer (s)

1 to 255

10

l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello packet timer at the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l The hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer of the NE to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535

40

l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the LAN interface. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of two times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


268



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAN Retransmission Timer(s)

1 to 65535

5

l LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the time for transmitting a request for retransmission of the LSA packets through the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

LAN Delay(s)

1 to 3600

1

l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of LAN Delay(s). l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

OSPF Status

Enabled

Enabled

Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is enabled. If an NE uses only static routes with OSPF disabled, set this parameter to Disabled.

Disabled

l Specifies whether to enable the STUB Area.

Disabled

STUB Area

Enabled Disabled

l Set this parameter as required. l A backbone area cannot be a STUB area. NSSA Area

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA Area. l Set this parameter as required. l A backbone area cannot be an NSSA area.

Direct route

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the direct route automatic flooding function is enabled. l Direct route: the route detected by the link layer protocol. l Set this parameter as required.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


269



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Static route

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the static route automatic flooding function is enabled.

Disabled

l Static route: the route manually configured by the network administrator. l Set this parameter as required. RIP route

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the RIP route automatic flooding function is enabled. l RIP route: the route detected by the RIP protocol. l Set this parameter as required.

Default route

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the default route automatic flooding function is enabled for ASBRs. l Default OSPF routes are routes whose destination addresses and subnet masks are 0s. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.

Router ID

-

-

The Router IP address is always the NE IP address.

Opaque LSA of External Network Port

Enabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port transmits Type-10 LSAs.

Disabled

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port transmits network management information. l Set this parameter as required. LAN Interface

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is enabled for the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the OSPF protocol is communicated with other equipment through the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


270



OSPF authentication parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Interface Type

-

-

l Displays the DCN port types that allow the OSPF authentication key to be specified. l LAN indicates the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l DCC indicates the DCC channels or inband DCN port.

none

Authentication Type

none

MD5

l Specifies the OSPF authentication mode for which a key needs to be set. l If Authentication Type is MD5, a key needs to be set for the MD5 authentication mode.

simple

l If Authentication Type is simple, a key needs to be set for the simple authentication mode. l If Authentication Type is none, all preset keys for the related port type are cleared. Authentication Password

-

-

Specifies the OSPF authentication password for each port type.

MD5 Key

1-255

-

MD5 Key is available only when Authentication Type is MD5.

A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


271



Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Proxy ARP

Disabled

Disabled

l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other.

Enabled

l To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE returns an ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.

A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas This topic describes the parameters that are related to management of multiple OSPF areas.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.

Parameters Required for Configuring Multiple OSPF Areas Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

-

-

Displays the area ID.

Default Area

-

-

Displays whether an area is the default area.

Authentication Type

none

none

MD5

l Specifies the OSPF authentication type used by an area.

simple

l none indicates no authentication.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


272



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Automatic Route Aggregation

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether automatic route aggregation is enabled for an area.

Disabled

l The number of routes after automatic route aggregation is the same as the number of Networks. Stub Type

-

-

Displays the STUB type of an area.

Network Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

-

-

Displays the IP addresses of the Networks in an area.

Subnet Mask

-

-

Displays the subnet masks of the Networks in an area.

Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

-

-

Displays the IP address of the Network where route aggregation is manually enabled.

Subnet Mask

-

-

Displays the subnet mask of the Network where route aggregation is manually enabled.

A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding OSFP areas.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


273



Parameters Required for Creating OSPF Areas Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

-

-

l Set the area ID of a new OSPF area according to the planning information. l An NE can be configured with a maximum of four OSPF areas.

IP Address

-

-

l Set the IP addresses of the Networks in an area according to planning information. l An area supports a maximum of four Networks.

Subnet Mask

-

-

Set the subnet masks of the Networks in an area according to planning information. A subnet mask can contain a maximum of 30 bits.

Authentication Type

none

none

Specifies the OSPF authentication type used by an area according to planning information.

MD5 simple

l none indicates no authentication. l MD5 indicates that authentication is performed based on the preset password, with the password encrypted in MD5 mode. l simple: indicates that authentication is performed based on the preset password, with the password not encrypted.

Enabled

Automatic Route Aggregation

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether automatic route aggregation is enabled for an area. l The number of routes after automatic route aggregation is the same as the number of Networks.

STUB Type

NON-STUB STUB NSSA

NON-STUB

Set the STUB type of an area according to planning information. l For the backbone area, this parameter must be set to NON-STUB. l For other areas, it is recommended that you set this parameter to NON-STUB. If required, this parameter can also be set to STUB or NSSA.

A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually Aggregated This topic describes the parameters for adding routes to be manually aggregated. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


274



Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

In Manual Route Aggregation, click Add.

Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID Address

-

-

Specifies the IP address of the Network where routes need to be aggregated manually.

Subnet Mask

-

-

Specifies the subnet mask of the Network where routes need to be aggregated manually.

A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

Port OSPF Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the ports that allow OSPF parameters to be set.

Path Type

-

-

Displays the current DCC channel type.

OSPF Status

Enabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF. l Set this parameter as required.

Disabled Opaque LSA of External Network Port

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether DCC channels support Opaque LSAs. l Set this parameter as required.

A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


275



Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.

Network Layer Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

-

-


Configuration Role

ES

L1

l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area. It uses a route in the local area only and accesses the other area by distributing the default route of the nearest L2 NE.

L1 L2

l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area and can use a route in the backbone area. The backbone area is a collection that is formed by consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles must be consecutive (connected to each other). NOTE Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.

-

Current Role

-

This parameter indicates the current role.

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Link Adjacency Table Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port used for OSI communication.

Data Link Layer

-

-

This parameter indicates the protocol that is used at the data link layer.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


276



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Adjacency No.

-

-

l This parameter specifies the identifier of the adjacency that is set up by two NEs through the OSI protocol. One adjacency number corresponds to an OSI adjacency. l The value is dynamically allocated by the NE.

Adjacency Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the type of the adjacency.

Adjacency State

-

-

This parameter indicates the state of the adjacency.

Peer End Area ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the area ID that is contained in the NSAP address of the opposite NE.

Peer End System ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the system ID of the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address.

Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination SYSID

-

-

This parameter indicates the system ID of the destination NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address.

Metric

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of hops that reach the destination NE or destination area.

Adjacency No.1

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.

Adjacency No.2

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.

A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


277



Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the OSI Tunnel tab.

Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Remote IP Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

LAPD Actor

User

User

l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.

Network

l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol, they can perform the LAPD negotiation only when the LAPD actor is set to User at one end and is set to Network at the other end. Efficient LAPD Enable

-

-

This parameter indicates whether the current LAPD is enabled.

Configurable LAPD Enable

Enabled

Enabled

This parameter specifies whether the LAPD is enabled.

Disabled

LAPD Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Remote IP Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

L2 Wait Time to Retry(s)

1 to 20

1

l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time to Retry(s). l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the interval for retransmitting packets at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


278



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L2 Retry Times

2 to 6

3

l This parameter specifies L2 Retry Times. l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum number of packet retransmission attempts at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Retry Times needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Retry Times can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Retry Times to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

L3 Hello Timer(s)

1 to 100

3

l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer(s). l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello packet timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for periodical transmission of the Hello packets. l The Hello timer determines the interval for transmitting the Hello packets once. L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hello Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


279



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L3 ES Timer(s)

1 to 200

50

l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer (s). l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information on the ES route. l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

L3 IS Timer(s)

1 to 200

10

l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer (s). l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information through the L1/L2 router. l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer (s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


280



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L3 Hold Timer(s)

2 to 63

5

l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer (s). l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold timer at the LAPD link network layer. l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hold Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

1 to 63

COST

20

l This parameter specifies COST. l COST indicates the overhead value of the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the OSI tunnel. l The overhead value determines whether this link is perverted. If the overhead value is smaller, this link has a higher priority to be selected. l This parameter needs to set according to the planning information.

A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters This topic describes the OSI port parameters.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Parameters tab.

OSI port parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAPD Role

User

User

l This parameter is available only when Protocol Type is OSI.

Network

l Set LAPD Role to User at one end of a DCC and to Network at the other end of the DCC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


281



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAPD MTU

-

-

This parameter displays the maximum LAPD packet length.

A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Bandwidth Management tab.

Parameters for Bandwidth Management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Ethernet Board VLAN ID

2 to 4094

4094

l The equipment on the traditional DCN can be connected to the NMS through the SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 950 can also be connected to the NMS through an Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is used to carry the network management information, the NE differentiates the network management information and Ethernet service information according to the VLAN ID. l If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on the network-wide inband DCN.

Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

64 to 1000

512

Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet link.

E1 Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

-

-

The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.

Tunnel Bandwidth (Kbit/s)

-

-


IF Port Bandwidth (Kbit/s)

64 to 1000

512

IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the radio link.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


282



A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Name

-

-

This parameter indicates the port name.

Enabled Status

Enabled

Enabled

l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port.

Disabled

l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is enabled for the ports at both ends of a link. IP

Protocol Type

IP

HWECC

l If Protocol Type is set to different values for two interconnected sets of equipment, equipment interconnection fails. Therefore, set Protocol Type to the same value for both ends of a link.

L2DCN

-

IP Address

l Specifies the DCN protocol used by the inband DCN.

-

l This parameter is available only when Protocol Type is set to IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the interface IP address of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

-

Subnet Mask

-

l This parameter is available only when Protocol Type is set to IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the subnet mask of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


283



Navigation Path l

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

l

Click the Access Control tab.

Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Name

-

-

Displays the Ethernet ports that support this function.

Enabled Status

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies the enabling status of the port.

Enabled

l If the Enabled Status is set to Enabled, this port can be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. l If the Enabled Status is set to Disabled, this port cannot be used to support access of the management information from the NMS.

IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

Specifies the IP address of the port.

Subnet Mask

-

0.0.0.0

Specifies the submask of the port.

A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control This topic describes the parameters for controlling the priority of inband DCN packets.

Navigation Path l

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.

l

Click the Packet Control tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Type

-

-

Displays the packet type for which the packet priority can be manually specified.

Supported Application

-

-

This parameter cannot be specified manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


284



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Priority

CS6

CS6 (Packet Type is VLAN)

Specifies the PHB service class of inband DCN packets.

EF

BE (Packet Type is DSCP)

AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE

A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management This section describes the parameters that are related to L2 DCN management.

Navigation Path l

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > L2DCN Management from the Function Tree.

l

Click Query.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Config Status

Auto

Auto

When the OptiX RTN 950 uses the L2 DCN solution, the RSTP protocol can be used to prevent L2 forwarding loops. It is recommended that the RSTP protocol uses its default enable/disable mode Auto for the OptiX RTN 950 NE level. That is, the RSTP protocol is automatically enabled/disabled depending on the enable/disable status of the L2 DCN function over IF ports.

-

l Real Status is queried to be Disabled in the following scenarios:

Disabled

Real Status

Disabled Enabled

– Config Status is set to Disabled. – When Config Status is set to Auto, the L2 DCN function is disabled for all IF ports on the NE. l When Config Status is set to Auto, the L2 DCN function is enabled for at least one IF port on the NE. In this case, the RSTP protocol will automatically work. At this time, the queried Real Status is Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


285



A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for Ethernet Access Control Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Ethernet Access

Selected

-

After The First Network Port is set to Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can access the NMS through the Ethernet port.

PORT

-

-

This parameter displays the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

Work Mode

adapt

-

This parameter specifies the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

-

This parameter displays the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

Deselected

10M Half_Duplex 10M Full_Duplex 100M Half_Duplex 100M Full_Duplex Actual Work Mode

-

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Specifies whether the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port is enabled.

Disabled

Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Serial Port Access

Selected

Selected

After Enable Serial Port Access is selected, the NE can access the NMS or command lines through the serial port.

Access Command Line

Selected

Deselected

If Access Command Line is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the command line terminal.

Access NM

Selected

Deselected

If Access NM is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the NMS.

Deselected

Deselected

Deselected

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


286



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Baud Rate

1200

9600

l This parameter specifies the data transmission rate in the communications through serial ports.

2400 4800

l This parameter is set according to the rate of the serial port at the opposite end, and the rates at both ends must be the same.

9600 19200 38400 57600 115200

A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.

A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.

2.

Close the dialog box.

Parameters for NE user management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

-

-

Displays the current NE name.

NE User

-

-

Displays the registered NE user name.

User Level

-

-

Displays the registered NE user level.

NE User Flag

-

-

Displays whether a registered NE user is logged in.

A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


287



Navigation Path 1.

Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.

2.

Close the dialog box.

3.

Click Add.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE User

-

-

Specifies the name of a registered NE user. NOTE The name of an NE cannot contain any space or Chinese characters.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


288



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

User Level

Monitor Level

Monitor Level

l A Debug Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities, and has the right to run debugging commands.

Operation Level Maintenance Level System Level Debug Level

l A System Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities. l A Maintenance Level NE user has some security authorities, some configuration authorities, the communication setting authority, and the log management authority. l An Operation Level NE user has all fault performance authorities, some security authorities, and some configuration authorities. l A Monitor Level NE user has the right to use all query commands, to log in, to log out, and to change its own password.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


289



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE User Flag

LCT NE User

LCT NE User

l Specifies the NE user flag.

EMS NE User

l LCT NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000 Local Craft Terminal (U2000 LCT).

CMD NE User General NE User

l EMS NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000. l CMD NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the CMD. l General NE User indicates NE users for all NMS types. Detailed Description

-

-

Describes a configured NE user.

New Password

-

-

l Specifies the password for a new NE user.

Confirm Password

-

-

Enter the same value as New Password.

Immediate Password Change

Yes

Yes

Specifies whether the password of a registered NE user can be changed.

No

A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for LCT Access Control Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


290



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LCT Access Control Switch

Access Allowed

Access Allowed

l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE does not check the status of LCT Access Control Switch, and directly allows the LCT user to log in to the NE.

Disable Access

l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in to the NE through the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch. l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the NMS requests an NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS user can directly log in to the NE. After the NMS user successfully logs in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected. l When both the LCT user and NMS user log in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected after LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access.

A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS configuration.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Function

-

-

Server ID

-

-

Server Type

-

-

Specifies the desired RADIUS function, the authentication server ID, and the server type. l Function, Server ID, and Server Type are associated with the servers that are configured in Creating a RADIUS Server or a RADIUS Proxy Server. l Select the desired RADIUS server or proxy server according to planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


291



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Server Status

Active

Active

Specifies the active/standby status of the RADIUS server or proxy server.

Standby

l If no standby server is required, set Server Status to Active. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports one active server and one standby server. If both the active and standby servers are configured, set Server Status of the active server to Active and Server Status of the standby server to Standby. -

Shared Key

-

Specifies the key for communication between an NE and the RADIUS server. l Set Shared Key to the same value on the NE and on the RADIUS server. l If Server Type is Proxy Server, Shared Key is not available.

Interval of Packet Transmission

3-10

5

Packet Retransmission Attempts

1-5

3

Specifies the number of packet retransmission attempts and the interval between the attempts. l If an NE does not receive the response from the RADIUS server within a specific period, the NE re-transmits the authentication request for the configured attempt times and at the configured interval. l It is recommended that Interval of Packet Transmission and Packet Retransmission Attempts take their default values.

A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS server configuration.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the RADIUS Server Configuration tab. The RADIUS Server Information dialog box is displayed.

3.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Click New.


292




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Function

Authentication

Authentication

Accounting

Specifies the RADIUS function that an NE needs to use.

Authentication + Accounting

l For NE RADIUS authentication, select Authentication. l For both NE RADIUS authentication and NE usage accounting, set this parameter to Authentication + Accounting or Accounting (when the Authentication function has been enabled).

RADIUS Server

Server Type

RADIUS Server

Proxy Server

Specifies the server type used for NE RADIUS authentication. l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication in the NAS mode or functions as a proxy server, set Server Type to RADIUS Server. l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication in the proxy NAS mode, set Server Type to Proxy Server.

IP Address

Server ID

NE ID

IP Address

Specifies the address of the server that is used for NE RADIUS authentication. l If Server Type is RADIUS Server, set Server ID to IP Address and specify the IP address of the RADIUS server. l If Server Type is Proxy Server, it is recommended that you set Server ID to NE ID and set the gateway NE as the proxy server. l If Server Type is Proxy Server and there is no IP route between the NE and the proxy server, Server ID can be set to only NE ID. If Server Type is Proxy Server and there is an IP route between the NE and the proxy server, Server ID can be set to NE ID or IP Address.

A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function This topic describes the parameters that are required for enabling/disabling the RADIUS function.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


293




Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE

-

-

Displays the NE name.

RADIUS Client

Open

Close

Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be a RADIUS client. The RADIUS function can be enabled on an NE only if RADIUS Client is set to Open for the NE.

Close

Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be a proxy server.

Close

Proxy Server

Open Close

l If an NE needs to function as a proxy server, set Proxy Server to Open for the NE. l Proxy Server can be set to Open only if RADIUS Client is set to Open. l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication in the proxy NAS mode, set Proxy Server to Close.

A.2 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the XPIC tab.

3.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


294




Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Channel Bandwidth

ISX2:

-

l This parameter specifies the channel spacing when the XPIC function is enabled.

7M 14M

l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used.

28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M Polarization Direction-V

-

-

l This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. l It is recommended that you install the two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup in the slots that are at the same layer or in the same column, and set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-H.

1 to 4094

1

l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H. l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. l When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. l These two parameters are set according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but Link ID-V must be set to the same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link.

Polarization Direction-H

Link ID-V Link ID-H

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

2


295



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transmit Power (dBm)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


296



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Transmission Status

unmute mute

unmute

l When this parameter is set to mute, the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


297



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled.

Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-

-45.0

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-

-70.0

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

l The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.


298



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled.

Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the XPIC tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Group ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the work group.

Polarization Direction-V

-

-

This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V

-

-

This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds.

Polarization Direction-H

-

-

This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H

-

-

This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


299



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


ISX2:

-

l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links.

7M 14M

l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used.

28M 40M 56M

l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M Power to Be Received -V(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


300



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Power to Be Received -H(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.


-

-

l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


301



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


302



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Transmission Status

unmute

unmute

mute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Group ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the work group.

Polarization direction

-

-

This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


303



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

AM Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.

Enabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK

-

16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

-

This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


304



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Manually Specified Modulation Mode

QPSK

QPSK

This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission.

16QAM 32QAM

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.

64QAM 128QAM 256QAM Transmit-End Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the modulation mode at the transmit end.

Receive-End Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the modulation mode at the receive end.

Parameters for ATPC Management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Group ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the object to be set.

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

-


Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower


305



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.


Disabled

-


Enabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).

A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


306




Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Enabled

SD enable

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether the signal degradation switching function of N+1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the signal degradation condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Select Mapping Direction

Work Unit

Work Unit

l This parameter specifies the mapping direction of N+1 protection.

Protection Unit

l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Select Mapping Way

-

-

l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF ports as Work Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Mapped Board

-

-

This parameter indicates the working unit and protection unit that have been set.

A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


307



Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

SD Enable

Enabled

-

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the SD switching function of N +1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the SD condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Protocol Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of the switching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Unit

-

-

This parameter indicates the protection unit.

Line

-

-

This parameter indicates the information about the working board or protection board.

Switching Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the switching state.

Protected Unit

-

-

This parameter indicates the protected unit.

Remote/Local End Indication

-

-

This parameter indicates the local end or remote end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


308



A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Mode

HSB

HSB

l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

FD SD

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


309



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.

Non-Revertive

l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


310



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled.

Disabled

l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When Enable Reverse Switching at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. Working Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group.

Protection Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.

Alarm Report Mode

Only board alarms

Only board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms, only IF board alarms are reported.

Only protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms, alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms, IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults. NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


311



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Anti-jitter Time(s)

0 to 600

300

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0, a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded, but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


312



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Mode

HSB

-

l This parameter indicates the working mode of the created IF 1+1 protection group.

FD SD

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the protection group. l When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


313



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled

-

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

NE Switching Status

-

-

l This parameter indicates the switching state on the equipment side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.

Channel Switching Status

-

-

l This parameter indicates the switching state on the channel side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.

Active Port of Device

-

-

This parameter indicates the current working board on the equipment side.

Active Port of Channel

-

-

This parameter indicates the current working board on the channel side.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


314



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Alarm Report Mode

Only board alarms

-

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms, only IF board alarms are reported.

Only Protection group alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms, alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms.

Protection group and board alarms

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms, IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults. NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time

0 to 600

-

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0, a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded, but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Unit

-

-

This parameter indicates the working board and protection board.

Slot Mapping Relation

-

-

This parameter indicates the names and ports of the working board and protection board.

Working Status of Device

-

-

This parameter indicates the working state on the equipment side.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


315



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Signal Status of Channel

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of the link signal.

A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group This topic describes the parameters for creating a PLA group.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Parameters for Creating a PLA group Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PLA ID

1 to 3

-

This parameter specifies the ID of a PLA group.

Main Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the main IF board in a PLA group.

Main Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the main port in a PLA group.

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the slave IF board in a PLA group.

Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the slave port in a PLA group.

Selected Slave Ports

-

-

This parameter displays the slave IF board and slave port that have been selected.

A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA This topic describes PLA parameters.

Navigation Path 1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.


316



PLA Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PLA ID

-

-

This parameter displays the ID of a PLA group.

Main Board

-

-

This parameter displays the main IF board in a PLA group.

Main Port

-

-

This parameter displays the main port in a PLA group.

Hardware Status of Main Port

-

-

This parameter displays whether the main IF board in a PLA group is functional.

Link Status of Main Port

-

-

This parameter displays whether the main link in a PLA group is functional.

Work Status of Main Port

-

-

This parameter displays the working status of the main port in a PLA group.

Minimum Active Links

-

-

This parameter specifies the minimum number of available links in a PLA group and helps to trigger ERPS switching even if not all members in the PLA group fail For example, if you set Minimum Active Links to 2, ERPS switching is triggered when either PLA member link fails.

Slave Board

-

-

This parameter displays the slave IF board in a PLA group.

Slave Port

-

-

This parameter displays the slave port in a PLA group.

Hardware Status of Slave Port

-

-

This parameter displays whether the slave IF board in a PLA group is functional.

Link Status of Slave Port

-

-

This parameter displays whether the slave link in a PLA group is functional.

Work Status of Slave Port

-

-

This parameter displays the working status of the slave port in a PLA group.

A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


317



Parameters for Configuring the IF Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Work Mode

1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.

2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K

l This parameter is set according to the network plan. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.

4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK

NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.

6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM Link ID

1 to 4094

1

l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


318



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Received Link ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)


Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

SDH

l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.


3.5M

-

7M 14M 28M

IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the network plan. NOTE

40M

l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

56M

l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 40M. l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M only for the ISU2 board.

AM Mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 950.


319



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

AM Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled


Enabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M for the ISU2 board, the AM function is unavailable and AM Enable Status must be set to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.


QPSK

QPSK

16QAM 32QAM

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.

64QAM 128QAM

NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

256QAM Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity


l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission.

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


320



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

16QAM

l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity

-

-

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. NOTE The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.

Guarantee E1 Capacity

-

-

l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


321



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Guarantee E1 Capacity Range

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode.

Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s)

-

-

Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board.

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function.

Enabled

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity Range

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.


322



Parameters for Configuring the RF Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Frequency (MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan.

Range of TX Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU.

Actual TX Frequency(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU.

Actual RX Frequency(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


323



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.

Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.


324



Parameters for Configuring the Power Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Power(dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan.

Range of TX Power(dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power (dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


325



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Actual RX Power (dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU.

TX Status

Unmute

Unmute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU.

Mute

l When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute. Actual TX Status

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.


326



Equipment Information Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Frequency(GHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.

Equip Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.

Station Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN

-

-

This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.

Transmission Power Level

-

-

This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.

A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


327




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

1+1 Protection

1+1 Protection

l This parameter specifies the protection type of the linear MSP group.

1:N Protection

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


328



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Switching Mode

Single-Ended Switching

Single-Ended Switching (1 +1 Protection)

l This parameter specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP.

Dual-Ended Switching (1:N Protection)

l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged.

Dual-Ended Switching

l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only. Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive Revertive

Non-Revertive (1+1 Protection)

l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP.

Revertive (1:N Protection)

l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


329



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

SD Enable

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the switching at the SD alarm of the linear MSP is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Protocol Type

New Protocol

New Protocol

Restructure Protocol

l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


330




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Select Mapping Direction

West Working Unit

West Working Unit

This parameter specifies the mapping direction of the linear MSP.

Select Mapping Mode

-

-

l This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction.

West Protection Unit

l If the protection type is set to 1+1 Protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit. l Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. l The line port mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port mapped as West Working Unit should be configured for different boards if possible. -

Mapped Board

-

This parameter indicates the preset slot mapping relations, including the mapping direction and the corresponding mapping mode.

A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


331



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates the protection type of the linear MSP group. l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection.

Switching Mode

Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


332



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP.

Revertive

l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only. WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

SD Enable

Enabled Disabled

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


333



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protocol Type

New Protocol

-

l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently.

Restructure Protocol

l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. Protocol Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the protocol status of the linear MSP.

Protection Subnet

-

-

This parameter displays the protection subnet where the MS protection is configured.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Unit

-

-

This parameter indicates that which of the units, namely, the west protection unit or the west working unit, is currently in the protection status.

West Line

-

-

This parameter indicates the west protection unit and the west working unit of the linear MSP.

West Switching Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the switching status of the line.

Protected Unit

-

-

This parameter indicates the working channel protected by the current protection channel.

Remote/Local End Indication

-

-

When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end that issues the switching command is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


334



A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.

3.

Click Create.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

VC12

VC12

l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created.

VC3

l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12.

VC4

l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Unidirectional

l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.


335



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source VC4

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Sink Slot

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.

Sink VC4

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


336



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

E1 Priority

High

-

l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections.

Low None

l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created. Yes

Activate Immediately

Yes

No

l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. l To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE, set this parameter to Yes.

A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.

3.

Click Create SNCP Service.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

SNCP

SNCP

This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


337



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the SNCP service sink.

Unidirectional

l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Level

VC12 VC3 VC4

VC12

l This parameter specifies the level of the SCNP service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


338



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Hold-off Time (100ms)

0 to 100

0

l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.

Revertive Mode


Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


339



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600


Source Slot

-

-


Source VC4

-

-



-

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Sink Slot

-

-


Sink VC4

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


340



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Selected

Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

Deselected

Deselected

l After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you do not select this checkbox.

Selected


Deselected

Selected

l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.

A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in CrossConnection. Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.

3.

Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


341




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

SNCP

SNCP

This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.

Direction

Unidirectional

-

This parameter indicates the direction of the SNCP service.

Level

-

-

l This parameter indicates the level of the SNCP service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, the parameter value is VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter value is VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, the parameter value is VC4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


342



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


0 to 100

0


Revertive Mode


Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to "Revertive", the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


343



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600


Source Slot

-

-


Source VC4

-

-



-

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Sink Slot

-

-


Sink VC4

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


344



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

-

-

After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point.


-

-

l This parameter indicates whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections).

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


345



Cross-Connection Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

VC12

-

l This parameter indicates the level of the service.

VC3

l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed.

VC4

l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot

-

-

This parameter indicates the slot of the service source.

Source Timeslot/ Path

-

-

This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot

-

-

This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink.

Sink Timeslot/ Path

-

-

This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink.

E1 Priority

High

-

l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections.

Low None

l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created. Activation Status

Yes

-

This parameter indicates whether to activate the service.

No Bound Group Number

-

-


Lockout Status

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


346



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Trail Name

-

-


Schedule No.

-

-


Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

VC12

-


VC3


VC4

l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot

-

-

This parameter indicates the slot of the service source.

Source Timeslot/ Path

-

-

This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot

-

-

This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink.

Sink Timeslot/ Path

-

-

This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink.

Lockout Status

-

-


Trail Name

-

-


Schedule No.

-

-


A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


347



Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the service protection type of the protection group.

Source

-

-

This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service source and protection service source of the protection group are located.

Sink

-

-

This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service sink and protection service sink of the protection group are located.

Level

VC12

-


VC3


VC4

l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Current Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the current switching mode and switching status of the services of the protection group.

Revertive Mode

Revertive

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the service.

Non-Revertive

l This parameter determines whether to switch the service from the protection channel to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


348



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.


0 to 100

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


349



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

SD Initiation Condition

-

Null

l This parameter indicates or specifies the conditions that trigger the protection switching of the service. l After being selected as SD Initiation Condition, an alarm becomes a condition for triggering switching of an SNCP service. l It is recommended that you set SD Initiation Condition to the same condition for Working Service and Protection Service. l The protection switching conditions in SD Initiation Condition are optional values not included in the default values, and they are set according to the planning information.

Trail Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of the working service and protection service of the protection group.

Service Grouping

-

-


Group Type

-

-


Active Channel

-

-

This parameter indicates whether the working service or protection service is currently received by the protection group.

Trail Name

-

-

Displays the trail name.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


350



Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the ID of the IF port.

High Channel

-

-

Displays the higher order path number of the IF board.

Low Channel

-

-

Displays the lower order path number of the IF board.

Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS

Enable

Auto

l When Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS is Auto, the TU_AIS is automatically inserted after the E1_AIS is detected in the E1 channel.

Disable Auto

l Generally, it is recommended that Auto take its default value.

A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface boards.

A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the General Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the ID of a service port.

Name

-

-

Specifies or displays the customized port name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


351



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Mode

Layer 1

Layer 2

l Specifies the working mode of a PDH port.

Layer 2

l When this parameter is set to Layer 1, the port can transmit TDM signals. A port can transmit CES and serial services only if this parameter is set to Layer 1. l When this parameter is set to Layer 2, the port can transmit ATM signals. Encapsulation Type

-

-

l Displays Encapsulation Type of a PDH port. l When Port Mode is Layer 1, Encapsulation Type takes its default value Null. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type takes its default value ATM.

A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Advanced Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the name of a service port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


352



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Frame Format

Unframe

CRC-4 Multiframe

l Specifies the frame format.

Double Frame

l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of CESoPSN, this parameter can assume the value CRC-4 Multiframe or Double Frame. The value CRC-4 Multiframe is recommended.

CRC-4 Multiframe

l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of SAToP, this parameter needs to assume the value Unframe. l The value of Frame Format must be the same at the local and opposite ends. Line Encoding Format

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Displays the line encoding format. The parameter value is always HDB3.

353



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Loopback Mode

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l Specifies the loopback status for a port.

Inloop

l Non-Loopback indicates that loopbacks are cancelled or not performed.

Outloop

l Inloop indicates that the signals that need to be transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the PDH ports. This function affects services over related ports. Therefore, exercise precaution before starting this function. l Generally, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Impedance

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Displays the port impedance.

354



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Frame Mode

30(ATM)

-

l 30 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 are used to transmit service data, and timeslot 16 is used to transmit signaling.

31(ATM,CES)

l 31 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 31 are used to transmit service data. l This parameter is unavailable if Frame Format is Unframe. l The port frame modes need to be the same at the local and opposite ends. Clock Mode

Master Mode

Master Mode

Slave Mode System Clock Mode

l Master Mode: The system clock is used as the output clock of services. l Slave Mode: The CES ACR clock is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Slave is set to Slave Mode. l System Clock Mode: The upstream E1 line clock of the opposite equipment is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Master is set to System Clock Mode

Composite Port Loopback

-

-

For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.

Service Load Indication

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


355



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Equalize Input Signal

-

-


Equalize Outpput Signal

-

-


A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.

A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the port name.

Name

-

-

Specifies the port name.

Enable Port

Enabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether an Ethernet port is enabled. An Ethernet port can receive, process, and forward Ethernet services only if this parameter is set to Enabled.

Disabled

l Set this parameter according to the planning information. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


356



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

l Port Mode specifies the mode of the Ethernet port.

Layer 3 Layer Mix

l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry MPLS tunnels. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support the value Layer 3 and Layer Mix. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support the value Layer 3 and Layer Mix.

Encapsulation Type

Null

-

802.1Q QinQ

l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1q standard. l If you set Encapsulation Type to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


357



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

l The Ethernet ports of different types support different Working Mode.

10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

l When the equipment on the opposite side works in autonegotiation mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to AutoNegotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M halfduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE electrical ports support 10M fullduplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


358


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description duplex, 1000M fullduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE optical ports support 1000M fullduplex and autonegotiation. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

Max Frame Length (byte)

1518 to 9600

1522

The value of Max Frame Length(byte) should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported.

Auto-Negotiation Ability

10M Half-Duplex

FE: 100M Full-Duplex

10M Full-Duplex

GE: 1000M Full-Duplex

l Auto-Negotiation Ability specifies the auto-negotiation capability of the Ethernet port.

100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

l For GE optical ports, Auto-Negotiation Ability can be set to 1000M Full-Duplex only. l Auto-Negotiation Ability is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation.

Logical Port Attribute

Optical Port

-

Electrical Port

l This parameter specifies the attribute of the logical port. l The SFP on the EM6F,EM6FA board supports the optical port and electrical port.

Physical Port Attribute

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter indicates the attribute of the physical port.

359



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Traffic Monitoring Status

Enabled

Disabled

This parameters indicates the enabled status of the traffic monitoring function over an Ethernet port.

Traffic Monitoring Period (min)

1 to 30

15

This parameter indicates the traffic monitoring period.

Disabled

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Flow Control tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


360



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled

Disabled

l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two nonauto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


361



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled

Disabled

l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control

l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface NOTE

The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


362



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


QinQ Type Domain

-

-

l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. l QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/ EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA board.

TAG

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Access Hybrid

l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set TAG to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid. NOTE TAG specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


363



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4094

1

l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID is set according to the actual situations. NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-2.

VLAN Priority

0 to 7

l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.

0

l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-2.

Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames Port

Ingress UNI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Type of Data Frame

Processing Method Tag Aware

Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame

The port receives the frame.

The port discards the frame.


Untagged frame


The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame.

The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame.


364


Port

Egress UNI


Type of Data Frame


Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame

The port transmits the frame.

The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.

l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.

A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2.


Parameters on the Main Interface NOTE

Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Enable Tunnel

Disabled

Enabled

l If Enable Tunnel is set Enabled, a port identifies and processes MPLS labels.

Enabled

l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


365



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Specify IP Address

Manually

Unspecified

l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port.

Unspecified

l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of the port can be manually configured. -

IP Address

0.0.0.0

l Specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

-

IP Mask

255.255.255.252

l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.

A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


366




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Port Physical Parameters

-

-

This parameter indicates the physical parameters of the port.

MAC Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back.

Inloop

l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. PHY Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

Inloop

l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

MAC Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port.

Transmitting Rate(kbit/ s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are transmitted.

Receiving Rate(kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are received.

Loopback Check

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.

Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


367



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Loopback Port Block

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter indicates whether to enable the loop port shutdown function.

Disabled Egress PIR Bandwidth (Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the egress PIR bandwidth.

Broadcast Packet Suppression

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled.

Enabled

l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for E-LAN services in the ingress direction. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

0 to 100

30

When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.

Network Cable Mode

-

-

This parameter displays the working mode of the network cable connected to an Ethernet port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


368



A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.

A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.

2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the name of the port where a serial service is configured.

Name

-

-

Specifies or displays the customized port name.

Level

-

-

l Specifies or displays the serial port level. l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/ s timeslots of E1 signals can be bound. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 64K Timeslot only.

Used Port

-

-

Displays the physical port that carries a serial service.

64K Timeslot

-

-

Displays the timeslots that a serial service occupies. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 3

l Displays or specifies the port mode.

Layer 3

l A port supports ATM encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 2. A port does not support encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 3. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


369



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Encapsulation Type

-

-

l Displays and specifies the encapsulation type of a PW. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, this parameter displays ATM; when Port Mode is Layer 3, this parameter displays Null.

A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the New tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Number(e.g:1,3-6)

-

-

Specifies the port where the serial service is configured.

Name

-

-

Specifies the customized port name.

Level

64K Timeslot

64K Timeslot

l Specifies the serial port level. l When this parameter is set to 64K Timeslot , E1 timeslots can be bound. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the parameter value 64K Timeslot .

Used Board

-

-

Specifies the board where a serial port is located.

Used Port

-

-

Displays the board where a serial port is located.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


370



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

High Channel

-

-


Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6)

-

-


64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)

-

-

Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslots to be bound with the serial port. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.

A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.

A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Basic Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.

Name

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the customized port name.

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.

Layer 3 Layer Mix

l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry tunnels. l If Port Mode is Layer Mix, Encapsulation Type can be set to only 802.1Q or QinQ and the port can carry both tunnels and Native Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


371



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Encapsulation Type

Null

802.1Q

l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets.

802.1Q QinQ

l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.

A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes NOTE

The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


QinQ Type Domain

-

-

l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


372



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tag

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware".

Access Hybrid

l If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set Tag to "Access". l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set Tag to "Hybrid". NOTE Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-3.

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4094

1

l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID needs to be set according to the actual situations. NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-3.

VLAN Priority

0

0

1

l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

2 3 4 5 6

NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-3.

7

Table A-3 Data frame processing Status

Ingress Port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Type of Data Frame


Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame





373


Status

Egress Port


Type of Data Frame


Access

Hybrid

Untagged frame


The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame.

The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame.

Tagged frame

The port transmits the frame.


l If the VLAN ID in the frame is "Default VLAN ID", the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not "Default VLAN ID", the port directly transmits the frame.

A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the corresponding IF port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


374



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Tunnel

Disabled

Disabled

l A port identifies and processes MPLS labels, if its Enable Tunnel is set Enabled.

Enabled

l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab. Specify IP Address

Manually

Unspecified

Unspecified

l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port. l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured for a port. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of a port can be manually configured.

IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

l Specifies the IP address for a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

IP Mask

-

255.255.255.252

l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


375



A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


Parameters for Advanced Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Radio Link ID

1 to 4094

1

l This parameter specifies the ID of the radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l The ID of each radio link of an NE must be unique, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link must be the same.

Received Radio Link ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match with the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


376



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Port Loopback

-

-

l This parameter indicates the loopback status of the IF interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, this parameter is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Composite Port Loopback

-

-

l This parameter indicates the loopback status on the composite interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the composite signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received composite signals are looped back. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Error Frame Discard Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to discard the Ethernet frame when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet frame. l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video service, you can set this parameter to Disabled.

MAC Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port.

Transmitting Rate (Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the transmit rate of the local port.

Receiving Rate (Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the receive rate of the local port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


377



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MAC Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back.

Inloop

l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to Inloop.

Speed Transmission at L2

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 2 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L2 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L2 must be the same at both ends of a radio link. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

Speed Transmission at L3

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 3 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L3 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L3 must be the same at both ends of a radio link. NOTE l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter. l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.

Loopback Check

Disabled Enabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Disabled



378



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Loopback Port Shutdown

Disabled

Disabled

This parameter indicates whether to enable the automatic shut-down of looped ports.

Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled.

Enabled

Enabled

l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for ELAN services in the ingress direction. 0 to 100

Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

30

When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.

A.5.5 IF Board Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.

A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.

Navigation Path l

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l

Click the IF Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


379



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Radio Link ID

1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.

2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K

l This parameter is set according to the network plan. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.

4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK

NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.

6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH


l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


380



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Radio Link ID

1 to 4094

1

l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.

Received Radio Link ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


381



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IF Port Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the IF interface.

Inloop

l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed.

Outloop

l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. 2M Wayside Enable Statusa

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.

2M Wayside Input Boarda

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the slot in which the 2M wayside service is accessed. l This parameter can be set only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.

350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status

Stop Start

Stop

l This parameter indicates or specifies the status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier signals at the IF interface. l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


382



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

XPIC Enabledb

Enabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the XPIC function of the XPIC IF board is enabled.

Disabled

l If the XPIC IF board does not perform the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled should be set to Disabled. Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslotc

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be set consistently between two ends of a radio link.

NOTE

l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services. l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function. l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration NOTE

The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-



3.5M

-

IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the network plan.

7M 14M 28M 40M 56M

NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 40M. l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M only for the ISU2 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


383



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

AM Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled


Enabled

l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M for the ISU2 board, the AM function is unavailable and AM Enable Status must be set to Disabled. Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.


384



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

16QAM

l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.


QPSK

QPSK

16QAM 32QAM

l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.

64QAM 128QAM 256QAM STM-1 Capacity

-

-

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. NOTE The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


385



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Guarantee E1 Capacity

-

-

l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

Guarantee E1 Capacity Range

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode.


-

-

Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board.

Full E1 Capacity

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

Full E1 Capacity

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.

Transmit-End Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the modulation mode at the transmit mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


386



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Receive-End Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the modulation mode at the receive mode.

Guarantee AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s)

-

-

Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.

Full AM Service Capacity(Mbit/s)

-

-

Displays the full AM service capacity.

Transmitted AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s)

-

-

Displays the transmitted AM service capacity.

Received AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s)

-

-

Displays the received AM service capacity.

E1 Capacity For High Priority

-

-

Displays the number of configured highpriority E1s.

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Path l

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l

Click the ATPC Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


387



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled


Enabled

l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-

-45.0


-

-70.0

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.


388



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


Enabled

Disabled


Disabled

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm). ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm)

-

-

ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.

A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path l

In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l

Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the modulation schemes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


389



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

E1 Capacity

-

-

l You can specify the number of E1s that can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, by setting the advanced attributes correspondingly. l Generally, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme according to the network planning information. l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the maximum number of allowed E1 services in the current mode = Min {[Bandwidth of the air interface in the current mode - (Bandwidth for the assured capacity - Assured E1 number x 2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the highest-gain modulation mode}.

-


-

Displays the data service bandwidth.

A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port for the ATPC adjustment.

Event NO.

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of the ATPC adjustment event.

Adjustment Time

-

-

This parameter indicates the time of the ATPC adjustment.

Adjustment Direction

-

-

This parameter indicates the direction of the adjustment at the port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


390



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Switchover

-

-

This parameter indicates the switching operation at the port.

Transmitted Power(dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the transmitted power of the port to be switched.

Received Power (dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the received power of the port to be switched.

A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.

Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test.

Direction

Cross

Cross

l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test.

Tributary

l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration

1 to 255

1

This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test.

Measured Time

s

s

This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.

10min h Start Time

-

-

This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test.

Progress

-

-

This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


391



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Total PRBS

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test.

Accumulating Mode

Selected

Deselected

This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.

Deselected

A.5.6 ODU Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.

A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

Navigation Path l

Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.

l

Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.

Transmit Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the central frequency of the channel. l The value of Transmit Frequency (MHz) must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


392



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference of the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing (MHz) should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Actual Transmit Frequency(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU.

Actual Receive Frequency(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.

Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.

The range of frequency point (MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the working range of the frequency of the ODU.

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU.

Navigation Path l


l

Click the Power Attributes tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


393




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-



-

-

l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the network plan. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed Maximum Transmit Power (dBm).


-

-

l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the network plan. This parameter specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


394



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set according to the network plan. When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled.

TX High Threshold(dBm)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system separately records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold (dBm) and the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.


395



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TX Low Threshold (dBm)

-

-

l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it. l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled.

RX High Threshold(dBm)

-

-

l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm)in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is Lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


396



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

RX Low Threshold (dBm)

-

-

Actual Transmit Power(dBm)

-

-

Description value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it.

l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.

Actual Receive Power(dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU.

Actual range of Power(dBm)

-

-

This parameter indicates the range of the actual transmit power of the ODU.

Transmission Power Type

-

-


A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU.

Navigation Path l

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.

l

Click the Equipment Information tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


397




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


Frequency(GHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.

Equipment Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.

T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of the ODU.

Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth (MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the IF frequency bandwidth of the ODU.

IF Bandwidth Type

-

-

Displays the IF bandwidth type.

Station Type

-

-

l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Transmission Power Type

-

-


Produce Time

-

-

This parameter indicates the manufacturing time of the ODU.

Produce SN

-

-

This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.

A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.

Navigation Path l


l


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


398




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


RF Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the RF interface of the ODU.

Inloop

l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the RF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l RF Loopback function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise caution before starting this function. l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. unmute

Configure Transmission Status

unmute

mute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute.

Actual Transmission Status

-

-

Displays the ODU manufacturer information.

Factory Information

-

-

This parameter indicates the manufacturer information about the ODU.

Remarks

-

-

Specifies the remarks of the ODU.

A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


399



A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding SDH interface.

Optical Interface Namea

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the optical interface.

Laser Switcha

On

On

l This parameter indicates or specifies the on/off state of the laser.

Off

l This parameter is set for SDH optical interfaces only. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to On. Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbacka

Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop

Non-Loopback

l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status on the SDH interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the SDH interfaces. The Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


400



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VC4 Loopbackb

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the VC-4 path.

Inloop

l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed.

Outloop

l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4 signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

NOTE

l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box. l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.

A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Optical Interface

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding optical interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


401



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Auto Shutdown

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the Auto Laser Shutdown function is enabled or disabled for the laser.

Enabled

l The ALS function allows the laser to shut down automatically when an optical port does not carry services, an optical fiber is broken, or no optical signal is received. l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period (ms), and Continuously On-test Period (ms) only when this parameter is set to Enabled. On Period(ms)

1000 to 3000

2000

This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser automatically starts up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.

Off Period(ms)

2000 to 300000

60000

This parameter indicates or specifies the period when the laser does not work (with the ALS function being enabled).

Continuously Ontest Period(ms)

2000 to 300000

90000

This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser is manually started up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.

A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.

A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH ports.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Select By Board/Port(Channel).

3.

Select Port from the list box.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


402




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the corresponding port.

Port Name

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the port.

Tributary Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the associated path of the tributary unit.

Inloop Outloop

l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received PDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the paths of the tributary unit. The Tributary Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Port Impedance

-

-

This parameter indicates the impedance of a path, which depends on the tributary unit.

Service Load Indication

Load

Load

l This parameter indicates or specifies the service loading status in a specific path.

Non-Loaded

l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the path. l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether there are alarms in the path. l If a path does not carry any services, you can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for the path to mask all the alarms. If a path carries services, you need to set this parameter to Load for the path. Input Signal Equalization

Unequalized Equalized

Unequalized

l This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


403



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Retiming Mode

Normal

Normal

l This parameter indicates or specifies the retiming mode of a specific path.

Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock

l By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, therefore decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal.

Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock

l When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. l It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, should be used to provide reference clock signals for the equipment. l If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect Clock. Port Service Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the type of services that are processed in a path. It depends on the services that are transmitted in a path.

Output Signal Equalization

Unequalized

Unequalized

l This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized.

Equalized

l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


404



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

E1 Frame Format

Unframe

Unframe

Specifies the E1 frame format for E1 ports. l To detect E1 BER performance on the OptiX RTN 950, set E1 Frame Format of the local E1 port to the same value as that of the opposite E1 port. It is recommended that E1 Frame Format of both the local and opposite E1 ports be CRC-4 Multiframe.

Double Frame CRC-4 Multiframe

l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX RTN 950 is used, it is recommended that E1 Frame Format take its default value Unframe. If E1 Frame Format is Unframe, the OptiX RTN 950 transparently transmits E1 frames and the local E1 port allows for interconnection with another E1 port whose E1 Frame Format is Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe. NOTE E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same value at both ends of an E1 link.

A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.

Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


405



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Direction

Cross

Cross

l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test.

Tributary

l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration

1 to 255

1

This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test.

Measured Time

s

s

This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.

10min h Start Time

-

-

This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test.

Progress

-

-

This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test.

Total PRBS

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test.

Accumulating Mode

Selected

Deselected

This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.

Deselected

A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs).

Navigation Path 1.

Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.

2.

Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


406



Parameters for Setting the Display Format Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Display in Text Format

Selected

Selected

This parameter specifies the display in the text format.

Display in Hexadecimal

Selected

Deselected

This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.

Deselected

Deselected


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-


J0 to be Sent ([Mode]Content)

-

[16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports the J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J0 byte to be received at the opposite end.

J0 to be Received ([Mode]Content)

-

[Disabled]

l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be received. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J0 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

-

J0 Received ([Mode]Content)

-

This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is actually received.

A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).

Navigation Path 1.

Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.

2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description


Selected

Selected


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Deselected


407



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


Selected

Deselected


Deselected

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1 Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-


J1 to be Sent ([Mode]Content)

-


If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J1 byte to be received at the opposite end.

J1 to be Received ([Mode]Content)

-

[Disabled]

l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J1 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

J1 Received ([Mode]Content)

-

-

This parameter displays the J1 byte that is actually received.

Parameters for the Signal Flag C2 Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-


C2 to be Sent

-

-

If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be received at the opposite end.

C2 to be Received

-

-

If the NE at the local end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be sent at the opposite end.

C2 Received

-

-

This parameter displays the C2 byte that is actually received.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


408



Parameters for Overhead Termination Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-


VC4 Overhead Termination

Termination

Auto

l If this parameter is set to PassThrough, the NE forwards the original overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte.

Pass-Through Auto

l If this parameter is set to Termination, the NE generates the new VC-4 path overhead according to the board setting after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through service is passed through, and the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-12 service is terminated. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).

Navigation Path 1.

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.

2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description


Selected

Selected



Selected

Deselected


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Deselected

Deselected


409



Parameters for the Trace Byte Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-


J2 to be Sent

-


If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the J2 byte to be received by the NE at the opposite end.

J2 to be Received

-

[Disabled]

l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J2 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value. NOTE IF boards do not support this parameter.

-

J2 Received

-

This parameter displays the J2 byte that is actually received.

Parameters for the Signal Flag Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-


Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) to be Sent

-

-

If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the V5 byte to be received at the opposite end.

Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) to be Received

-

-

If the NE at the local end reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the V5 byte to be sent at the opposite end. NOTE IF boards do not support this parameter.

Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) Received

-

-

This parameter displays the V5 byte that is actually received.

A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces This topic describes the parameters of Ethernet virtual interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


410



Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Basic Attributes tab.

3.

Choose New > Create Ethernet Virtual Interface.

Basic Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

1 to 8191

-

This parameter displays or specifies the port number of an Ethernet virtual interface.

Name

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the port name of an Ethernet virtual interface.

Port Type

EoA Virtual Interface

EoA Virtual Interface

This parameter displays or specifies the port type of an Ethernet virtual interface.

VLAN Sub Interface

The OptiX RTN 950 allows Port Type to be set to VLAN Sub Interface only.

Board

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the board where an Ethernet virtual interface is located.

Port

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the port where an Ethernet virtual interface is located.

VPI

-

-

Setting this parameter is not available.

VCI

-

-


AAL5 Encapsulation Type

-

-


VLAN

-

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that an Ethernet virtual interface uses. This parameter can be set when Port Type is VLAN Sub Interface.

Specify IP Address

Manually Unspecified

Unspecified

This parameter specifies whether to set the IP address for a port. l Unspecified: indicates that the IP address will not be specified for a port. l Manually: indicates that the IP address will be specified for a port. If the specified IP address is a valid value, it will become the IP address of this port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


411



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

This parameter specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on an NE must be in different network segments, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

IP Mask

-

255.255.255.252

This parameter specifies the subnet mask for a port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually.

Enable Tunnel

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

This parameter specifies whether to enable an MPLS tunnel. This parameter specifies the MPLS enabled status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled for a port, the port identifies and processes MPLS labels.

MAC Address

-

-

This parameter displays the port MAC address of an Ethernet virtual interface.

Layer 3 Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter displays an IF port.

Enable Tunnel

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter displays or specifies whether to enable an MPLS tunnel.

Disabled

Set the MPLS enabled status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled, the port identifies and processes MPLS labels. Specify IP Address

Manually Unspecified

Unspecified

This parameter displays or specifies whether to set the IP address for a port. l Unspecified: indicates that the IP address will not be specified for a port. l Manually: indicates that the IP address will be specified for a port. If the specified IP address is a valid value, it will become the IP address of this port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


412



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

This parameter displays or specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on an NE must be in different network segments, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

-

IP Mask

255.255.255.252

This parameter displays or specifies the subnet mask of a port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually.

A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters.

A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


413



Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-

This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service.

Service Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.

Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service.

UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


l Set this parameter to UNI-UNI.

414



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted


l This parameter specifies the transparent transmission ID of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. It is used to indicate whether the E-Line service transparently transmits the BPDU packets.

Transparently Transmitted

l If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set this parameter to Transparently Transmitted. That is, the parameter value Transparently Transmitted takes effect only if Encapsulation Type of the source and sink ports of the E-Line service are Null. l In other cases, set this parameter to Not Transparently Transmitted. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. MTU(bytes)

-

-

This parameter cannot be set here.

Service Tag Role

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


415



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Port

-

-

l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


416



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source VLANs

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Sink VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


417



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink Port

-

-

l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of Source Port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


418



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink VLANs

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Source VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.

Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-


Service Name

-

-


Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI


UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI.

419



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

BPDU



For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted.

Transparently Transmitted MTU(bytes)

-

-


Service Tag Role

-

-


Source Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


420



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source VLANs

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

PRI

-

-


Bearer Type

QinQ Link

PW

For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always PW.

PW

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


421



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

No Protection

No Protection

l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured.

PW APS Slave Protection Pair

l If this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair, you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.

Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-


Service Name

-

-


Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI


UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

BPDU


l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted

For UNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted.

Transparently Transmitted MTU(bytes)

-

-


Service Tag Role

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


422



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Port

-

-


Source VLANs

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


423



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PRI

-

-


Bearer Type

QinQ Link

PW

For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always QinQ Link.

-

Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.

PW

QinQ Link ID

-

Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-


Service Name

-

-


Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI


UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

BPDU


l Set this parameter to NNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted

For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted .


MTU(bytes)

-

-


Service Tag Role

-

-


PRI

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


424



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bearer Type 1

QinQ Link

QinQ Link

Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service.

QinQ Link ID 1

-

-

l Selects the QinQ link ID of the first QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.

Bearer Type 2

QinQ Link

QinQ Link

Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service.

QinQ Link ID 2

-

-

l Selects the QinQ link ID of the second QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.

QinQ Link ID

-

-

Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.

Parameters of PWs NOTE

l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW. l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.

PW Signaling Type

Static

Static

Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


425



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW Type

Ethernet

Ethernet

l Specifies the type of the PW.

Ethernet Tagged Mode

l PW Type indicates whether P-TAG is added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated for transmission on PWs. If it is not required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attributes tab. PW Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Displays the direction of the PW.

PW Encapsulation Type

MPLS

MPLS

Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW.

PW Ingress Label/ Source Port

16 to 1048575

-

Specifies the PW Ingress label.

PW Egress Label/Sink Port

16 to 1048575

-

Specifies the PW Egress label.

Tunnel selection mode

-

-

Displays the method to select tunnels.

Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS

Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.

Tunnel

-

-

A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail.

Egress Tunnel

-

-

For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the egress tunnel automatically.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


426



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Peer LSR ID

-

-

Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.

QoS Parameters (PW) NOTE

QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Policy

-

-


CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CBS(byte)

-

-

Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


427



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PBS(byte)

-

-

Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.

EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.

Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

No Use

No Use

For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use.

Control Channel Type

None

Alert Label

l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.

Alert Label

l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode

Ping

Ping

None

l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


428



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Request VLAN

-

-

l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.

-

TPID

-

The OptiX RTN 950 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.

Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE

The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

-

-

Specifies the protection type.

Protection Group ID

-

-

Specifies the protection group ID.

Enabling Status

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.

Enabled

l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Protection Mode

-

-

Displays the protection mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1:1 protection mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


429



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the working PW.

Protection PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the protection PW.

Switching Mode

-

-

Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports dual-ended switching.

Revertive Mode

Non-revertive

Revertive

Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.

Switchover Restoration Time(min)

1 to 12

1

l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


430



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Switchover Delay Time (100ms)

0 to 100

0

l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.

-

Detection mode

-

Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.

OAM Parameters NOTE

l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS. l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management > PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

OAM Status

-

-

Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


431



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Detection Mode

Auto-Sensing

Auto-Sensing

l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets.

Manual

l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


432



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Detection Packet Type

CV

CV

l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.

FFD

l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)

3.3

50

10

l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV.

20 50 100 200 500

l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS. LSR ID to be Received

-

-

Specifies the LSR ID to be received.

PW ID to be Received

-

-

Specifies the PW ID to be received.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


433



Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair) NOTE

The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to Slave Protection Pair.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Mode

-

-

Displays the protection mode.

Protection Group ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.

Working PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.

Protection PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.

A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the E-Line service.

Service Name

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the E-Line service.

Source Node

-

-

This parameter indicates the source node.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


434



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink Node

-

-

This parameter indicates the sink node.

Service Tag Role

-

-


MTU(byte)

-

-

This parameter cannot be queried here.

BPDU


-

This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. This parameter is used to indicate whether the Ethernet line transparently transmits the BPDU packets.

-

This parameter indicates whether E-Line service is deployed.


Deployment Status

-

Parameters Associated with UNI Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the UNI port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


435



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLANs

1 to 4094

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.

NNI Parameters (PW) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

This parameter displays the PW ID.

Working Status

-

-

This parameter displays the working status of a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


436



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Status

-

-

This parameter displays whether a PW is enabled.

PW Signaling Type

-

-

This parameter displays the PW signaling type. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses static PWs only.

PW Type

-

-

This parameter displays the configured PW type.

PW Direction

-

-

This parameter displays the direction of the PW.


-

-

This parameter displays the PW encapsulation type. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses MPLS only.


-

-

This parameter displays the configured PW ingress label.


-

-

This parameter displays the configured PW egress label.

Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS

This parameter displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW.

Peer LSR ID

-

-

This parameter displays the opposite LSR ID.

Tunnel

-

-

This parameter displays the tunnel.

Control Word

-

-



-

-

This parameter displays the control channel type.

VCCV Verification Mode

-

-

This parameter displays the VCCV mode.

Local Working Status

-

-

Displays the working status of the PW at the local end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


437



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Remote Working Status

-

-

This parameter displays the working status of the PW at the remote end.

Compositive Working Status

-

-

This parameter displays the comprehensive working status of the PW.

Request VLAN

-

-

This parameter displays the request VLAN.

Deployment Status

-

-

This parameter displays the deployment status.

Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy

-

-

This parameter displays the automatic tunnel selection policy.

TPID

-

-


Parameters Associated with NNI Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

QinQ Link ID

1 to 4294967295

-

l This parameter indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link connected to the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service.

Port

-

-

l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


438



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

S-VLAN ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI or NNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l This parameter is preset in QinQ Link.

QoS Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

This parameter displays the PW ID.

Direction

-

-

l This parameter displays the direction of the PW. l Egress indicates the egress direction of the PW. l Ingress indicates the ingress direction of the PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


439



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l Regarding transmission channels, this function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Policy

-

-


CIR (Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR (kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.

440



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe


Parameters for the Port Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the port information.

Enable Port

-

-

l This parameter indicates whether to enable the port. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


441



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Encapsulation Type

Null

-

l This parameter indicates the encapsulation type of the port.

802.1Q QinQ

l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface. TAG

Tag Aware

-

Access Hybrid

l This parameter displays the tag of the port. l This parameter is preset in Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interface .


The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


442



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the protection group to be created.

Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Protection Mode

-

-


Enabling Status

Enabled

-

l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.

Disabled

l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Switchover Mode

-

-

Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supporting dual-ended switching.

Restoration Mode

Non-revertive

-

Revertive

l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


443



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 12

-

l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.


0 to 100

-

l Displays or specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered.

Deployment Status

-

-

Display the deployment status of the protection group.

Switchover Status

-

-

Displays the switchover status of the protection group.

Protocol Status

-

-

Displays the enabling status of the protocol.

Working Path Status

-

-

Displays the status of the current working path.

Protection Path Status

-

-

Display the status of the current protection path.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


444




The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


DNI PW ID

-

-

Displays the DNI PW ID.

PW Type

-

-

Displays the PW type.

Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.

A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.

3.

Click New.

Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Interface Type

V-UNI

V-UNI

This parameter specifies the network attribute of the source interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


445



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Interface

-

-

This parameter specifies the source interface.

Source VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the source service.

Sink Interface Type

V-UNI

V-UNI

This parameter specifies the network attribute of the sink interface.

Sink Interface

-

-

This parameter specifies the sink interface.

Sink VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the sink service.

NOTE

l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface. l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely. l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of VLAN IDs.

A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


446




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-

l This parameter specifies the ID of the E-LAN service. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.

Service Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service.

BPDU

-

-

l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


447



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tag Type

C-Awared

C-Awared

l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared.

S-Awared Tag-Transparent

l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


448



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Self-Learning MAC Address

Enabled

Enabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function.

Disabled

l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured. MAC Address Learning Mode

IVL

-

SVL

l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.

Deployment Status

-

-

This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed.

MTU(byte)

-

-


Service Tag Role

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


449



Parameters for UNIs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


SVLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

VLANs/CVLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


450



Parameters of NNIs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.

SVLANs

-

-

l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Split Horizon Group ID

-

1

l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


451



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Split Horizon Group Member

-

-

l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.

A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


452




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-

l This parameter indicates the ID of the E-LAN service. l The supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.

Service Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service.

BPDU

-

-

l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


453



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tag Type

C-Awared

C-Awared

l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared.

S-Awared Tag-Transparent

l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


454



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Self-Learning MAC Address

Enabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured.

MAC Address Learning Mode

-

-

l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.

MTU(byte)

-

-

This parameter cannot be queried here.

Service Tag Role

-

-


Deployment Status

-

-

This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


455



Parameters for UNIs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


SVLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

VLANs/CVLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, the E-LAN service exclusively uses the corresponding UNI physical port. That is, the entire port is mounted to the bridge. l If this parameter is set to a non-null value, only the corresponding UNI port whose service packets contain this VLAN ID works as the logical port and is mounted to the bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


456



Parameters for NNIs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.

SVLANs

-

-

l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


457



Parameters for Static MAC Addresses Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

MAC Address

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the static MAC address. l A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It is not aged automatically and needs to be deleted manually. l Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not be aged automatically.

Egress Interface

-

-

l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


458



Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset self-learning MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

MAC Address

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the self-learning MAC address. A selflearning MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. l A self-learning MAC address is an entry obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learning MAC address can be aged.

Egress Interface

-

-

l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


459



Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Aging Ability

Enabled

Enabled

The OptiX RTN 950 supports enabling/ disabling of the aging function and aging time for the MAC address table. If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a MAC address table is 5 minutes by default.

Disabled Aging Time(min)

1 to 640

5

Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


460



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MAC Address

-

-

l This parameter specifies or indicates the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. l This parameter is used for discarding an entry, also called a black hole entry, whose data frame that contains a specific destination MAC address. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and cannot be aged.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Split Horizon Group ID

-

1

l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


461



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Split Horizon Group Member

-

-

l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to different split horizon groups cannot communicate with each other. l The supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.

Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Frame Type

Unicast

-

This parameter indicates the type of the received unknown frame.

Broadcast

Selects the method of processing the unknown frame. If this parameter is set to Discard, the unknown frame is directly discarded. If this parameter is set to Broadcast, the unknown frame is broadcast at the forwarding port.

Multicast Handing Mode

Discard Broadcast

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


462



A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Parameters for the General Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

QinQ Link ID

1 to 4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the ID of the QinQ link. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1024 QinQ links, whose IDs must be different from each other.

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the QinQ link is located.

Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port where the QinQ link is located.

S-Vlan ID

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID (at the network operator side) for the QinQ link. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation This topic describes the parameters for creating E-AGGR services.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


463




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-

This parameter specifies the ID of an E-AGGR service.

Service Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the name of an E-AGGR service.

MTU(bytes)

-

-


Service Tag Role

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Location

Sink

-

This parameter specifies whether a port functions as a service source or sink.

UNI Parameters

Source

You can configure one or more source ports but only one sink port for an EAGGR service. Otherwise, configuration of the E-AGGR service will fail. Port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter displays UNI ports.

464



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLANs

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID for a UNI port. l Set this parameter to a numeral or several numerals. When you set this parameter to several numerals, use ","s to separate discrete values and use " - "s to indicate consecutive numerals. For example, 1, 3 - 6 indicates numerals 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l It is recommended that you do not set this parameter to null.

Priority

-

-


NNI (PW) Parameters Table A-8 Basic attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Location

Sink

-

This parameter specifies whether a port functions as a service source or sink.

Source

You can configure one or more source ports but only one sink port for an EAGGR service. Otherwise, configuration of the E-AGGR service will fail. PW ID

1 to 4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the ID of a PW.

PW Signaling Type

Static

Static

This parameter displays the signaling type of a PW. You need to allocate the same PW label for both ends of a static PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


465



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW Type

Ethernet

Ethernet

l This parameter specifies whether PTAGs will be added to Ethernet frames when the Ethernet frames are encapsulated on a PW.

Ethernet Tagged Mode

l If Request VLAN does not need to be added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated on a PW, set this parameter to Ethernet. If Request VLAN needs to be added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated on a PW, set this parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode. Currently, this parameter can be set only to Ethernet because EAGGR services on the OptiX RTN 950 do not support PWs in Ethernet tagged mode. PW Direction

-

-

This parameter displays the direction of a PW.


MPLS

MPLS

This parameter displays the encapsulation type of a PW.

PW Incoming Label

16 to 1048575

-

This parameter specifies the ingress label for a PW.

PW Outgoing Label

16 to 1048575

-

This parameter specifies the egress label for a PW.

Tunnel Selection Mode

-

-

This parameter displays whether an existing MPLS tunnel or a new MPLS tunnel is used.

Tunnel Type

-

-

This parameter displays the type of a tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


466



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel

-

-

This parameter requires you to select an existing static MPLS tunnel. If there is no static MPLS tunnel available, PW creation will fail.

Peer LSR ID

-

-

This parameter specifies the LSR ID for the NE at the opposite end of a PW. If an existing MPLS tunnel is used, the peer LSR ID is automatically generated based on the local LSR ID.

Table A-9 Advanced attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

Not in use

Not in use

For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter has a fixed value of Not in use.


Alert Label None

This parameter specifies the control channel type, which determines the PW continuity check (CC) mode. l None: indicates that virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) packets are not used. l l Alert Label: indicates that VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode are used.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


467



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


Ping

Ping

l This parameter specifies the VCCV verification mode, which is used for a PW CC test.

None

l If the LSP ping function is used to implement VCCV, VCCV Verification Mode cannot be set to None. Request VLAN

-

-


TPID

-

-


Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


V-UNI

V-UNI

This parameter specifies the network attribute for a source port.

Source Interface

-

-

This parameter specifies a source port.

Source VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

This parameter specifies the source VLAN ID.

Sink Interface Type

V-UNI

V-UNI

This parameter specifies the network attribute for the sink port.

Sink Interface

-

-

This parameter specifies the sink port.

Sink VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

This parameter specifies the sink VLAN ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


468



NOTE

l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service. l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when leaving Sink Interface. l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured. l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports. l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports.

QoS (PW) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

This parameter displays the ID of a PW.

Direction

-

-

l This parameter displays the direction of a PW. l Egress: indicates the egress direction of a PW. l Ingress: indicates the ingress direction of a PW.

PW Type

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter displays the type of a PW.

469



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l For transmission channels, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of one or more PWs as required. l For services, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of each ETH PWE3 service in an MPLS tunnel, because an ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW.

Policy

-

-


CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) for a PW. The CIR is recommended to be the same as the PIR.

CBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) for a PW.

PIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) for a PW. The PIR is recommended to be the same as the CIR.

PBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) for a PW.

EXP

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


470



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

Pipe: When an egress node strips off the MPLS tunnel labels in the received service packets, it does not renew the packet scheduling priorities.

A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services This topic describes E-AGGR service parameters.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967294

-

This parameter specifies the ID of an E-AGGR service.

Service Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the name of an E-AGGR service.

MTU(byte)

-

-


Service Tag Role

-

-

Setting this parameter is not available. OptiX RTN 950.

Deployment Status

-

-

This parameter displays whether an E-AGGR service has been deployed.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

-

-

This parameter displays the ID of a UNI port.

UNI Parameters

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


471



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Location

-

-

This parameter displays whether a port functions as a service source or sink.

Port

-

-

This parameter displays UNI ports.

VLANs

-

-

This parameter displays the VLAN ID of a UNI port.

Priority

-

-


NNI (PW) Parameters Table A-10 Basic attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

-

-

This parameter displays the ID of an NNI port.

Location

-

-

This parameter displays whether a port functions as a service source or sink.

PW ID

-

-


PW Status

-

-

This parameter displays whether a PW is enabled.

PW Signaling Type

-

-

This parameter displays the signaling type of a PW.

PW Type

-

-


PW Direction

-

-

This parameter displays the direction of a PW.


-

-

This parameter displays the encapsulation type of a PW.

PW Incoming Label

-

-

This parameter displays the ingress label of a PW.

PW Outgoing Label

-

-

This parameter displays the egress label of a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


472



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Peer LSR ID

-

-

This parameter displays the LSR ID for the NE at the opposite end of a PW.

Tunnel Type

-

-

This parameter displays the type of a tunnel.

Tunnel

-

-

This parameter displays the tunnel carrying PWs. Select an existing static MPLS tunnel. If there is no static MPLS tunnel available, PW creation will fail.

Control Word

-

-

This parameter displays whether the control word is used.


-

-

This parameter displays the control channel type.


-

-

This parameter displays the VCCV verification mode.

Local Operation Status

-

-

This parameter displays the PW running status at the local end.

Local Operation Status

-

-

This parameter displays the PW running status at the opposite end.

Overall Operation Status

-

-

This parameter displays the overall PW running status.

Request VLAN

-

-

This parameter displays the request VLAN ID.

Automatic Tunnel Selection Policy

-

-

This parameter displays the automatic tunnel selection policy.

TPID

-

-

The OptiX RTN 950 does not allow TPIDs in request VLANs to be specified for a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


473



Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


V-UNI

V-UNI

This parameter specifies the network attribute for a source port.

Source Interface

-

-

This parameter specifies a source port.

Source VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

This parameter specifies the source VLAN ID.

Sink Interface Type

V-UNI

V-UNI

This parameter specifies the network attribute for the sink port.

Sink Interface

-

-

This parameter specifies the sink port.

Sink VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

This parameter specifies the sink VLAN ID.

NOTE

l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service. l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when leaving Sink Interface. l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured. l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports. l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports.

QoS (PW) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


474



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Direction

-

-

l This parameter displays the direction of a PW. l Egress: indicates the egress direction of a PW. l Ingress: indicates the ingress direction of a PW.

PW Type

-

-


Bandwidth Limit

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l For transmission channels, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of one or more PWs as required. l For services, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of each ETH PWE3 service in an MPLS tunnel, because an ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW.

Policy

-

-


CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) for a PW. The CIR is recommended to be the same as the PIR.

CBS(Kbit/s)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) for a PW.

475



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) for a PW. The PIR is recommended to be the same as the CIR.

PBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) for a PW.

EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

Pipe: When an egress node strips off the MPLS tunnel labels in the received service packets, it does not renew the packet scheduling priorities.

A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


476




Value Range

Default Value

Description

ERPS ID

1 to 8

-

l This parameter specifies the ID of the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) instance. l The IDs of ERPS instances on an NE must be different from each other.

East Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the east port of the ERPS instance.

West Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the west port of the ERPS instance.

RPL Owner Ring Node Flag

Yes

No

l This parameter specifies whether the node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner.

No

l Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring. l An RPL owner needs to balance the traffic on each link of an Ethernet ring. Therefore, it is not recommended that you select a convergence node as an RPL owner. Instead, select the NE that is farthest away from the convergence node as an RPL owner.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


477



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

RPL Port

-

-

l This parameter specifies the RPL port. l There is only one RPL port and this RPL port must be the east or west port on the RPL owner node. l It is recommended that you set the east port on an RPL owner as an RPL Port.

Control VLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets. l The ID of a Control VLAN must not be the same as any VLAN ID used by Ethernet services. All ring nodes should use the same Control VLAN ID.

Destination Node

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

01-19-A7-00-00-01

01-19-A7-00-00-01


This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01. 478



A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

ERPS ID

1 to 8

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the ERPS instance.

East Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the east port of the ERPS instance.

West Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the west port of the ERPS instance.


Yes

-

This parameter indicates whether a node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner.

RPL Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the RPL port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

No


479



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control VLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.

Destination Node

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

01-19-A7-00-00-01

-


This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.

480



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Hold-Off Time(ms)

0 to 10000, in step of 100

0

l This parameter indicates or specifies the hold-off time of the ERPS hold-off timer. l The hold-off timer is used for negotiating the protection switching sequence when the ERPS coexists with other protection schemes so that the fault can be rectified in the case of other protection switching (such as LAG protection) before the ERPS occurs. When a node on the ring detects one or more new faults, it starts up the hold-off timer if the preset hold-off time is set to a value that is not 0. During the hold-off time, the fault is not reported to trigger an ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the node checks the link status regardless whether the fault that triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the fault exists, the node reports it to trigger an ERPS. This fault can be the same as or different from the fault that triggers the initial startup of the hold-off timer.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


481



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Guard Time(ms)

10 to 2000, in step of 10

500

l This parameter indicates or specifies the guard time of the ERPS guard timer. l The nodes on the ring continuously forward the R-APS packets to the Ethernet ring. As a result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist on the ring network. After a node on the ring receives the outdated R-APS packets, an incorrect ERPS may occur. The ERPS guard timer is an R-APS timer used for preventing a node on the ring from receiving outdated R-APS packets. When a faulty node on the ring detects that the switching condition is cleared, the node starts up the guard timer and starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets. During this period, the R-APS packets received by the node are discarded. The received R-APS packets are forwarded only after the time of the guard timer expires.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


482



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(mm:ss)


5

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time of the WRT timer in the case of ERPS protection. l The WTR time refers to the duration from the time when the working channel is restored to the time when the switching is released. When the working channel is restored, the WTR timer of the RPL owner starts up. In addition, a signal that indicates the operation of the WTR timer is continuously output in the timing process. When the WTR timer times out and no switching request of a higher priority is received, the signal indicating the operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted. In addition, the WTR release signal is continuously output. l The WTR timer is used to prevent frequent switching caused by the unstable working channel.

Packet Transmit Interval(s)

1 to 10

5

This parameter displays or specifies the interval for sending R-APS packets periodically.

Entity Level

0 to 7

4

This parameter indicates or specifies the level of the maintenance entity.

Last Switching Request

-

-

This parameter indicates the last switching request.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


483



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

RB Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the RB (RPL Blocked) status of the packets received by the working node. l noRB: The RPL is not blocked. l RB: The RPL is blocked.

DNF Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the DNF status of the packets received by the working node. l noDNF: The R-APS packets do not contain the DNF flag. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on a non-RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is requested to clear the forwarding address table. l DNF: The R-APS packets contain the DNF flags. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on an RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is informed not to clear the forwarding address table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


484



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

State Machine Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of the state machine at the working node. l Idle: The Ethernet ring is in normal state. For example, no node on the Ethernet ring detects any faults or receives the R_APS (NR, RB) packets. l Protection: The Ethernet ring is in protected state. For example, a fault on the node triggers the ERPS, or a node on the ring is in the WTR period after the fault is rectified.

Node Carried with Current Packet

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address carried in the R-APS packets received by the current node. The MAC address refers to the MAC address of the source node that initiates the switching request.

East Port Status

-

-

Displays the status of the east port.

West Port Status

-

-

Displays the status of the west port.

A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Group Parameters tab.

3.

Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


485




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protocol Type

MSTP

MSTP

This parameter specifies the protocol type.

STP

l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 950 supports the CIST MSTP only. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol. Enable Protocol

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the protocol of the port group or a member port in the port group. l If the STP or MSTP is enabled, the spanning tree topology is automatically reconfigured. As a result, the services are interrupted.

Parameters for Application Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located.

Available Port List

-

-

This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port can be added to the port group.

Selected Port List

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected ports that can be added to the port group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


486



A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Port Group Parameters tab.

3.

On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.

4.

Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for the Added Port Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located.

Available Port List

-

-

This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port needs to be added to the port group.

Selected Port List

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected ports that need to be added to the port group.

A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Bridge Parameters tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


487




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Group ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter can be set to only the port group ID that is automatically allocated.

MST Domain Name

-

-


Redaction Level

-

-


Mapping List

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Group ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group.

Bridge Parameters

l This parameter can be set to only the port Group ID that is automatically allocated. MST Domain Max Hop Count

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

20


Specifies the maximum hop count of the MSTP.

488



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Network Diameter

2 to 7

7

l This parameter specifies the MSTP network diameter. l Network Diameter is related to the link whose number of switches is the most and is indicated by the number of switches that are connected to the link. When you set Network Diameter for the switches, the MSTP automatically sets Max Age(s), Hello Time(s), and Forward Delay(s) to the more appropriate values for the switches. l If the value of Network Diameter is greater, the network is in a larger scale.

Hello Time(s)

1 to 10

2

l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


489



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Max Age(s)

6 to 40

20

l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.

Forward Delay(s)

4 to 30

15

l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.

Port Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port in the port group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


490



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable Edge Attribute

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port.

Enabled

l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Edge Attribute

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.

491



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Point-to-Point Attribute

false

auto

l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port.

true auto

l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point-to-Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Point-to-Point Attribute

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.

492



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Max Transmit Packet Count

1 to 255

3

l This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Group

-

-

This parameter specifies the port group.

MSTI ID

0

0

This parameter indicates the MSTI ID. The value 0 indicates common and internal spanning tree (CIST). The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the MSTP that uses CIST.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


493



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bridge Priority

0 to 61440, in step of 4096

32768

l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP/ MSTP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

Port Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Priority


128

l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.

Path Cost

1 to 200000000

FE Port: 200000 GE Port: 20000

l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


494



A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the CIST Running Information tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Group ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the port group.

Protocol Running Mode

MSTP

-

l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol.

STP

l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


495



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bridge Priority

0 to 61440, in step of 4096

32768

l This parameter indicates the priority of the bridge. l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

Bridge MAC Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge.

Root Bridge Priority

0 to 61440, in step of 4096

32768

This parameter indicates the priority of the root bridge.

Root Bridge MAC Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the root bridge.

External Path Cost ERPC

-

-


Domain Root Bridge Priority

-

-


Domain Root Bridge MAC Address

-

-


Internal Path Cost IRPC

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


496



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Root Port Priority


128

l This parameter indicates the priority of the root port. l The most significant eight bits of the ID of the root port indicate the priority of the root port. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.

Root Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the root port.

Hello Time(s)

-

2

l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.

Max Age(s)

6 to 40

20


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


497



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Forward Delay(s)

4 to 30

15

l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.

MST Domain Max Hop Count

-

-

This parameter indicates the maximum hop count of the MSTP.

Topology Change Count

-

-

This parameter indicates the identifier of the topology change.

Last Topology Change Time(s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the duration of the last topology change.

Topology Change Count

-

-

This parameter indicates the count of the topology changes.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Enable Protocol

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter indicates whether the protocol of the port group or a member of the port group is enabled.

Disabled

This parameter indicates the role of a port.

Port Parameters

Disabled

Port Role

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


498



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Status

Discarding

Discarding

This parameter indicates the state of a port.

Learning

l Discarding: receives only BPDU packets

Forwarding

l Learning: only receives or transmits BPDU packets l Forwarding: forwards user traffic, and transmits/receives BPDU packets Priority


128


Path Cost

1 to 200000000

200000

l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.

Bridge Priority

0 to 61440, in step of 4096

32768

l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


499



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bridge MAC Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Priority


0


Design Port

-

0

This parameter indicates the designated port.

Edge Port Attribute

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port.

Enabled

l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Edge Port Attribute

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

Disabled


This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.

500



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Point to Point

false

auto

l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port.

true auto

l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point to Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point to Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Point to Point

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.

501



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Max Count of Transmitting Message

1 to 255

3

l This parameter indicates the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s.

Protocol Running Mode

STP

-

MSTP

l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.

Hello Time(s)

1 to 10

2

l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


502



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Max Age(s)

6 to 40

20


4 to 30

Forward Delay(s)

15

l This parameter specifies the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.

-

Remain Hop

-


A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

Navigation Path 1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

503



2.

Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAG No.

-

1

l This parameter specifies the LAG number to be set manually. l This parameter is valid only when Automatically Assign is not selected.

Automatically Assign

Selected

Selected

Deselected

l This parameter indicates whether LAG No. is allocated automatically. l When Automatically Assign is selected, LAG No. cannot be set.

LAG Name

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter specifies the LAG name.

504



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAG Type

Static

Static

l Static: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port to or from the LAG, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol is required. In a LAG, a port can be in selected, standby, or unselected state. The aggregation information is exchanged among different equipment through the LACP protocol to ensure that the aggregation information is the same among all the nodes.

Manual

l Manual: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port, the LACP protocol is not required. The port can be in the up or down state. The system determines whether to aggregate a port according to its physical state (UP or DOWN), working mode, and rate. Switch Protocol

-

-


Switch Mode

-

-


Link Trace Protocol

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


505



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive Mode

l Revertive Mode can be set only when Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.

Non-Revertive Mode

l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the services are switched back to the former working channel after this channel is restored to normal. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive Mode, the status of the LAG does not change after the former working channel is restored to normal. That is, the services are still transmitted on the protection channel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


506



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Load Sharing

Sharing

Non-Sharing

l Set Load Sharing to the same value as the peer equipment. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for protection and set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for increasing bandwidths.

Non-Sharing

l Sharing: Each member link of a LAG processes traffic at the same time and shares the traffic load. The sharing mode can increase a bandwidth utilization for the link. When the LAG members change, or certain links fail, the system automatically re-allocates the traffic. l Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG carries traffic, and the other link is in the standby state. In this case, a hot backup mechanism is provided. When the active link of a LAG is faulty, the system activates the standby link, thus preventing link failure.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


507



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Load Sharing Hash Algorithm

Source MAC

Source MAC

l This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing of a LAG is set to Sharing.

Destination MAC Source and Destination MAC Source IP Destination IP Source and Destination IP MPLS Label

l The load sharing computation methods include computation based on MAC addresses (based on the source MAC address, based on the destination MAC address, and based on the source MAC address + sink MAC address), computation based on IP addresses (based on the source IP address, based on the destination IP address, and based on the source IP address and sink IP address), and computation based on MPLS labels. l After the configuration data is deployed, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes effect for the entire NE. l For PW-carried UNINNI E-Line services, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm cannot be set to MPLS Label.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


508



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

System Priority

0 to 65535

32768

l System Priority indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of System Priority, the higher the priority. l When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets, both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Then, the LAG of the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result of both LAGs so that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same, the system MAC addresses are compared. Then, the comparison result based on the LAG with smaller system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs and is used to ensure that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs.

WTR Time(min)

1 to 30

10

l Specifies the WTR time for the LAG. l WTR Time(min) takes effect only when Revertive Mode is Revertive Mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


509



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD

Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the switching triggered by bit errors.

Enabled

l If Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD is set to Enabled, the MW_BER_SD alarm will trigger the LAG switching at the air interface.

Port Settings Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Main Board

-

-

l This parameter specifies the main board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Main Port

-

-

l This parameter specifies the main port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. Services cannot be added to a slave port. When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is used to transmit the services, and the link connected to the slave port is used for protection.

Board (Available Slave Ports)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the slave board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


510



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port (Available Slave Ports)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the salve port in a LAG. l The slave ports in a LAG are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the LAG.

Selected Standby Ports

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected slave ports.

A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Priority tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port whose priority can be set.

Port Priority

0 to 65535

32768

l This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. l When ports are added into a LAG, the port of the highest priority is preferred for service transmission.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


511



A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.

Parameters on the main interface Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Binding Status

-

-

This parameter displays the binding status of pointto-point services.

Primary Function Point

-

-

This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides.

Secondary Function Point Type

-

-

This parameter displays the type of secondary point for point-to-point LPT.

Secondary Function Point

-

-

This parameter displays the port where the secondary point of pointto-point LPT resides.

LPT Instance Status

-

-

This parameter displays the status of point-to-point LPT.

LPT Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter displays or specifies the enabling status of point-to-point LPT.

Disabled

The LPT function can take effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. Recovery Times(s)

1-600

1

This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-point LPT.

Hold-Off Times(ms)

0-10000

1000

This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-point LPT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


512



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Switching Mode

-

-

This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-point LPT. Pointto-point LPT is available only in strict mode.

Fault Detection Mode

PW OAM

LPT OAM

This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT.

LPT OAM

l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets. Fault Detection Period (100ms)

10-100

10

This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-point LPT.

User-Side Port Status

-

-

This parameter displays the status of a user-side port.

L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID

-

-

This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


513



A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.

3.

Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.

4.

Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

L2 net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the local end.

L2 Peer net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the opposite end.


-

-

This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides.

VLAN ID

1-4094

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by a point-to-point LPT packet to traverse an L2 network.

LPT package out port

-

-

This parameter specifies the out port of a point-topoint LPT packet.

A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


514



Parameters of Primary Point Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Primary Function Point Type

-

-

This parameter displays the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT.


-

-

This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.

LPT Instance Status

-

-

This parameter displays the status of point-tomultipoint LPT.

LPT Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter displays the enabling status of point-to-multipoint LPT.

Disabled Recovery Times(s)

1-600

1

This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-multipoint LPT.

Hold-Off Times(ms)

0-10000

1000

This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-multipoint LPT.

Switching Mode

Strict mode

Strict mode

This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. Point-to-point LPT is available only in strict mode.

Non-strict mode

l Strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when all its secondary points detect faults. l Non-strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when anyone of its secondary points detects a fault.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


515



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Fault Detection Mode

PW OAM

LPT OAM

This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT.

LPT OAM

l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets. Fault Detection Period (100ms)

10-100

10

This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-multipoint LPT.


-

-



-

-

This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


516



Parameters of Secondary Point Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Access Point Type

-

-

This parameter displays the type of second point for point-to-multipoint LPT.

Access Point

-

-

This parameter displays the port or PW ID for the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT.


-

-



-

-

This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.

A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.

3.

Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.

4.

Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


517



Parameters of primary point Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Point Type

UNI

-

This parameter specifies the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT. The value range of this parameter pertains to the type of service network.

PW QinQ L2 net

If the primary point is on the access side, select UNI; if the primary point is on the network side, set the parameter as follows. l If the service network is a PSN, select PW. l If the service network is a QinQ network, select QinQ. l If the service network is an L2 network, select L2 net. Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.

Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.

Point ID

-

-

This parameter specifies the service ID for the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW or QinQ.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


518



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

L2 net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

L2 Peer net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.

VLAN ID

1-4094

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.

LPT package out port

-

-

This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.

Parameters of secondary point Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Point Type

UNI

-

This parameter displays or specifies the type of secondary point for pointto-multipoint LPT.

PW QinQ L2 net

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


519



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.

Available Points

-

-

This parameter displays the available ports where the secondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT can reside. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.

Selected Points

-

-

This parameter displays the selected port where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.

L2 net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.

L2 Peer net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


520



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

1-4094

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

LPT Package out port

-

-

This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM).

A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3.

Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


521




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maintenance Domain Name

-

default

l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance domain. l The maintenance domain refers to the network for the Ethernet OAM. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes.

0

Maintenance Domain Level

4

1

l Maintenance Domain Level specifies the level of the maintenance domain. l The values 0 to 7 indicates maintenance domain levels in an ascending order.

2 3

l MEPs transparently transmit OAM protocol packets if the packets have a higher level than the parameter value.

4 5 6

l MEPs discard OAM protocol packets if the packets have a lower level than the parameter value.

7

l MEPs respond to or terminate OAM protocol packets based on the packet type if the packets have the same level as the parameter value.

A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created maintenance association.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


522



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maintenance Association Name

-

-

l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance association, which is a domain related to a service. Through maintenance association division, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a service instance. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes.

Relevant Service

-

-

This parameter specifies the service instance that is related to the maintenance association.

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

1s

l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting packets in the CC.

10s

l The CC is performed to check the availability of the service.

1m 10m

A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP).

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created MEP.


-

-

This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP.

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the MEP is located.

Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port where the MEP is located.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


523



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN

-

-

This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the current service.

MP ID

1 to 2048

1

l This parameter specifies the MEP ID. l Each MEP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation.

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

Egress

l Direction specifies the direction of the MEP. l Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port.

Active

CC Status

Active

Inactive

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the CC function of the MEP. l In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

AIS Active Status

Active

Active

Inactive

l This parameter specifies the AIS active status. l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate a fault accurately, set AIS Active Status to Active and Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information. l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS packet to a higher level MP, informing the higher level MP of the fault information; if this MP does not activate the AIS, it does not report the fault.

Client Layer Level

1 to 7

1

l Normally, if an MP is set to level n, Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information should be set to n+1. l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS Active Status is Active.

A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


524



Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MEP.


-

-

This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP.

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

1 to 2048

-

l This parameter specifies the ID of the remote MEP. l If other MEPs will initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set these MEPs as remote MEPs.

A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the MIP Point tab.

3.

Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MIP.

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the MIP is located.

Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port where the MIP is located.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


525



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MP ID

1 to 2048

1

l This parameter specifies the MIP ID. l Each MIP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation. NOTE To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.

A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.

4.

Choose OAM > Start LB.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Destination Maintenance Point ID

Selected

Deselected

This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of Destination Maintenance Point IDs.

Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address

Selected

Selected

This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses.


-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LB test.


-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LB test.

Source Maintenance Point ID

-

-

l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LB test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Deselected

Deselected

l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point.


526



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LB test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected.


-

00-00-00-00-00-00

l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LB test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.

1 to 255

Transmitted Packet Count

3

l This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted each time in the LB test. l When the value is greater, the required duration is longer.

Transmitted Packet Length

64 to 1400

64

l This parameter specifies the length of a transmitted LBM packet. l If the packet length is different, the test result may be different. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

0 to 7

Transmitted Packet Priority

7

l This parameter specifies the priority of transmitting packets. l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7 indicates the highest priority. In normal cases, this parameter is set to the highest priority.

-

Detection Result

-

This parameter indicates the relevant information and result of the LB test.

A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


527



Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.

4.

Choose OAM > Start LT.

Test Node Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


Selected

Deselected

This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.


Selected

Selected

This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses.


-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LT test.


-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LT test.


-

-

l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LT test.


-

Deselected

Deselected

l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point. -

l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected.


-

00-00-00-00-00-00

l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


528



Parameters for the Detection Result Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

This parameter indicates the source maintenance point in the LT test.

Destination Maintenance Point ID/MAC

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test.

Response Maintenance Point ID/MAC

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the responding maintenance point is located in the LT test.

Hop Count

1 to 64

-

l This parameter indicates the number of hops from the source maintenance point to the responding maintenance point or to the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l The number of hops indicates the adjacent relation between the responding maintenance point to the source maintenance point. The number of hops increases by one when a responding point occurs on the link from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point.

-

Test Result

-

This parameter indicates the result of the LT test.

A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection This topic describes the parameters for enabling E-LAN service loopback detection.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


529



Parameters for Enabling Service Loopback Detection Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Vlans/CVLAN

1 to 4094

1 to 4094

Vlans/CVLAN displays the VLAN ID of a loopback service. Loopback detection can be performed for only one service one time.

Packet Timeout Period (s)

3 to 10

3

Loopback detection stops if no loopback detection packets are received until Packet Timeout Period (s) expires.

Packet Length

-

-

This parameter displays the loopback detection packet length.

VLAN Packet Sending Interval(s)

-

-

This parameter displays the intervals for transmitting different VLAN packets.

Disable Service When Loopback is Detected

No

No

Disable Service When Loopback is Detected displays whether a loopback service will be deactivated.

Yes

A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the OAM Parameter tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


530



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable OAM Protocol

Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the OAM protocol.

Disabled

l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to create the OAM connection with the opposite end. OAM Working Mode

Active

Active

Passive

l This parameter indicates or specifies the working mode of the OAM. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Active can initiate the OAM connection. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Passive can only wait for the opposite end to send the OAM connection request. l The OAM working mode of the equipment at only one end can be Passive.

Link Event Notification

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the local link events can be notified to the opposite end. l If the alarms caused by link events can be reported, that is, if the number of performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame second, and error frame signal cycle) at the local end exceeds the preset threshold, these performance events are notified to the port at the opposite end through the link event notification function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


531



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Remote Side Loopback Response

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the port responds to the remote loopback.

Enabled

l Remote loopback indicates that the local OAM entity transmits packets to the remote OAM entity for loopback. The local OAM entity can locate the fault and test the link performance through loopback data analysis. l If a port does not support remote loopback response, this port does not respond to the loopback request from the remote port regardless of the OAM port status. Non-Loopback

Loopback Status

-

Initiate Loopback at Local

This parameter indicates the loopback status at the local end. NOTE Loopback Status is valid only after you choose OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.

Respond Loopback of Remote OAM Discovery Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the OAM discovery status at the local end.

Port Transmit Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of transmitting packets at the local end.

Port Receive Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of receiving packets at the local end.

A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


532



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Error Frame Monitor Window (ms)

1000 to 60000, in step of 100

1000

This parameter specifies the duration of monitoring error frames.

Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frames)

1 to 4294967295, in step of 1

1

l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames.

Error Frame Period Window (frame)

1488 to 892800000, in step of 1

892800000

This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame period.

Error Frame Period Threshold (frames)

1 to 892800000, in step of 1

1

l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period.

Error Frame Second Window(s)


60

This parameter specifies the time window of monitoring the error frame second.

Error Frame Second Threshold (s)


1

l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds.

l Within the specified value of Error Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.

l Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window(frame), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.

l If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an errored frame second. Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm is reported.

A.6.4 QoS Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


533



Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Mapping Relation ID

1 to 8

1

This parameter indicates the ID of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.

Mapping Relation Name

-

Default Map

This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.

NOTE

If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

SVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


534



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP DSCP

0 to 63

-

l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

0 to 7

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


535



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PHB

BE

-

l This parameter indicates the per-hop behavior (PHB) service class of the DiffServ domain.

AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4

l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.

EF CS6 CS7

l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value, and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


536



Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PHB

BE

-

l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DiffServ domain.

AF1 AF2 AF3

l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.

AF4 EF CS6 CS7

l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

CVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


537



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

SVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

IP DSCP

0 to 63

-

l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The DSCP refers to bits 0-5 of the DS field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

0 to 7

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet arrives at an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value depending on its trusted priority type (MPLS EXP value) and specifies the PHB service class of the packet according to the mappings between packet priorities and PHB service classes. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


538




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the port that uses the DiffServ domain.

Packet Type

CVLAN

CVLAN

The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN and IP DSCP packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.

SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP

NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.

A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


539




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Mapping Relation ID

2 to 8

-

This parameter specifies the ID of the mapping relationship of a DS domain.


-

-

This parameter specifies the name of the mapping relationship of a DS domain.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

SVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


540



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IP DSCP

0 to 63

-

l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

-

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


541



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PHB

BE

-

l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain.

AF1 AF2 AF3

l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.

AF4 EF CS6 CS7

l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relationship. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


542



Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PHB

BE

-

l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain.

AF1 AF2 AF3

l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.

AF4 EF CS6 CS7

l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relationship. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

CVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


543



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

SVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

IP DSCP

0 to 63

-

l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the egress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

-

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


544




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board that uses the mapping relationships between DS domains.

Available Port

-

-

This parameter displays the available port list from which you can select the port that uses the mapping relationships between DS domains.

Port

-

-

This parameter displays the selected port list. The ports in the list use the mapping relationships between DS domains.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


545



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Type

cvlan

cvlan

l This parameter specifies the type of the packet.

svlan ip-dscp mpls-exp

l The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN, IP DSCP and MPLS packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding. NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.

A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


546


3.

Click the Apply Port tab.

4.

Click Modify.


Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain.

Packet Type

CVLAN

CVLAN

The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the CVLAN, S-VLAN, IP DSCP packets, and MPLS packets that respectively contain the C-VLAN priority, S-VLAN priority, IP DSCP value and MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding.

SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP

NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the port is located.

Available Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the available port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


547



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Selected Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected port. The selected port is applied to the DS domain.

NOTE

If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.

A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.

Navigation Path (Port Policy) 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the CoS Configuration tab.

Parameters (Port Policy) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the policy ID of the port.

Policy Name

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the policy name of the port.

WRR Scheduling Policy

-

-

This parameter indicates the current WRR scheduling policy.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


548



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS

CS7

-

l The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service classes.

CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE

l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


549



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Grooming Police After Reloading

SP

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP

WRR

AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR

l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


550


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

CIR(kbit/s)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.

551



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PIR(kbit/s)

-

-

l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

CBS(byte)

-

-

l It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


552



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PBS(byte)

-

-

l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Navigation Path (WRR Scheduling Policy) 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.

Parameters (WRR Scheduling Policy) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the policy ID of the WRR scheduling policy.

Policy Name

-

-

This parameter indicates the policy name of the WRR scheduling policy.

Scheduling Weight

1 to 100

-

l The eight classes of service (CoSs), namely, BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 correspond to eight queues. l The Scheduling Weight parameter indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources gained by the WRR queue.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


553



A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.

Navigation Path (Creating a Port Policy) 1.


2.


3.

Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.

Parameters (Creating a Port Policy) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy ID

-

-

This parameter specifies the policy ID of the port.

Automatically Assign

Selected

Deselected

This parameter specifies whether to automatically allocate the policy ID of the port policy. After this parameter is selected, the system automatically allocates the policy ID, and then the policy ID cannot be set manually.

-

This parameter specifies the policy name of the port.

Deselected

Policy Name

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


554



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WRR Scheduling Policy

-

-

l This parameter specifies the desired WRR scheduling policy. l The WRR weight set in the WRR scheduling policy only applies to WRR queues. l When the total WRR weight value of all WRR queues equals to 100%, the WRR weight set for each queue in the WRR scheduling policy is the actual WRR weight. For example, when AF4, AF3, AF2, and AF1 are all WRR queues and their weight values are 25%, 25%, 25%, and 25% respectively, each queue is actually allocated with 25% total bandwidth. l When the total WRR weight value of all WRR queues is less than 100%, the actual WRR weight is recalculated based on the proportion between the WRR weights of different queues set in the WRR scheduling policy. For example, when AF4, AF3, AF2, and AF1 are all WRR queues and their weight values are 20%, 20%, 20%, and 20% respectively, the actual bandwidth allocation weight of each queue will be recalculated based on the proportion

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


555


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description between the set WRR weight (1:1:1:1). That is, each queue is allocated with 25% total bandwidth.

CoS

CS7

-


l The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service class. l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


556



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Grooming Police After Reloading

SP

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP

WRR

AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR

l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


557


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

CIR(kbit/s)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.

558



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PIR(kbit/s)

-

-

l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

CBS(byte)

-

-

l It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


559



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PBS(byte)

-

-

l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Navigation Path (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy) 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New. The Create WRR Policy dialog box is displayed.

Parameters (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy ID

-

-

This parameter specifies the policy ID of the WRR scheduling policy.

Assign automatically

Selected

Deselected

This parameter specifies whether to automatically assign the policy ID of the WRR scheduling policy. If this parameter is set to Selected, the policy ID of the WRR scheduling policy can only be assigned automatically. Manual assignment is not available.

-

This parameter specifies the policy name of the WRR scheduling policy.

Deselected

Policy Name

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


560



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Scheduling Weight

1 to 100

-

l The eight classes of service (CoSs), namely, BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 correspond to eight queues. l The Scheduling Weight parameter indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources gained by the WRR queue. l This parameter must be set to 0% for SP queues. l The scheduling weight sum of WRR queues must be 100%.

A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.

3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Traffic Classification ID

1 to 512

-

l This parameter specifies the ID of the traffic classification. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports a maximum of 512 flow classifications.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


561



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ACL Action

Permit

Permit

l The access control list (ACL) determines whether to forward or discard the packets that enter the port according to the specified matching rules.

Deny

l When ACL Action is set to Permit, the ingress port accepts and then performs QoS processing for only the packets that meet the specified mapping rules. l When ACL Action is set to Deny, the ingress port discards the packets that meet the specified mapping rules.

Ingress Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Logical Relation Between Matched Rules

And

And

l This parameter specifies the logical relationship between the traffic classification matching rules. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the logical AND between multiple matching rules.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


562



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Match Type

DSCP Value

-

l After you click Add or Delete, complex traffic classification can be performed on the traffic that enters the ingress port according to the preset matching rules.

CVlan ID CVlan priority SVlan ID SVlan priority

l In the case a specific service, complex traffic classification can be divided into basic traffic types according to the DSCP value, C-VLAN ID, CVLAN priority, SVLAN ID, or SVLAN priority. Traffic type is based on the associated Ethernet packets. Therefore, this parameter is set according to the packet type and the planning information. Match Value

DSCP Value: 0 to 63

-

CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 CVlan priority: 0 to 7 SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 SVlan priority: 0 to 7

l If the matching value of the packets is the same as the preset Match Value, the packets match the rules of complex traffic classification. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Wildcard

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter has a fixed value of 0.

563



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS

-

-

l This parameter specifies the PHB service class queue mapped by the traffic classification packets.

CS7 CS6 EF AF4

l If this parameter is set to empty (-), the traffic classification packets map the PHB service class queue according the mapping relation specified in the topic about Diffserv domain management.

AF3 AF2 AF1 BE

l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the CAR operation is performed for the flow in the ingress direction. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


564



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CIR(kbit/s)

-

-

l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, the packets are marked blue and pass the CAR policing. These packets are first forwarded in the case of network congestion. l When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


565



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PIR(kbit/s)

-

-

l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate restriction are marked red and directly discarded. l When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


566



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CBS(byte)

-

-

l During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is not more than the CIR, certain burst packets are allowed and can be first forwarded in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

PBS(byte)

-

-

l During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, certain burst packets are allowed and marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


567



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Coloration Mode

Color Blindness

Color Blindness

l This parameter specifies the CAR operation performed by the equipment on the packets. The packets are dyed according to the result of the CAR operation. The dying rule is determined by the comparison between the rate of the packets and the preset CAR value. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports Color Blindness only.

Packet Color

Red

-

Packets can be dyed in three colors: red, yellow, and green. The packets in red are first discarded.

-

l This parameter specifies the method of handling the packets.

Yellow Green Handling Mode

Discard Pass Remark

l Discard: The packets are discarded. l Pass: The packets are forwarded. l Remark: The packets are remarked. "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


568



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Relabeled CoS

CS7

-

If the handling method is set to "Remark", you can reset the CoS of the packets.


Egress Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

Enable

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the traffic shaping is performed in the egress function.

Enable

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


569



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CIR(kbit/s)

-

-

l In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue. l In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


570



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PIR(kbit/s)

-

-

l In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. If the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets are directly discarded. l In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

CBS(byte)

-

-

l If the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR during a certain period, the burst packets are directly transmitted. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


571



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PBS(byte)

-

-

l If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR during a certain period, the burst packets enter the egress queue. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Parameters for Port Shaping Management Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Slot No.

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot ID.

Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the port.

CIR (kbit/s)

-

-

CBS (byte)

-

-

PIR (kbit/s)

-

-

Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid. If the traffic shaping function is enabled, OptiX RTN 950 processes the packets in the buffer

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


572



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PBS (byte)

-

-

queue through the following methods when no packets are available in the queue. l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


573



A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/ EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters.

A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services.

A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Deselect Display QinQ Shared Service.

3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

Displays the board name.

Service Type

EPL

EPL

Specify the Ethernet service type to EPL.

EVPL(QinQ)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


574



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

l If this parameter is set to Unidirectional, you only need to create a service from the service source to the service sink. That is, there is traffic only in the direction from the service source to the sink port.

Unidirectional

l If this parameter is set to Bidirectional, you need to create a service from the service source to the service sink and a service from the service sink to the service source. That is, there is traffic in the direction from the service source to the sink port and in the direction from the service sink to the source port at the same time. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Source Port

-

-

l Specifies the port of the service source. l When you create bidirectional Ethernet services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you set the PORT to the source port.

Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-4095

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen (-) to represent consecutive numbers. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs must be the same as the value of Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6). l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that carries a specified VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

Sink Port

-

-

l Specifies the port of the service sink. l This parameter cannot take the same value as Source Port. l When you create bidirectional Ethernet services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK to the sink port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


575



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-4095

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen (-) to represent consecutive numbers. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs must be the same as the value of Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6). l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that carries a specified VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.

Table A-12 Parameters for port attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the ports involved in the Ethernet service.

Port Type

-

-

Displays the network attribute of the Ethernet port.

Port Enabled

Enabled

-

l When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.

Disabled

l This parameter need not be set when the source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK. TAG

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

-

l If all the accessed services are frames with VLAN tags (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without VLAN tags (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


576



Table A-13 Parameters for bound paths Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Configurable Ports

EFP8: VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16

VCTRUNK1

Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.

-

Displays the level of the bound VC path.

EMS6: VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8 Level

-

In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC12-Xv. Service Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Uplink

l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.

Downlink Available Resources

-

l Specifies the direction of the bound path.

-

l Displays the available VC4 paths. l In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC4-1. l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths only in VC-4-4s.

Available Timeslots

-

-

Specifies the available timeslots.

Bound Path

-

-

You need to plan and set this parameter according to the following principles: l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is determined by the actual bandwidth required by the services. l The EFP8 board supports 16 VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and the total number of bound VC-12 paths cannot exceed 63. l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7 each support a maximum bandwidth of 100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than 100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is recommended.

Number of Bound Paths

-

-

Displays the number of the bound VC path.

Activation Status

-

-

Displays the activation status of the bound VC path.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


577



A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which need to be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Select Display QinQ Shared Service.

3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


Service Type

EPL

EPL

Specifies the service type to EVPL(QinQ).

Bidirectional

l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the service from the service source to the service sink is created. That is, the service source is forwarded only to the sink port.

EVPL(QinQ) Direction

Bidirectional Unidirectional

l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source are created. That is, when the service source is forwarded to the sink port, the service sink is forwarded to the source port. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


578



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Operation Type

l Add S-VLAN

Strip S-VLAN

l When used for private line services, QinQ can process VLAN tags in different manners as required.

l Transparently transmit CVLAN

l When Service Direction is set to Unidirectional, you can set Operation Type to Strip S-VLAN.

l Transparently transmit SVLAN

l Set this parameter according to actual situations.

l Transparently transmit SVLAN and CVLAN l Translate SVLAN l Translate SVLAN and transparently transmit CVLAN l Strip S-VLAN Source Port

-

-

l Specifies the port where the service source resides. l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use the PORT as the source port.

Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1, 3-6)

1-4095

-

l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1, 3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source port whose VLAN IDs are included in the value range of this parameter work as the service source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


579



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source S-VLAN

1-4095

-

l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the service of the source port whose S-VLAN ID is equal to the value of this parameter work as the service source.

Sink Port

-

-

l Specifies the port where the service sink resides. l This parameter must be set to be a value different from Source Port. l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use the VCTRUNK as the sink port.

Sink C-VLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6)

1-4095

-

l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink port whose VLAN IDs are included in the value range of this parameter work as the service sink.

Sink S-VLAN

1-4095

-

l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the services of the sink port whose S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of this parameter work as the service sink.

C-VLAN Priority

AUTO

AUTO

Displays the C-VLAN priority.

S-VLAN Priority

AUTO

AUTO

Specifies the S-VLAN priority. The bigger the value, the higher the priority.

Priority 0 to Priority 7

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


580



Table A-15 Parameters of port attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the ports that are configured to transmit the service.

Port Type

-

-


Port Enabled

Enabled

-

l When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.

Disabled

l This parameter need not be set when the source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK. TAG

-

-

This parameter is invalid for QinQ line services.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Configurable Ports


VCTRUNK1


-



-


Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Uplink



-


-


Available Timeslots

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-



581



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bound Path

-

-



-

-


Activation Status

-

-


A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-17 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


Service Type

-

-

Displays the service type.

Service Direction

-

-

Displays the service direction.

Source Port

-

-

Displays the port of the service source.

Source VLAN

-

-

Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.

Sink Port

-

-

Displays the port of the service sink.

Sink VLAN

-

-

Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


582



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Activation Status

-

-

Displays whether to activate the service.

Table A-18 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected) Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


Service Type

-

-

Displays the service type.

Service Direction

-

-


Source Port

-

-

Displays the port of the service source.

Source C-VLAN

-

-

Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.

Source S-VLAN

-

-

l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service source. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.

Sink Port

-

-

Displays the port of the service sink.

Sink C-VLAN

-

-

Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.

Sink S-VLAN

-

-

l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service sink. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.

C-VLAN Priority

-

-

l Displays the priority of the C-VLAN. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.

S-VLAN Priority

-

-

l Displays the priority of the S-VLAN. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.

Activation Status

-

-


Table A-19 Parameters for port attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Port Type

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


583



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Enabled

-

-

When the source port or sink port is a PORT, this parameter indicates whether the port is enabled.

TAG

-

-

Displays the tag attribute of the Ethernet port.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK Port

-

-

Displays the VCTRUNK that binds VC paths.

Level

-

-

Displays the level of the bound VC paths.

Service Direction

-

-

Displays the direction of the bound VC paths.

Bound Path

-

-

Displays the serial numbers of the bound VC paths.


-

-

Displays the number of the bound VC paths.

Activation Status

-

-

Displays whether the bound VC paths are activated.

A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

Displays the board that is configured with a bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


584



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB name

-

-

Describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this parameter to a character string that indicates the function of the bridge.

Bridge Type

802.1q

802.1q

l If this parameter is set to 802.1q, an IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.

802.1d

l If this parameter is set to 802.1d, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.

802.1ad Bridge Switch Mode

l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (supported by the IEEE 802.1q bridge and IEEE 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the IEEE 802.1d bridge) l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (supported by the IEEE 802.1d bridge and IEEE 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the IEEE 802.1q bridge)

l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (IEEE 802.1q bridge and the IEEE 802.1ad bridge) l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table. l When the filtering function is enabled at the ingress port, the ingress port checks the VLAN tags of all incoming packets. If the VLAN ID contained in the VLAN tag of a packet is not included in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. When the filtering function is disabled at the ingress port, the ingress port does not check any VLAN tag of the incoming packets.

Bridge Learning Mode

-

-

Displays the learning mode of the bridge.

Ingress Filter

-

-

Displays whether the filtering function is enabled at the ingress port.

MAC Address Selflearning

-

-

Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.

Table A-22 Parameters for mounting services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB Port

-

-

Displays the ID of the logical port on the bridge.

Mount Port

-

-

Displays or specifies which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to the bridge.

Port Type

-

-

Displays the network attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


585



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Enabled

Disabled

-

Displays or specifies whether the port mounted to the bridge is enabled.

-

Displays or specifies the tag attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

-

Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID of the port mounted to the bridge.

Enabled TAG

Access Tag Aware Hybrid

Default VLAN ID

-

This parameter is valid only when you set the tag attribute of the port to Access or Hybrid. Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

-

Displays or specifies the working mode of the port mounted to the bridge.

10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex GE port: 1000M Full-Duplex Active

-

-


Service Direction

-

-

Displays the direction of the service.

C-VLAN

-

-

The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not support this parameter.

S-VLAN

-

-


S-VLAN Priority

-

-


C-VLAN Priority

-

-


Table A-23 Parameters for mounting configuration Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Available Mounted Ports

-

-

Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board can be mounted to the bridge.

Selected Mounted Ports

-

-

Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to the bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


586




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Configurable Ports


VCTRUNK1


-



-


Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Uplink



-


-


Available Timeslots

-

-


Bound Path

-

-



-

-


Activation Status

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


587



A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, which need to be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

Displays the board where the bridge is configured.

VB Name

-

-

This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this parameter to a character string that contains the information about the detailed application of the bridge.

Bridge Type

802.1q

802.1q

When this parameter is set to 802.1ad, create the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (the 802.1q bridge and the 802.1ad bridge)

l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables.

l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (the 802.1d bridge)

l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted.

-

Displays the bridge learning mode.

802.1d 802.1ad Bridge Switch Mode

l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (supported by the 802.1q bridge and 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the 802.1d bridge) l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (supported by the 802.1d bridge and 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the 802.1q bridge)

Bridge Learning Mode Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


588



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Ingress Filter

-

-

Displays whether the ingress filter function is enabled.

MAC Address Selflearning

-

-

Displays whether the MAC address selflearning function of the bridge is enabled.

Table A-26 Parameters of service mounting Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB Port

-

-

Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge.

Mount Port

-

-

Displays or specifies the external port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching board that is connected to the bridge.

Port Type

-

-

Displays the network attribute of the external port/VCTRUNK connected to the bridge.

Port Enabled

Disabled

-

Displays or specifies whether the external port connected to the bridge is enabled.

Enabled TAG

-

-

This parameter is invalid in the case of Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge.

Default VLAN ID

-

-

Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Displays or specifies the working mode of the external port.

10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex GE port: 1000M Full-Duplex Activate

-

-

Displays whether the service is activated.

Service Direction

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


589



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

C-VLAN

-

-

Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID that the data frames carry. Is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is set to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN. Specifies the mapping relationship between the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames and the S-VLAN ID to be added.

S-VLAN

-

-

Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID that the data frames carry. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies that the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be added with the S-VLAN ID. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

S-VLAN Priority

-

-

Displays or specifies the S-VLAN priority.

C-VLAN Priority

-

-

Displays or specifies the C-VLAN priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


590



Table A-27 Parameters of service mounting Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Operation Type

Add S-VLAN base for port

Add S-VLAN base for port

For the meaning of each operation type, see Application of the QinQ Technology in 802.1ad Bridge Services.

Add S-VLAN base for Port and CVLAN Mount Port Mount Port and base for Port and SVLAN VB Port

-

-

Specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge.

Mount Port

-

-

Selects the external port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching board that is connected to the bridge.

Port Type

-

-

Displays the port type.

C-VLAN

1-4095

-

Is valid only when Operation Type is set to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN. Specifies the mapping relationship between the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames and the S-VLAN ID to be added.

S-VLAN

1-4095

-

l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies that the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be added with the S-VLAN ID. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


591



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

S-VLAN Priority

AUTO

AUTO

Specifies the S-VLAN priority.

Priority 0 to Priority 7 C-VLAN Priority

AUTO

AUTO

Specifies the C-VLAN priority.

Port Enabled

-

-

Displays or specifies whether the external port connected to the bridge is enabled.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Configurable Ports


VCTRUNK1


-



-


Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Uplink



-


-


Available Timeslots

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-



592



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bound Path

-

-



-

-


Activation Status

-

-


A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

Displays the board that is configured with a bridge.

VB ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the bridge.

VB Name

-

-

This parameter is a character string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this character string to a value that indicates the specific purpose of the bridge.

Bridge Type

-

-

Displays the type of the bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


593



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bridge Switch Mode

-

-

Displays the switching mode of the bridge.

Bridge Learning Mode

-

-

Displays the learning mode of the bridge.

Ingress Filter

-

-

Displays whether the filtering function is enabled at the ingress port.

MAC Address selfLearning

-

-

Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.

Active

-

-


Table A-30 Parameters for mounting services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB Port

-

-


Mount Port

-

-

Displays or specifies which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to the bridge.

Port Type

-

-

Displays the network attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

Port Enabled

-

-

Displays or specifies whether the port mounted to the bridge is enabled.

Hub/Spoke

Hub

Hub

Displays or specifies the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.

Spoke

l Hub ports can mutually access each other. l Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually access each other. l Spoke ports cannot mutually access each other. TAG

-

-

Displays or specifies the TAG attribute of the mounted port in the case of Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1d bridge or 802.1q bridge. This parameter is invalid in the case of Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


594



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Default VLAN ID

-

-

Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID of the port mounted to the bridge. This parameter is valid only when you set the tag attribute of the port to Access or Hybrid.

Working Mode

-

-

Displays or specifies the working mode of the port mounted to the bridge.

Service Direction

-

-


C-VLAN

-

-

Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frame. This parameter is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN. This parameter specifies the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be added.

S-VLAN

-

-

Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID carried by the data frame. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN to be added to the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relation between the S-VLAN tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame that enters the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.

S-VLAN Priority

-

-

Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.

C-VLAN Priority

-

-

Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


595



Table A-31 Parameters for VLAN filtering table Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

Displays the VLAN ID that needs to be filtered in forwarding.

VB Port

-

-


Forwarding Physical Port

-

-

Displays the actually specified forwarding port. l Selected forwarding ports can send packets only among themselves. l Selected forwarding ports can only forward the packet that carries the VLAN ID tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. l The broadcast packets transmitted by any of Selected forwarding ports can be forwarded only among Selected forwarding ports.

Activation Status

-

-

Displays whether the VLAN ID entry is valid.

Table A-32 Parameters for VLAN unicast Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

l This parameter is invalid for the 802.1d bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL learning mode. The entry applies to all VLANs. l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL learning mode, the entry applies to only the VLAN with the ID specified by this parameter. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


596



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MAC Address

-

-

l Displays or specifies the static MAC address. l A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It does not age automatically and needs to be deleted manually. l Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not age automatically.

VB Port

-

-


Physical Port

-

-

l Specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.

Aging Status

-

-

Displays the aging status of the entries.

Table A-33 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID(e.g. 1,3-6)

-

-

Displays or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN with the ID as specified by this parameter.

MAC Address

-

-

l Displays or specifies the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. l The data frame that contains a disabled destination MAC address is discarded. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and does not age.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK Port

-

-

Displays the VCTRUNK to bind VC paths.

Level

-

-

Displays the level of the bound VC paths.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


597



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Direction

-

-

Displays the direction of the bound VC paths.

Bound Path

-

-

Displays the bound paths.


-

-

Displays the number of bound paths.

Table A-35 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MAC Address

-

-

l Displays or specifies the self-learned MAC address. A self-learned MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. l The entries of self-learned MAC addresses are obtained when the bridge uses the SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learned MAC address ages.

VB Port

-

-


VLAN ID

-

-

l If the bridge uses the SVL learning mode, this parameter is invalid. That is, the preset self-learned MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If the bridge uses the IVL learning mode, the preset self-learned MAC address entries are valid only for the VLAN with the ID specified by this parameter. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.

Table A-36 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

Displays the VLAN ID specified for querying the self-learned MAC addresses.

Actual MAC Address Table Capacity

-

-

Displays how many MAC addresses are actually self-learned in the query condition of a specific VLAN ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


598



Table A-37 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB Port

-

-

Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge. The ID is specified for querying the self-learned MAC addresses.

Actual MAC Address Table Capacity

-

-

Displays how many MAC addresses are actually self-learned in the query condition of a specific VB port.

A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2.

Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab. NOTE

In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must be IVL.

3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB

-

-

Displays the bridge whose VLAN filtering table is to be created.

VLAN ID(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-4095

1

Specifies the VLAN IDs in the VLAN filtering table. l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l Set this parameter as required.

Available forwarding ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

Displays the ports mounted to the bridge.


599



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Selected forwarding ports

-

-

Displays the selected forwarding ports. l The selected forwarding ports can send packets only among themselves. l The selected forwarding ports can only forward the packet that carries the VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. l The broadcast packet that carries the VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) tag can be forwarded only among the selected forwarding ports.

A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table entries, which need to be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

Displays the Ethernet board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


600



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MAC Address Aging Time

l 1 to 120 Min

5 Min

l If one entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this entry is deleted automatically. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called the aging time.

l 1 to 120 Hour l 1 to 12 Day

l If you set this parameter to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive MAC address table entries that are outdated, which exhausts the resources of the MAC address forwarding table. l If you set this parameter to a very small value, the bridge may delete the MAC address table entry that is required, which reduces the forwarding efficiency. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. NOTE The maximum MAC Address Aging Time supported by EFP8 and EMS6 boards is 12 days.

A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols.

A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


601




Value Range

Default Value

Description

ERPS ID

1 to 7

-

l This parameter specifies the ID of the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) instance. l The IDs of ERPS instances on an NE must be different from each other.

East Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the east port of the ERPS instance.

West Port

-

-

This parameter specifies the west port of the ERPS instance.


Yes

No

l This parameter specifies whether the node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner.

No

l Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring. l An RPL owner needs to balance the traffic on each link of an Ethernet ring. Therefore, it is not recommended that you select a convergence node as an RPL owner. Instead, select the NE that is farthest away from the convergence node as an RPL owner.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


602



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

RPL Port

-

-

l This parameter specifies the RPL port. l There is only one RPL port and this RPL port must be the east or west port on the RPL owner node. l It is recommended that you set the east port on an RPL owner as an RPL Port.

Control VLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets. l The ID of a Control VLAN must not be the same as any VLAN ID used by Ethernet services. All ring nodes should use the same Control VLAN ID.

Destination Node

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

01-19-A7-00-00-01

01-19-A7-00-00-01


This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01. 603



A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

ERPS ID

1 to 8

-

This parameter indicates the ID of the ERPS instance.

East Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the east port of the ERPS instance.

West Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the west port of the ERPS instance.


Yes

-

This parameter indicates whether a node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner.

RPL Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the RPL port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

No


604



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control VLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.

Destination Node

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

01-19-A7-00-00-01

-


This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.

605



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Hold-Off Time(ms)

0 to 10000, in step of 100

0

l This parameter indicates or specifies the hold-off time of the ERPS hold-off timer. l The hold-off timer is used for negotiating the protection switching sequence when the ERPS coexists with other protection schemes so that the fault can be rectified in the case of other protection switching (such as LAG protection) before the ERPS occurs. When a node on the ring detects one or more new faults, it starts up the hold-off timer if the preset hold-off time is set to a value that is not 0. During the hold-off time, the fault is not reported to trigger an ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the node checks the link status regardless whether the fault that triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the fault exists, the node reports it to trigger an ERPS. This fault can be the same as or different from the fault that triggers the initial startup of the hold-off timer.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


606



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Guard Time(ms)


500

l This parameter indicates or specifies the guard time of the ERPS guard timer. l The nodes on the ring continuously forward the R-APS packets to the Ethernet ring. As a result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist on the ring network. After a node on the ring receives the outdated R-APS packets, an incorrect ERPS may occur. The ERPS guard timer is an R-APS timer used for preventing a node on the ring from receiving outdated R-APS packets. When a faulty node on the ring detects that the switching condition is cleared, the node starts up the guard timer and starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets. During this period, the R-APS packets received by the node are discarded. The received R-APS packets are forwarded only after the time of the guard timer expires.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


607



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(mm:ss)


5

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time of the WRT timer in the case of ERPS protection. l The WTR time refers to the duration from the time when the working channel is restored to the time when the switching is released. When the working channel is restored, the WTR timer of the RPL owner starts up. In addition, a signal that indicates the operation of the WTR timer is continuously output in the timing process. When the WTR timer times out and no switching request of a higher priority is received, the signal indicating the operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted. In addition, the WTR release signal is continuously output. l The WTR timer is used to prevent frequent switching caused by the unstable working channel.

Packet Transmit Interval(s)

1 to 10

5

This parameter displays or specifies the interval for sending R-APS packets periodically.

Entity Level

0 to 7

4

This parameter indicates or specifies the level of the maintenance entity.

Last Switching Request

-

-

This parameter indicates the last switching request.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


608



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

RB Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the RB (RPL Blocked) status of the packets received by the working node. l noRB: The RPL is not blocked. l RB: The RPL is blocked.

DNF Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the DNF status of the packets received by the working node. l noDNF: The R-APS packets do not contain the DNF flag. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on a non-RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is requested to clear the forwarding address table. l DNF: The R-APS packets contain the DNF flags. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on an RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is informed not to clear the forwarding address table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


609



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

State Machine Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of the state machine at the working node. l Idle: The Ethernet ring is in normal state. For example, no node on the Ethernet ring detects any faults or receives the R_APS (NR, RB) packets. l Protection: The Ethernet ring is in protected state. For example, a fault on the node triggers the ERPS, or a node on the ring is in the WTR period after the fault is rectified.

Node Carried with Current Packet

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address carried in the R-APS packets received by the current node. The MAC address refers to the MAC address of the source node that initiates the switching request.

East Port Status

-

-

Displays the status of the east port.

West Port Status

-

-

Displays the status of the west port.

A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling the spanning tree protocols.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Protocol Enabled tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


610




Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB

-

-

Displays the created bridge.

Protocol Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l Indicates whether to enable the spanning tree protocol.

Disabled

l Try to avoid Layer 2 service loopbacks in the service networking. If no loop occurs, you need not start the STP/ RSTP. l If the loop is already formed in the service networking, you must start the STP or RSTP. STP

Protocol Type

RSTP

RSTP

l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is Enabled. l The protocol type should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. The default value is recommended unless otherwise specified.

A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Bridge Parameters tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


611



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Priority

0-61440

32768

l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more likely to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges on the STP network take the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

MAC Address

-

-

Displays the MAC address of a bridge.

Max Age(s)

6-40

20

l Indicates the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU packet, and the greater the network diameter. When the value of this parameter is greater, however, the link fault detection of the bridge is slower and thus the network adaptability is reduced.

1-10

Hello Time(s)

2

l Indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. As the value of this parameter increases, however, the topology stability decreases.

4-30

Forward Delay(s)

15

l Indicates the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Therefore, the topology changes are slower and recovery in the case of faults is slower.

1-10

TxHoldCout(per second)

6

Indicates how many times the port transmits CBPDU packets in every second.

A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


612



Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Port Parameters tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Priority

0-240

128

l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority.

Port Path Cost

1-200000000

-

l Indicates the status of the network to which the port is connected. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.

Status

-

-

Displays the state of a port.

Admin Edge Attribute

Enabled

Disabled

l Is valid only when the RSTP is used.

Disabled

l Specifies whether to set the port to an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected only to the LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU and does not transmit the BPDU. l Set this parameter to Enabled only when the Ethernet port on the Ethernet board is directly connected to the data communication terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

Protocol Enabled

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l Specifies whether the STP or RSTP is enabled for the port. l When this parameter is set to Disabled, the port does not process or transmit the BPDU. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


613



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Auto Edge Detection

Enabled

Disabled

l Is valid only when Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled.

Disabled

l When this parameter is set to Enabled, if the bridge detects that this port is connected to the port of another bridge, the RSTP considers this port as a nonedge port. l When Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled, set this parameter to Enabled. In other cases, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Bridge Running Information tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB

-

-


Priority

-

-

Displays the priority of the bridge. The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge.

MAC Address

-

-

Displays the MAC address of the bridge.

Designed Root Bridge Priority

-

-

Displays the priority of the specified bridge.

Designed Root Bridge MAC Address

-

-

Displays the MAC address of the specified bridge.

Root Path Cost

-

-

Displays the root path cost. The root path cost is the path cost of the root port and is used for calculating the network topology.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


614



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Root Port

-

-

Displays the root port of the spanning tree protocol.

Max Age(s)

-

-

Displays the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port.

Hello Time(s)

-

-

Displays the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge.

Forward Delay(s)

-

-

Displays the holding time of a port in listening state and in learning state.

HoldCout

-

-

Displays the number of times that each port transmits CBPDU packets per second.

A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Port Running Information tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the logical port of the bridge.

Port ID

-

-

Displays the port ID.

Port Status

-

-

Displays the port status.

Port Path Cost

-

-

Displays the port path cost.

Designated Port D

-

-

Displays the ID of the specified port.

Designated Root Bridge Priority

-

-

Displays the priority of the specified root bridge.

Designated Root Bridge MAC Address

-

-

Displays the MAC address of the specified root bridge.

Designated Path Cost

-

-

Displays the specified path cost.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


615



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Designated Bridge Priority

-

-

Displays the priority of the specified bridge.

Designated Bridge MAC Address

-

-

Displays the MAC address of the specified bridge.

Topology Detection

-

-

Displays the enabled status of topology detection.

Edge Port Status

-

-

Displays the enabled status of the edge port.

Running Time(s)

-

-

Displays the duration when the topology remains unchanged.

A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the internal and external ports on the Ethernet board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


616



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Point-to-point Attribute

Adaptive connection

Adaptive connection

l This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used.

Link connection

l If this parameter is set to Adaptive connection, the bridge determines the actual point-to-point attribute of the port according to the actual working mode of the port. If the port works in full-duplex mode, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is True. If the port works in half-duplex mode, the actual point-topoint attribute of the port is False.

Shared media

l If you set this parameter to Link connection, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is True. l If you set this parameter to Shared media, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is False. l Only the port whose actual point to point attribute is True can transmit the fast transition request and response messages. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Enable IGMP Snooping Protocol tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


VB

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


617



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protocol Enable

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether to enable the IGMP snooping protocol.

Disabled

l If the IGMP multicast router exists on the interconnected Ethernet network, enable the IGMP snooping protocol according to the requirements of the router. The Discarded Tag of the Packet Excluded in the Multicast Group

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies the method of the port to process unknown multicast packets. When the IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge receives the multicast packets whose multicast addresses are not included in the multicast table, these packets are considered as unknown packets. l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enable is Enabled. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, unknown multicast packets are broadcast in the VLAN. l Set this parameter as required by the IGMP multicast server.

1 to 4

Max.NonResponse Times

3

If the bridge transmits an IGMP group query packet to the multicast member ports, the router port starts the timer for the query of the maximum response time. If the bridge does not receive the IGMP report packet within the maximum response time, the bridge adds one to the no-response times of the multicast member port. When the noresponse times of the port exceed the preset threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast member from the multicast group.

A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Static Multicast Table tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


618


3.


Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VB ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the created bridge.

VLAN ID

-

-

Specifies the VLAN ID of the static multicast table entry.

MAC Address

-

-

l Specifies the MAC address in the static multicast table. l Set this parameter as required.

Multicast Port

-

-

l Specifies the port as an entry in the static multicast table. l An entry in the static multicast table does not age.

A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


619



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Multicast Aging Time(Min)

1-120

8

l Specifies the aging time for multicast table entries. When a dynamic multicast table entry is not updated in a certain period (that is, no IGMP request from this multicast address is received), this entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. l If this parameter is set to a very great value, the bridge stores excessive multicast table entries that are no longer needed, which exhausts the resources of the multicast table. l If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the multicast table entry that is needed, which reduces the forwarding efficiency. l The default value is recommended.

A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

3.

Click New.

Attribute Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAG No

EFP8: 1-12

1

Specifies the LAG number.

-

Specifies the LAG name.

EMS6: 1-8 LAG Name

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


620



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LAG Type

Static

Static

l Static: A static LAG is created by the user. To add or delete a member port, you need to run the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol. In a static LAG, a port can be in selected, standby, or unselected state. By running the LACP protocol, devices exchange aggregation information so that they share the same aggregation information.

Manual

l Manual: A manual LAG is created by the user. When you add or delete a member port, you need not run the LACP protocol. In a manual LAG, a port can be in the UP or DOWN state. The system determines whether to aggregate a port according to its physical state (UP or DOWN), working mode, and rate. Load Sharing

Sharing

Sharing

Non-Sharing

l Sharing: In a sharing LAG, all member ports always share the traffic load. The sharing mode can improve bandwidth utilization on a link. When the member ports are changed or some member ports fail, the traffic load of each member port is automatically re-allocated. l Non-Sharing: In a non-sharing LAG, only one member port carries the traffic load and the other member ports are in Standby state. Actually, a non-sharing LAG works in hot-standby mode. When the active port fails, the system selects a standby port to substitute for the failed port, thus preventing a link failure.

Sharing Mode

IP Sharing Mode

IP Sharing Mode

You can set this parameter only when Load Sharing is Sharing.

Revertive

l You can set this parameter only when Load Sharing is Non-Sharing.

MAC Sharing Mode Revertive Mode

Revertive Non-Revertive

l If this parameter is set to Revertive, services are automatically switched back to the working path after the working path recovers. l If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, services are still transmitted in the protection path after the working path recovers and the LAG remains the same.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


621



Port Setting Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Main Port

-

-

l Specifies the main port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. That is, services cannot be added to a slave port. l When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is the working path and the links connected to the slave ports are protection paths.

Available Standby Ports

-

Selected Standby Ports

-

-

l Specifies the salve port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you need to perform manual operations to add or delete a slave port.

-

Displays the selected slave ports.

A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Port Priority

0-65535

32768

l This parameter is valid only when LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. l This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


622



Parameters for the system settings Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

System Priority

0-65535

32768

l This parameter is valid only when LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. l This parameter indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. l When the local LAG and the opposite LAG negotiate through LACP packets, one can obtain the system priority of the other. The LAG with the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result. Then, the aggregation information is consistent at both ends. If the local LAG and the opposite LAG have the same system priority, the MAC addresses are compared. The LAG with a lower MAC address is considered as the comparison result. Then, the aggregation information is consistent at both ends.

-

System MAC Address

-

Displays the MAC address of the system.

A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click Query.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


VCTRUNK Port

-

-

Displays the VCTRUNK used by the Ethernet service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


623



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Direction

-

-

l Displays the direction of the Ethernet service at the port. l The service direction is set to positive when the source port is a PORT and the sink port is a VCTRUNK; the service direction is set to reverse when the source port is a VCTRUNK and the sink port is a PORT.

Yes

LPT

No

Specifies whether to enable the LPT.

GFP(HUAWEI)

Ethernet

l Specifies the bearer mode of the LPT packets.

GFP-CSF

l The default value is recommended.

No Bearer Mode

GFP(HUAWEI)

PORT-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms)

0-10000

100

l When the link on which Ethernet services are transmitted is configured with other protection schemes, you need to set the hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE to notify the equipment at both ends of a transmission network of the fault on the transmission link only when the other protection schemes fail. l This parameter is valid only in the positive direction of LPT.

VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time(ms)

0-10000

100

l When the link on which Ethernet services are transmitted is configured with other protection schemes, you need to set the hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE to notify the equipment at both ends of a transmission network of the fault on the transmission link only when the other protection schemes fail. l This parameter is valid only in the reverse direction of LPT.

A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.

Navigation Path 1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

624



2.

Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.

3.

Click New.

Parameters for Convergence Points Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Specifies the port of the convergence point.

Bearer Mode

GFP(HUAWEI)

GFP(HUAWEI)

Ethernet

l This parameter can be set only when the selected port is a VCTRUNK.

GFP-CSF


Port Hold-Off Time(ms)

0-10000

0

When the link on which Ethernet services are transmitted is configured with other protection schemes, you need to set the hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE to notify the equipment at both ends of a transmission network of the fault on the transmission link only when the other protection schemes fail.

Parameters for Access Points Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Specifies the port at the access node.

Bearer Mode

GFP(HUAWEI)

GFP(HUAWEI)

Ethernet

l This parameter can be set only when the selected port is a VCTRUNK.

GFP-CSF


A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


625



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Mirror Listener Port

-

-

l After the mirroring function of the port is configured, you can monitor all the mirrored ports by analyzing the packets at the mirroring port only. As a result, you can easily manage the ports. l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port that sends the packets copied from Uplink Listened Port and Downlink Listened Port. l Mirror Listener Port cannot be set to a port that carries any service.

Mirrored Upstream Port

-

-

Mirrored Downstream Port

-

-

l Mirrored Upstream Port and Mirrored Downstream Port indicate the ports that copy packets for Mirror Listener Port. l Mirrored Upstream Port can be a PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the port copies the packets that it receives; as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the packets that it transmits. Mirror Listener Port sends the packets copied from Mirrored Upstream Port. l Mirrored Downstream Port can be a PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the port copies the packets that it transmits; as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the packets that it receives. Mirror Listener Port sends the packets copied from Mirrored Downstream Port. NOTE The transmit direction and receive direction mentioned in this section are related to the local NE.

A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoS/EoPDH plane.

A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


626



Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.

3.

Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


For example: MD1

-

Specifies the name of the MD.

Maintenance Domain Level

Consumer High(7)

Operator Low(0)

Specifies the level of the MD. The greater the value, the higher the level.

Consumer Middle(6) Consumer Low(5) Provider High(4) Provider Low(3) Operator High(2) Operator Middle(1) Operator Low(0)

A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).

Navigation Path 1.


2.

In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.

3.

Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


For example: MD1

-

Displays the MD in which an MA is to be created.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


627



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


For example: MA1

-

This parameter specifies the name of the MA, which is a service-related domain. By creating MAs, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a particular service instance.

A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

NULL

Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of the MP. NOTE An MD is not required for a common MP. For the creation of a common MP, select NULL.


-

NULL

Specifies the maintenance association (MA) of the MP. NOTE An MA is not required for a common MP. For the creation of a common MP, select NULL.

Node

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

Specifies the port where you want to create an MP.


628



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VLAN ID

-

-

l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which the service of the MP belongs. The information is contained in the OAM data packet. The MPs with the same VLAN ID in an MD can communicate with each other. l This parameter can be null in the case of PORT services, but need to be set in the case of PORT+VLAN services.

MP ID

Standard MP: 00-00-0000 to FFFF-1FFF

00-00-0000

Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest to the lowest, the first byte indicates the network number, the second byte indicates the number of the node in the local network, and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID of the MP on the network node. The MP ID must be unique in the entire network.

MEP

Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE 802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance association end point (MEP) or a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).

SDH

l Specifies the MEP direction.

Common MP: 00-00-0000 to FFFF-FF00 Type

MEP MIP

Direction

SDH IP

l Set this parameter to SDH if the OAM data initiated by the MEP travels through the Ethernet switching unit on the local NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to IP.

Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-49 Parameters for advanced attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

Consumer High(7)

Provider High(4)

Specifies the level of a common MP. The greater the value, the higher the level.

Consumer Middle (6) Consumer Low(5)

NOTE This parameter is valid only for a common MP (NULL).

Provider High(4) Provider Low(3) Operator High(2) Operator Middle(1) Operator Low(0)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


629



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CC Status

Active

Inactive

Specifies whether to enable the connectivity check (CC) function at an MP.

5000

l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB test.

Inactive LB Timeout(ms)

3000 to 60000, in step of 100

l This parameter can be set only for an MEP. LT Timeout(ms)

3000 to 60000, in step of 100

l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT test.

5000

l This parameter can be set only for an MEP. CCM Sending Period(ms)

Standard MP:

Standard MP

1000

1000

10000

Common MP:

6000

5000

600000 Common MP:

Specifies the interval for sending the CCM packet at the MP where the CC test is performed. l If this parameter takes a very small value, service bandwidth decreases significantly. l If this parameter takes a very large value, the CC test will become less capable in detecting service interruptions. The default value is recommended.

1000 to 60000, in step of 100

l This parameter can be set only for an MEP.

A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

LB Source MP ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the source maintenance point in the LB test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


630



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LB Sink MP ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the sink maintenance point in the LB test.

Test Result

-

-

Indicates the result of one LB test.

Test based on the MAC Address

Selected

Not selected

Select this parameter for an LB test based on MAC addresses.

Not selected

NOTE This parameter is valid only for a standard MP.

LB Sink MP MAC Address

-

-

Specifies the MAC address of the sink maintenance point in the LB test. This parameter is valid only in the case of Test based on the MAC Address.

A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

LT Source MP ID

-

-

Specifies the source MP in the LT test.

LT Sink MP ID

-

-

Specifies the sink MP in the LT test.

Responding MP ID

-

-

Displays the MP that responds to the test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


631



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Responding MP Type

-

-

Displays the type of the MP that responds to the test.

Hop Count

-

-

Displays the count of hops between the source MP and the responding MP. That is, the number of responding MPs from the source MP to a certain responding MP in an LT test.

Test Result

-

-

Indicates the result of one LT test.

A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.

2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description

PORT

-

-

Displays the name of the external Ethernet port.

Enable OAM Protocol

Enabled

Disabled

Specifies whether the point-to-point OAM protocol is enabled.

Disabled

After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to set up an OAM connection with the opposite end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


632



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

OAM Working Mode

Active

Active

The negotiation mode of Ethernet port OAM includes active and passive modes.

Passive

If this parameter is set to Active, the port can initiate an OAM connection. If this parameter is set to Passive, the port can only respond to the OAM connection requests from the opposite end. Remote Alarm Support for Link Event

Enabled

Max OAM Packet Length(byte)

-

Enabled

Specifies whether the detected link event is notified to the opposite end (for example, error frame periods, error frames, and error frame seconds).

-

Displays the maximum length of the OAM packets.

Disabled

This parameter takes the same value as the Maximum Frame Length of the external port. -

Loopback Status

-

Displays the loopback status.

A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


633




Value Range

Default Value

Description

PORT

For example: PORT1

-

Displays the name of the external Ethernet port.

Error Frame Monitor Window (ms)

1000 to 60000, in step of 100

1000

In the specified Error Frame Monitor Window (ms), if the number of error frames exceeds the specified Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Entries) due to the link degradation, the link event alarm is reported.

Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frames)

1 to 4294967295, in step of 1

2

Specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames.

Error Frame Period Window (frames)

1488 to 89280000, in step of 1

GE port: 1488000

Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window (frames), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold (frames), an alarm is reported.

Error Frame Period Threshold (frames)

1 to 89280000, in step of 1

2

Specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period.

Error Frame Second Window(s)


60

If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an error frame second.

FE port: 148800

Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold (s), an alarm is reported. Error Frame Second Threshold (s)


2

Specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds.

A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet port.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Remote OAM parameter tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


634



Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-54 Parameters on the main interface Field

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the name of the remote Ethernet port.

Remote OAM Working Mode

-

-

Displays the working mode of the remote Ethernet port.

Remote Alarm Support for Link Event

-

-

Displays whether the remote Ethernet port can notify link events to the local port.

Remote Side Loopback Response

-

-

Displays how the remote Ethernet port responds to a loopback.

Unidirectional Operation

-

-

Displays whether the remote Ethernet port supports unidirectional operations.

Max.OAM Packet Length (byte)

-

-

Displays the maximum OAM packet size supported by the remote Ethernet port.

A.7.4 QoS Parameters This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoS/EoPDH plane.

A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Flow Configuration tab.

3.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


635




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Flow Type

Port Flow

Port Flow

l Port flow: The packets from a certain port are classified as a type of flow. The Ethernet service associated with this flow type is the line service or Layer 2 switching service that uses this port as the service source.

Port+VLAN Flow Port+SVLAN Flow Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow Port+VLAN +Priority Flow

l Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on VLAN) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1q bridge) that uses this PORT +VLAN as the service source. l Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified SVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT +SVLAN as the service source. l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packets that are received from or transmitted to a certain port and have a specified CVLAN+SVLAN are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT +CVLAN+SVLAN as the service source. l Port+VLAN+Priority flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID and a specified VLAN priority are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this Port+VLAN+Priority as the service source. NOTE An EMS6 board does not support Port+VLAN +Priority Flow.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


636



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

EFP8: PORT1 to PORT9, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16

PORT1

l When the associated service is the line service, set this parameter to the source port or sink port of the associated Ethernet service.

EMS6: PORT1 to PORT7, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 1 to 4095

VLAN ID

l When the associated service is the Layer 2 switching service, set this parameter to a mounted port of the bridge. 1

l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow or Port +VLAN+Priority Flow. l Set this parameter to the source VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.

C-VLAN

1 to 4095

1

l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow. l Set this parameter to the source CVLAN of the associated Ethernet service.

1 to 4095

S-VLAN

1

l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow. l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.

Priority

-

-

l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is PORT+VLAN+Priority Flow. l This parameter indicates the VLAN priority of the flow-associated Ethernet services. NOTE An EMS6 board does not support Priority.

A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the CAR Configuration.

3.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


637




Value Range

Default Value

Description

CAR ID

EFP8: 1 to 512

1

This parameter identifies a CAR operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CAR operation.

Disabled

Indicates whether to enable the CAR operation performed on the flow bound to the CAR.

0

l Indicates the CIR. When the rate of a packet is not more than the CIR, this packet passes the restriction of the CAR and is forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.

EMS6: 1 to 1024 Enabled/Disabled

Enabled Disabled

Committed information Rate (kbit/s)

EFP8: 0 to 100032, in steps of 64 EMS6 (FE ports): 0 to 102400, in steps of 64

l The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR.

EMS6 (GE ports): 0 to 1024000, in steps of 64 Committed Burst Size (kbyte)

EFP8: 0 to 1024

Peak information Rate (kbit/s)

EFP8: 0 to 100032, in steps of 64

0

Indicates the CBS. When the rate of a packet that passes the restriction of the CAR is not more than the CIR in a certain period, some packets can burst. These packets can be forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the CBS is determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR, the greater the CBS.

0

l Indicates the PIR. When the rate of a packet is more than the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate restriction is directly discarded. When the rate of packets is more than the CIR but is lower than or equal to the PIR, these packets whose rate exceeds the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow.

EMS6: 0 to 16384

EMS6 (FE ports): 0 to 102400, in steps of 64 EMS6 (GE ports): 0 to 1024000, in steps of 64

l The value of this parameter should not be more than the port bandwidth.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


638



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maximum Burst Size (kbyte)

EFP8: 0 to 1024

0

Indicates the MBS. When the rate of the packet that passes the restriction of the CAR is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, some packets can burst and are marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the MBS. Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the MBS is determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR, the greater the MBS.

EMS6: 0 to 16384

A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

2.


3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS ID

EFP8: 1-64

1

This parameter identifies a CoS operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CoS operation.

EMS6: 1-65535

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


639



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS Type

simple

simple

l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.

VLAN Priority IPTOS

l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN priority, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the user priorities specified in the VLAN tags of these packets.

DSCP

l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to differentiated services code point (DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets. l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IP TOS, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the TOS values carried in the IPv4 packets. This CoS type is applicable to IPv4 packets. CoS parameter

-

-

Displays the CoS parameters corresponding to different CoS types.

CoS Priority

0-7

-

This parameter determines to which egress queue a packet is schedule. l Each Ethernet port on the EFP8/EMS6 board supports eight egress port queues. Queues 1-8 respectively correspond to the CoS priorities from 0 to 7. l Queue 8, with the CoS priority of 7, is as SP queue. Queues 1-7, with the CoS priorities from 0 to 6, are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). On the EFP8 board, the weighted proportion of these WRR queues cannot be changed. On the EMS6 board, the weighted proportion of these WRR queues can be changed. l If the traffic shaping feature of some queues is enabled, bandwidth is allocated first to the queues whose traffic shaping feature is enabled based on the CIR. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the eight queues by using the SP+WRR algorithm.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


640



A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Flow Configuration tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Flow Type

-

-

Displays the type of a flow.

VB ID

-

-


Port

-

-

Displays the port where a flow is to be created.

C-VLAN

-

-

l Displays the C-VLAN. l This parameter is valid is Flow Type is Port+VLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow, or Port+VLAN +Priority Flow.

S-VLAN

-

-

l Displays the S-VLAN. l This parameter is valid when Flow Type is Port+SVLAN Flow or Port +CVLAN+SVLAN Flow.

Priority

-

-

l Displays the priority of the flow. l This parameter is valid when Flow Type is Port+VLAN+Priority Flow.

Bound CAR

-

None

This parameter indicates the CAR ID corresponding to a CAR operation. Different CAR IDs should be bound to different flows, even though the parameters of the CAR operations are the same.

Bound CoS

-

None

Indicates the CoS ID that corresponds to a CoS operation.

A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


641



Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Queue Information tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Port Queue

-

-

Displays the queue name.

Status

Enabled

Disabled

Indicates whether to enable the traffic shaping feature of an egress queue.

0

l When the rate of a packet is not more than the CIR, this packet directly enters the egress queue.

Disabled CIR (kbit/s)

EFP8: 0 to 100032, in steps of 64 EMS6 (FE ports): 0 to 102400, in steps of 64

l The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR.

EMS6 (GE ports): 0 to 1024000, in steps of 64 DCBS (kbyte)

-

0

Displays the excess burst size.

PIR (kbit/s)

EFP8: 0 to 100032, in steps of 64

0

l When the rate of a packet is more than the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate restriction is directly discarded. When the rate of packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the restriction of the CIR enter the buffer of the CIR. When the buffer overflows, the packets are marked yellow and enter the egress queue, which enables the packets to be discarded first in the case of queue congestion.

EMS6 (FE ports): 0 to 102400, in steps of 64 EMS6 (GE ports): 0 to 1024000, in steps of 64

l The value of this parameter should not be more than the port bandwidth. DMBS (kbyte)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

0

Displays the maximum excess burst size.


642



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Scheduling Mode

SP

Queue 1: WRR

WRR

Queue 2: WRR

By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their weights are in the proportion of 1:2:8:16:32:64.

Queue 3: WRR Queue 4: WRR Queue 5: WRR Queue 6: WRR Queue 7: WRR Queue 8: SP

The scheduling principles of the SP+WRR are as follows: l A port immediately transmits the packets in the SP queue and can transmit the packets in the WRR queue only when no packets exist in the SP queue. l If multiple SP queues exist on a port, the port compares the SP queues according to their priorities (queue 8 has the highest priority and queue 1 has the lowest priority). l According to the fixed weight value, you can allocate the time slice to each WRR queue. Then, the port transmits the packets in the corresponding WRR queue in each time slice. If a WRR queue in a time slice does not contain any packets, the WRR queue removes this time slice and then transmits the packets in the corresponding WRR queue in the next time slice.

Weight

An integer ranging from 1 to 64

Queue 1: 1 Queue 2: 2 Queue 3: 4 Queue 4: 8

By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their weights are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64.

Queue 5: 16 Queue 6: 32 Queue 7: 64 Queue 8: -

A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping This section describes the parameters associated with egress port shaping management.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Shaping tab. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


643




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Status

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter specifies whether to enable the traffic shaping at a port.

0

In the case of an EMS6 board, the PIR of a port meets the following constraints:

Disabled PIR (kbit/s)

EMS6 (FE ports): 0 to 102400, in steps of 64

l The PIR of the port is equal to or more than the PIR of any queue at this port.

EMS6 (GE ports): 0 to 1024000, in steps of 64

l The PIR of the port is equal to or more than the sum of the CIRs of all the queues at this port.

A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoS/EoPDH plane.

A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Select External Port.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-61 Parameters for the basic attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the name of the external port.

Name

-

-

Displays or specifies the name of the external port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


644



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

l If the port gains access to services, set this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.

Disabled

l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the port that does not access services, an ETH_LOS alarm may be generated. This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8 board. This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6 board. Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

EFP8: l AutoNegotiation

l Different types of Ethernet ports support different working modes. l If the opposite port works in autonegotiation mode, set this parameter to Auto-Negotiation.

l 10M HalfDuplex

l If the opposite port works in full-duplex mode, set this parameter to 10M FullDuplex or 100M Full-Duplex, depending on the rate of the opposite port.

l 10M FullDuplex l 100M HalfDuplex l 100M FullDuplex

l If the opposite port works in half-duplex mode, set this parameter to 10M HalfDuplex or 100M Half-Duplex, depending on the rate of the opposite port, or set this parameter to AutoNegotiation.

EMS6: l AutoNegotiation l 10M HalfDuplex

l GE optical ports on an EMS6 board support only Auto-Negotiation and 1000M Full-Duplex modes.

l 10M FullDuplex l 100M HalfDuplex

NOTE This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8 board.

l 100M FullDuplex

This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6 board.

l 1000M FullDuplex Maximum Frame Length

EFP8: 1518 to 2000 EMS6: 1518 to 9600

1522

l Set this parameter to a value greater than the maximum length of all the data frames to be transmitted. l The default value is recommended if the jumbo frame is not considered and the data frames contain only one layer of VLAN tags or even no tags. The value of 1526 or greater is recommended if the data frames contain two layers of tags, such as QinQ.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


645



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Physical Parameters

-

-

Displays the actual working status of a PORT. This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8 board. This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6 board.

MAC Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

Loopback

l A MAC loopback is to loop back the Ethernet frames transmitted to the opposite port. l Use the default value unless otherwise specified.

PHY Loopback

Non-Loopback

Non-Loopback

Loopback

l A PHY loopback is to loop back the Ethernet physical signals transmitted to the opposite port. l Use the default value unless otherwise specified. This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8 board. This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6 board.

Table A-62 Parameters for flow control Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation.

Enable Symmetric Flow Control Mode Send Only Receive Only

l If this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control Mode, the port can send PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames. l If this parameter is set to Send Only, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. l If this parameter is set to Receive Only, the port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion. l Set this parameter to the same as the nonautonegotiation flow control mode of the opposite port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


646



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is Auto-Negotiation.

Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control

l If this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Control, the port can send PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable Symmetric Control

l If this parameter is set to Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control

l If this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can function as follows: – Sends and processes PAUSE frames. – Sends but does not process PAUSE frames. – Processes but does not send PAUSE frames. l Set this parameter according to the autonegotiation flow control mode of the opposite port. This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8 board. This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6 board.

Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


647



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TAG

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l With different tag attributes, the port processes frames in different modes. For details, see Table A-66.

Access Hybrid

l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the port processes the frames with VLAN tags (or tagged frames). l Set this parameter to Access if the port processes the frames without VLAN tags (or untagged frames). l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port processes the tagged frames and untagged frames.

Default VLAN ID

1-4095

1

l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, see Table A-66. l Set this parameter as required.

VLAN Priority

0-7

0

l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, see Table A-66. l When the VLAN priority is required for traffic classification or other purposes, set this parameter as required. Use the default value unless otherwise specified.

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l Indicates whether to check the incoming packets according to the tag attribute. l Set this parameter as required.

Table A-64 Parameters for the network attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


648



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Attributes

UNI

UNI

l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attribute.

C-Aware S-Aware

l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data frames by using the processing method of QinQ services. l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ services. Otherwise, this parameter takes the default value.

Table A-65 Parameters for the advanced attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Broadcast Packet Suppression

Disabled

Disabled

This parameter specifies whether to restrict the traffic of broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets to the total packets. Set this parameter to Enabled when a broadcast storm may occur at the opposite port.

Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

10%-100%

30%

When the proportion of the received broadcast packets to the total packets crosses the threshold, the port discards the received broadcast packets. Set this parameter to a value greater than the proportion when no broadcast storm occurs. The value of 30% or greater is recommended.

Traffic Threshold (Mbit/s)

EFP8:

-

Specifies the traffic threshold of the port. You can specify the traffic monitoring period by setting Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min).

Enabled

l 0 to 100 (PORT1 to PORT8) l 0 to 1000 (PORT9) EMS6: l 0 to 1000 (PORT1 and PORT2) l 0 to 100 (PORT3 to PORT6) l 0 to 1000 (PORT7)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


649



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min)

0-30

0

Specifies the traffic monitoring period. l If Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min) is set to 0, an associated alarm is reported at the moment when the traffic received at the port crosses the value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s). l If the Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min) is set to a value other than 0, an associated alarm is reported only when the traffic received at the port always crosses the value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s) in the monitoring period.

Loop Detection

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled


Table A-66 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction

Ingress port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Type of Data Frame

Processing Method Tag aware

Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame

Receives the frame.

Discards the frame.

Receives the frame.

Untagged frame

Discards the frame.

The port receives the frame after adding to the frame the VLAN tag that contains Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority.



650


Direction

Egress port


Type of Data Frame


Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame

Transmits the frame.



A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2.

Select Internal Port.

Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-67 Parameters for the tag attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the name of the internal port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


651



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TAG

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l With different tag attributes, the port processes frames in different modes. For details, see Table A-72.

Access Hybrid

l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the port processes the frames with VLAN tags (or tagged frames). l Set this parameter to Access if the port processes the frames without VLAN tags (or untagged frames). l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port processes the tagged frames and untagged frames.

Default VLAN ID

1-4095

1

l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, see Table A-72. l Set this parameter as required.

VLAN Priority

0-7

0

l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, refer to Table A-72. l When the VLAN priority is required for traffic classification or other purposes, set this parameter as required. The default value is recommended unless otherwise specified.

Entry Detection

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l Indicates whether to check the incoming packets according to the tag attribute. l Set this parameter as required.

Table A-68 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Mapping Protocol

GFP

GFP

The default value is recommended.

HDLC

The EFP8 board supports GFP only.

LAPS Scramble

Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Unscrambled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Scrambling Mode [X43+1]

l Indicates the scrambling polynomial used by the mapping protocol. l The default value is recommended.


652



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Set Inverse Value for CRC

-

-

l This parameter indicates whether the value of the CRC field defined in the LAPS or HDLC encapsulation frame format will be reversed. This means that this parameter takes effect only if Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or HDLC. l Set Set Inverse Value for CRC to the same value for the VCTRUNKs at both ends.

Check Field Length

FCS32

FCS32

No

l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP mapping protocol, set this parameter to FCS32 or No. l When you set this parameter to FCS32, a 32-bit FCS is used. l The default value is recommended.

FCS Calculated Bit Sequence

Big endian

Big endian

Little endian

l When you set this parameter to Big endian, the least significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the most significant byte is placed last. l When you set this parameter to Little endian, the most significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the least significant byte is placed last. l The default value is recommended.

Table A-69 Parameters for the network attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Port Attributes

UNI

UNI

l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attribute.

C-Aware S-Aware

l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data frames by using the processing method of QinQ services. l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ services. Otherwise, this parameter takes the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


653



Table A-70 Parameters for the LCAS Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-


Enabling LCAS

Disabled

Disabled

l Indicates whether to enable the LCAS function.

Enabled

l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth needs of the applications. As a result, the bandwidth utilization is improved. LCAS Mode

Huawei Mode

Huawei Mode

Standard Mode

l Indicates the sequence in which the LCAS sink sends the MST control packet and Rs-Ack control packet. l When you set this parameter to Huawei Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST. l When you set this parameter to Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the MST and then sends the RsAck. l If the equipment at the opposite end is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode, set this parameter to Standard Mode. Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei Mode.

Hold Off Time(ms)

An integer ranging from 0, 2000 to 10000, in the increments of 100

2000

l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS performs switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and performs an LCAS switching. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l The default value is recommended.

WTR Time(s)

0-720

300

l When the time after a member link is restored to normal reaches the specified value of this parameter, the VCG uses the restored member link. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


654



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

TSD

Disabled

Disabled

l Indicates whether the TSD is used as a condition for determining whether a member link is faulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD. In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers to the B3_SD_VC3.

Enabled

l The default value is recommended. Min. MembersTransmit Direction

2-256

16

l Specifies the minimum number of members in the transmit direction. After the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported when the number of effective members in the transmit direction becomes lower than the minimum number specified by this parameter. l The default value is recommended.

Mini. MembersReceive Direction

2-256

16

l Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. After the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported when the number of effective members in the receive direction becomes lower than the minimum number specified by this parameter. l The default value is recommended.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Configurable Ports


VCTRUNK1


-



-


Bidirectional Uplink Downlink

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Bidirectional

l Specifies the direction of the bound path. l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.


655



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Available Resources

-

-


Available Timeslots

-

-


Bound Path

-

-



-

-


Activation Status

-

-


Table A-72 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction

Ingress port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Type of Data Frame


Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame

Receives the frame.

Discards the frame.

Receives the frame.

Untagged frame

Discards the frame.




656


Direction

Egress port


Type of Data Frame


Access

Hybrid

Tagged frame

Transmits the frame.



A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Board

-

-

Displays the Ethernet board on which the type field of QinQ frames needs to be set. If the Ethernet board is the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of EFP8. If the Ethernet board is the EMS6 board, this parameter always takes the value of EMS6.

QinQ Type Area (Hexadecimal)

81 00

8100

88 A8 91 00

Specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed QinQ frames.

0600 to FFFF

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


657



A.8 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Statistics Group tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-

This parameter specifies the object to be monitored.

Sampling Period

5 to 150

5

This parameter specifies the duration of the monitoring period.

Display Accumulated Value

Selected

Deselected

l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events.

Deselected

l If this parameter is not selected, the displayed value is an increment compared to the value that is collected in last sampling period and stored in the register. l If this parameter is selected, the displayed value is an absolute value that is currently stored in the register.

Display Mode

Graphics

List

List

l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same.

Legend

Color Description

-

l This parameter indicates the description of different colors. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


658



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Event

-

-

l This parameter indicates the queried performance events. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.

A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the History Group tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-

The parameter indicates the object to be monitored.

Ended from/to

-

-

This parameter specifies the start time and end time of the monitoring period.

History Table Type

30-Second

30-Second

This parameter specifies the monitoring period.

List

l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events.

30-Minute Custom Period 1 Custom Period 2

Display Mode

Graphics List

l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same. Legend

Color

-

Description

l This parameter indicates the description of different colors. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.

Event

-

-

l This parameter indicates the queried performance events. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


659



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Statistical Item

-

-

This parameter indicates the performance items to be monitored.

Statistical Value

-

-

This parameter indicates the statistical value of the monitored performance items.

Time Flag

-

-

This parameter indicates the time point of each performance event.

A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

30-Second

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function.

Enabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function.

Disabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 1.

Disabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 2.

300 to 43200 (Custom Period 1)

900(Custom Period 1)

300 to 86400 (Custom Period 2)

86400(Custom Period 2)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the monitoring period in Custom Period 1 and Custom Period 2.

History Register Count

1 to 50

16

RMON Monitor Start Time

-

Disabled 30-Minute

Enabled Disabled

Custom Period 1

Enabled Disabled

Custom Period 2

Enabled Disabled

Period Length(s)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

6(Custom Period 2) -

l The value must be an integer multiple of 30. This parameter indicates or specifies the quantity of the history registers. This parameter specifies the RMON start time.


660



A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.

Navigation Path l


l

Click the RMON Setting tab.

Object Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Object

-

-

This parameter indicates the object to be collected.

30-Second

Enabled

-

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function.

Disabled

NOTE In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.

30-Minute

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.

Custom Period 1

Enabled

-

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.

Custom Period 2

Enabled Disabled

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


661



Event Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Event

-

-

This parameter indicates the performance event to be monitored.

30-Second

Enabled

Disabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on 30-Second.

-

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function.

Disabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1Custom Period 1 Monitor.

Disabled

This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2Custom Period 2 Monitor.

Report All

l This parameter indicates or specifies the threshold detection method.

Disabled 30-Minute

Enabled Disabled

Custom Period 1

Enabled Disabled

Custom Period 2

Enabled Disabled

Threshold Detect

Report All Do Not Detect

l If the number of detected events reaches the preset threshold, the events are reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the events are not reported to the NMS.

Report Only the Upper Threshold Report Only the Lower Threshold

l If an event does not support this parameter, Not Supported is displayed.

Upper Threshold

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the upper threshold. If the number of performance events exceeds the preset upper threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported.

Lower Threshold

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the lower threshold. If the number of performance events is less than the preset lower threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported.

Threshold Unit

-

-

This parameter indicates the unit of each threshold of the performance events.

A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


662



NOTE

For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane.

A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.

A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

LSR ID

-

0.0.0.0

l Specifies or displays the LSR ID of an NE. On a PSN, each NE is assigned a unique LSR ID. l This parameter must be set in IPv4 address format.

Start of Global Label Space

0-1015808

0

l Specifies the start value of a global label space. The OptiX RTN 950 supports a step of 2048. l The start value of a global label space is the smallest unicast tunnel label. When Start of Global Label Space is 0, the smallest unicast tunnel label is 16, with values 0 to 15 reserved. l On an MPLS-enabled network, global label spaces of NEs are recommended to overlap each other if possible.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


663



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Global Label Space Size

-

-

Displays the size of a global label space.

Start of Multicast Label Space

-

-


A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Static Tunnel tab.

3.

Click Query.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

-

-

Displays the tunnel ID.

Name

-

-

Specifies or displays the customized tunnel name.

Enable State

Enabled

Enabled

l Specifies or displays whether a tunnel is enabled.

Disabled

NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Enabled.

Node Type

-

-

l Displays the node type. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter displays the node types of forward tunnels.

Direction

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Displays the direction of a tunnel.

664



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CIR(kbit/s)

No Limit

-

l Specifies or displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel.

1024-1024000

l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. PIR(kbit/s)

-

-


CBS(byte)

-

-


PBS(byte)

-

-


Bandwidth Remaining (kbit/s)

-

-


In Port

-

-

Displays the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.

Forward In Label

-

-

Displays the MPLS label that a forward tunnel carries when entering a node.

Reverse Out Label

-

-

Specifies the MPLS label that a reverse tunnel carries when entering a tunnel.

Out Port

-

-

Displays the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.

Forward Out Label

-

-

Displays the MPLS label that a forward tunnel carries when leaving a node.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


665



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Reverse In Label

-

-

Displays the MPLS label that a reverse tunnel carries when leaving a node.

Forward Next Hop Address

-

-

Displays the IP address of the next-hop port of a forward tunnel.

Reverse Next Hop Address

-

-

Displays the IP address of the next-hop port of a reverse tunnel.

Source Node

-

-

Displays the LSR ID of the ingress node.

Sink Node

-

-

Displays the LSR ID of the egress node.

Tunnel Type

-

-

Displays the tunnel type.

EXP

0-7

-

l Specifies or displays the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels.

None

l For unidirectional tunnels, this parameter is available only if Node Type is Ingress. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field varies based on the DiffServ mappings.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


666



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

LSP Mode

Pipe

-

l Displays or specifies the LSP mode. l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter is available only if Node Type is Egress. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. NOTE On the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter can be set to Pipe only.

MTU(byte)

-

-


Protection Group

-

-

Displays the MPLS APS protection group to which a tunnel belongs.

VLAN ID

-

-

l Specifies or displays the VLAN ID that Ethernet packets carry when transmitted over MPLS tunnels. l If packets need to traverse a Layer 2 network, set the VLAN ID for the tunnel carried by the NNI port according to the VLAN planning requirements on the Layer 2 network. l Set this parameter to the same value for both ends of a tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


667



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS

CS7

-

l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.

CS6 EF AF4 AF3

l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission.

AF2 AF1 BE

l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing. Deployment

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the tunnel.

A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


668


3.


Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list. The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select New Reverse Tunnel.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel ID

1-65535

-

l Specifies the tunnel ID. l The total number of tunnels and PWs must be equal to or less than 1024. The number of tunnels that carry PWs is not included in the total. NOTE If you select New Reverse Tunnel, set forward tunnel IDs and reverse tunnel IDs respectively.

Tunnel Name

-

-

Specifies the tunnel name.

Node Type

Ingress

Ingress

Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.

Egress Transit Direction

-

-

Indicates the direction of a tunnel.

CIR(kbit/s)

No Limit

No Limit

l Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel.

1024-1024000

l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the tunnel bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. CBS(kbit/s)

-

-


PIR(Byte)

-

-


PBS(Byte)

-

-


In Board/Logic Interface Type

-

-

Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or egress node.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


669



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

In Port

-

-

NOTE l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port, ensure that: l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP Address, andIP Address parameters of the MPLS port are set to the values specified in the network plan according to Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports. l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port, ensure that: l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting the General Attributes of IF_ETH Ports. l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP Address, and IP Address parameters of the MPLS port are set to the values specified in the network plan according to Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.

In Label

16-1048575

-

Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or egress node.

Out Board/Logic Interface Type

-

-

Out Port

-

-

Specifies the MPLS port at the egress direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or transit node.

Out Label

16-1048575

-

Specifies the MPLS label at the egress direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or transit node.

Next Hop Address

-

-

l The Next Hop Address parameter needs to be set only for the egress port on an ingress or transit node.

NOTE The method and prerequisites for setting parameters of the MPLS port at the egress direction of a forward tunnel are the same as those on the ingress direction.

l Set the IP address of the MPLS ingress port on the next hop LSR node to Next Hop Address according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


670



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Node

-

-

l The Source Node parameter needs to be set only on an egress or transit node. l Set the LSR ID for the last hop MPLS node to Source Node according to the network plan.

Sink Node

-

-

l The Sink Node parameter needs to be set only on an ingress or transit node. l Set the LSR ID for the next hop MPLS node to Sink Node according to the network plan.

Tunnel Type

E-LSP

E-LSP

L-LSP

l Specifies the tunnel type. l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP field is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight packet scheduling priorities. l The value L-LSP indicates that the MPLS label value is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the same packet scheduling priority.

EXP

0-7

None

None

l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l This parameter is available only if Node Type is Ingress. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field is set based on the DiffServ mappings.

LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l This parameter is available only if Node Type is Egress. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Pipe.

MTU

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-



671



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS

CS7

BE

l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an L-LSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.

CS6 EF


AF4 AF3 AF2

l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services.

AF1 BE

l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.

A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel ID

1 to 65535

-

l Specifies the tunnel ID. l The total number of tunnels and PWs must be equal to or less than 1024. The number of tunnels that carry PWs is not included in the total.

Tunnel Name

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-

Specifies the tunnel name.


672



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Node Type

Ingress

Ingress

Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.

Egress Transit Direction

-

-

Indicates the direction of a tunnel.

CIR(kbit/s)

No Limit

No Limit

l Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel.

1024-1024000

l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. CBS(kbit/s)

-

-


PIR(Byte)

-

-


PBS(Byte)

-

-


In Board/Logic Interface Type

-

-

In Port

-

-

Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or egress node. NOTE l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port, ensure that: l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP Address, and IP Address parameters of the MPLS port are set to the values specified in the network plan according to Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports. l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port, ensure that: l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting the General Attributes of IF_ETH Ports. l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP Address, and IP Address parameters of the MPLS port are set to the values specified in the network plan according to Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


673



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Forward In Label

16 to 1048575

-

Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or egress node.

Reverse Out Label

16 to 1048575

-

l Specifies the MPLS label at the egress direction of a reverse tunnel on a transit or egress node. l Reverse Out Label and Forward In Label can be set to either the same value or different values.

Out Board/Logic Interface Type

-

-

Specifies the MPLS port at the egress direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or transit node.

Out Port

-

-

Forward Out Label

16 to 1048575

-

Specifies the MPLS label at the egress direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or transit node.

Reverse In Label

16 to 1048575

-

l Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress direction of a reverse tunnel on an ingress or transit node.

NOTE The method and prerequisites for setting parameters of the MPLS port at the egress direction of a forward tunnel are the same as those on the ingress direction.

l The Reverse In Label and Forward Out Label parameters can be set to either the same value or different values. Forward Next Hop Address

-

-

l The Forward Next Hop Address parameter needs to be set only for the egress port on an ingress or transit node. l Set the IP address of the MPLS ingress port on the next hop LSR node to Forward Next Hop Address according to the network plan.

Reverse Next Hop Address

-

-

l The Reverse Next Hop Address parameter needs to be set only for the ingress port on a transit or egress node. l Set the IP address of the MPLS ingress port on the next hop LSR node to Reverse Next Hop Address according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


674



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source Node

-

-

l The Source Node parameter needs to be set only on an egress or transit node. l Set the LSR ID for the last hop MPLS node to Source Node according to the network plan.

Sink Node

-

-

l The Sink Node parameter needs to be set only on an ingress or transit node. l Set the LSR ID for the next hop MPLS node to Sink Node according to the network plan.

Tunnel Type

E-LSP

E-LSP

L-LSP

l Specifies the tunnel type. l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP field is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An ELSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight packet scheduling priorities. l The value L-LSP indicates that the MPLS label value is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the same packet scheduling priority.

EXP

0 to 7

None

None

l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l This parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field is set based on the DiffServ mappings.

LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l This parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Pipe.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


675



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

MTU

-

-


CoS

CS7

BE

l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an L-LSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.

CS6 EF


AF4 AF3 AF2

l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services.

AF1 BE

l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.

A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.

Navigation Path 1.


2.



Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel ID

-

-

Displays the tunnel ID.

Tunnel Name

-

-

Displays the tunnel name.

Node Type

-

-

l Displays the node type. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter displays the node types of forward tunnels.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


676



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel Direction

-

-


OAM Status

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies or displays whether the local node can perform and respond to OAM operations.

Disabled

l If OAM Status is Enabled, the local NE can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Disabled, the local NE cannot perform and respond to OAM operations. l If MPLS APS protection needs to be configured or a CC test needs to be performed for the tunnel, OAM Status needs to be set to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


677



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Detection Mode

Auto-Sensing

Auto-Sensing

l Specifies or displays the MPLS OAM detection mode.

Manual

l Manual: During a CC test, MPLS OAM packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: During a CC test, MPLS OAM packets are sent at the interval for receiving MPLS OAM packets. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the MPLS OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l Generally, the value Auto-Sensing is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


678



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CV

CV


FFD

l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l For the egress node of a unidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the type of MPLS OAM detection packets to be received. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to AutoSensing, this parameter specifies the type of MPLS OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the types of MPLS OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for MPLS APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on MPLS tunnels.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


679



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Detection Packet Period (ms)

3.3

50

l Displays or specifies the OAM detection period.

10 20

l This parameter is available only when Detection Packet Type is FFD. It takes its fixed value of 1000 ms when Detection Packet Type is CV.

50 100 200 500

l Set this parameter to 3.3 for MPLS APS usually. If the packet transmission delay time of an MPLS tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms, the transmission interval of FFD packets needs to be a value greater than the delay time. Reverse Tunnel

-

-

l Specifies the mapping reverse tunnel of a forward tunnel. l For a bidirectional tunnel, this parameter cannot be set.

CV/FFD Status

-

-

Displays whether CV/ FFD is enabled.

LSP Status

-

-

Displays whether an LSP is available.

LSP Defect Type

-

-

Displays the LSP defect type.

Disable LSP Duration (ms)

-

-

Displays the duration when an LSP is unavailable.

LSP Defect Location

-

-

Displays the LSR ID of a node where LSP defects are detected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


680



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

SD Threshold

0-100

0

l Specifies or displays the SD threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l When this parameter is set to 0, SD threshold detection is not supported.

0-100

SF Threshold

0

l Specifies or displays the SF threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l When this parameter is set to 0, SF threshold detection is not supported. l The SD threshold is not higher than the SF threshold.

Source Node

-

-

Displays the source node of a tunnel.

Sink Node

-

-

Displays the sink node of a tunnel.

A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI This topic describes FDI parameters.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


681



Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the FDI tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enable FDI

Selected

Selected

l Specifies or displays whether Enable FDI is selected.

Not selected

l If the FDI function is enabled for a transit node, the transit node inserts an FDI packet to all LSPs that travel through the transit node when a fault occurs on the link between the ingress and transit nodes. On reception of the FDI packet, the egress node reports an alarm. In this case, if MPLS APS is configured correctly, protection switching is triggered before the egress node detects an LSP defect within a detection period. l Generally, the default parameter value is recommended.

A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the OAM Parameters tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


682


3.


Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Ping Test from the drop-down list.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Count

1 to 4294967295

3

Specifies the number of test request packets.

EXP Value

0 to 7

7

l Specifies the EXP value of the MPLS label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.

TTL

1 to 255

255

l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the MPLS label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Transmit Interval (10ms)

1 to 1000

100

l Specifies the interval for transmitting test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Packet Length

64 to 1400

64

l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)

1 to 6000

300

l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


683



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Response Mode

IPv4 UDP Response

IPv4 UDP Response

l Specifies the response mode of test request packets.

No Response Application Control Channel

l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP Response indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP Response is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the egress node. If the egress node supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel. If the egress node does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


684


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description NOTE For a unidirectional tunnel, Response Mode cannot be set to Application Control Channel.

A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the OAM Parameters tab.

3.

Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP Value

0 to 7

7

l Specifies the EXP value of the MPLS label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.

TTL

1 to 255

255

l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the MPLS label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Packet Length

84 to 1400

84


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


685



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 6000

300


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


686



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Response Mode

IPv4 UDP Response

IPv4 UDP Response


No Response Application Control Channel

l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP Response indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP Response is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the egress node. If the egress node supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel. If the egress node does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


687


Parameter


Value Range

Default Value

Description NOTE For a unidirectional tunnel, Response Mode cannot be set to Application Control Channel.

A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the PW Management tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the PW that carries a service.

Enable State

-

-

Displays whether a PW is enabled.

PW Signaling Type

-

-

Displays the PW signaling type.

PW Type

-

NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses only static PWs.

-

l Displays the PW type. Different PW types perform different service processing modes. l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW Type to CESoPSN or SATop. l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode.

Direction

-

-

Displays the direction of a PW.

PW Ingress Label/Source Port

-

-

Displays the ingress label at the source port of a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


688



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on a PW.


-

-

Displays the egress label at the sink port of a PW.

Opposite LSR ID

-

-

Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other end of a PW.


-

-



-

-

Displays the working status of the PW at the remote end.


-

-

Displays the working status of the entire PW.

Tunnel Type

-

-

Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS encapsulation.

NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS tunnels.

Tunnel

-

-

Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.

Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of a PW.


-

-


QoS Parameters Table A-74 CES services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


689



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Direction

-

-

Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service.

CIR(kbit/s)

-

-


EXP

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


Direction

-

-


Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Displays whether the bandwidth is limited.

CIR(kbit/s)

-

-

Displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW.

CBS(byte)

-

-

Displays the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR(kbit/s)

-

-

Displays the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW

PBS(byte)

-

-

Displays the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.

EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

-

-

Displays the LSP mode.

Table A-75 E-Line services

NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only Pipe.

Policy

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-



690



Table A-76 ATM services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


Direction

-

-


Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Displays whether the bandwidth is limited.

CIR(kbit/s)

-

-

Displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW.

CBS(byte)

-

-

Displays the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR(kbit/s)

-

-

Displays the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW

PBS(byte)

-

-

Displays the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.

EXP

-

-


Policy

-

-


Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-77 CES services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

RTP Head

-

-

Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header.

Packet Loading Time (us)

-

-

Displays the packet loading time.

Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)

-

-

Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets.

Ingress Clock Mode

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


691



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Egress Clock Mode

-

-



-

-

Displays the control channel type.


-

-

Displays the VCCV mode.

Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission

-

-

Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted.

Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status

-

-

Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold.

Threshold of Exiting R bit Inserting Status

-

-

Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold.

Sequence Number Mode

-

-

Displays the sequence number mode.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

Control Word

-

-

Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used.


-

-



-

-


Table A-78 E-Line services

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


692



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Request VLAN

-

-

When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs.

TPID

-

-

When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the TPID.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

Control Word

-

-

Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information.


-

-



-

-


Max Concatenated Cell Count

-

-

Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells.


-

-


Table A-79 ATM services

A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the MS PW tab.

3.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


693




Value Range

Default Value

Description

ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of MS-PW.

Name

-

-

Specifies the name of MS-PW.

MTU(bytes)

-

-


Service Type

Ethernet Service

Ethernet Service

l Specifies the type of services carried by the MS-PW.

CES Service

l Set this parameter according to the planning information.

ATM Service Connection Type

Port Transparent

Port Transparent

PVP

l This parameter is available only when Service Type is ATM Service. l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink are exchanged.

PVC

l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l Port Transparent: ATM transparent transmission refers to the transparent transmission of ATM cells that are encapsulated into PWs as payloads.

Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


PW Signaling Type

Static

Static

Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


694



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW Type

-

-

l Specifies the type of the PW. l Set this parameter to Ethernet if Service Type is ETH Service and no VLAN IDs need to be added. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tag Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attribute tab. l If Service Type is CES Service, the value CESoPSN indicates structureaware emulation, which allows timeslot compression; the value SAToP indicates structure-agnostic emulation, which does not allow timeslot compression. l If Service Type is ATM Service, set this parameter according to the value of Connection Type.

PW Direction

-

-



-

-

Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.


16 to 1048575

-



16 to 1048575

-



Manually

Manually

Specifies the method to select tunnels. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


695



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS

Specifies the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.

Tunnel

-

-

A created tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, no PW can be created.

Peer LSR ID

-

-


Egress Tunnel

-

-

For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled.

QoS Parameters CES Services

Ethernet services

l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


696



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy

-

-


CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-


CBS(byte)

-

-


PIR(Kbit/s)

-

-


PBS(byte)

-

-


EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


697



ATM services Table A-80 ATM services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Policy

-

-


CIR (Kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte)

-

-

Specifies the excess burst size of the PW.

PIR (kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.

698



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs CES Services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

RTP Header

Disable

Disable

l Specifies the RTP header.

Enable

l The RTP header carries time stamps. l The default value is recommended. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)

375 to 16000

8000

l Specifies the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. l A greater value of this parameter means fewer impacts of transmission jitters on CES services, greater delays of CES services, and more resources occupied by CES services. l The default value is recommended. NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


699



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


125 to 5000

1000

l Specifies the length of fragments in the TDM data stream. Each fragment is encapsulated into one PW packet. l A greater value of this parameter means higher encapsulation efficiency but greater delays of CES services. l The default value is recommended.

Ingress Clock mode

-

-


Egress Clock mode

-

-



None

CW


CW Alert Label

l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported.


None

Ping

Ping


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


700



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

64K Timeslot Number

1 to 31

1

l Specifies the number of 64 kbit/s timeslots that transmit service traffic. If Frame Mode of the opposite end is 30, the source 64 kbit/s timeslots at the local end must include the 16th timeslot. l On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must be the same. l This parameter is unavailable if PW Type is SAToP.


Huawei Mode

Huawei Mode

Specifies the sequence number mode.

Standard Mode

Ethernet services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

No Use

No Use



None

Alert Label


Alert Label

l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


701



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


Ping

Ping

l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check.

None

l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None. Request VLAN

-

-

l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

Must Use

Must Use

l Specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.

TPID

ATM services

No Use

l Set Control Word to Must Use if PW Type is ATM 1:1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


702



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CW

CW


None Alert Label

l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.


Ping

Ping

None


Max. Concatenated Cell Count

1 to 31

10

l Specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


703



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


100 to 50000

1000

l Specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.

A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


PW Type

-

-

Displays the type of the PW that carries the service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


704



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

OAM Status

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies or displays whether the local node can perform and respond to OAM operations.

Disabled

l If OAM Status is Enabled, the local NE can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Disabled, the local NE cannot perform and respond to OAM operations. l If PW APS protection needs to be configured or a CC test needs to be performed for the tunnel, OAM Status needs to be set to Enabled. Associate AC State

-

-


Detection Mode

Auto-Sensing

Auto-Sensing

l Specifies or displays the detection mode for PW OAM packets.

Manual

l Manual: During a CC test, PW OAM packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: During a CC test, PW OAM packets are sent at the interval for receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the type of PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


705



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CV

CV


FFD

l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the type of PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the type of PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)

3.3

50

10 20

l Displays or specifies the OAM detection period. l If Detection Packet Type is FFD, this parameter can be set; if Detection Packet Type is CV, the value is always 1000.

50 100 200 500

l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS usually. If the packet transmission delay time of a PW exceeds 3.3 ms, the transmission interval of FFD packets needs to be a value greater than the delay time.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


706



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

SD Threshold (%)

0-100

0

l Specifies or displays the SD threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l When this parameter is set to 0, SD threshold detection is not supported.

SF Threshold (%)

0-100

0

l Specifies or displays the SF threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l When this parameter is set to 0, SF threshold detection is not supported. l The SD threshold is not higher than the SF threshold.

LSR ID to Be Received

-

-

l Specifies or displays the LSR ID to be received. l This parameter is available only if OAM Status is Disabled.


-

-

l Specifies or displays the PW ID to be received. l This parameter is available only if OAM Status is Disabled.


-

-

Displays whether PWs at the local end are available.

Local PW Defect Type

-

-

Displays the local PW defect type.

Local Disable PW Duration(ms)

-

-

Displays the duration when the local PW is unavailable.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


707



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Local PW Defect Location

-

-

Displays the local PW defect location.


-

-

Displays whether PWs at the remote end are available.

Remote PW Defect Type

-

-

Displays the remote PW defect type.

Remote Disable PW Duration(ms)

-

-

Displays the duration when the remote PW is unavailable.

Remote PW Defect Location

-

-

Displays the remote PW defect location.

A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Packet Count

1 to 4294967295

3

Specifies the number of test request packets.

EXP Value

0 to 7

7

l Specifies the EXP value of the PW label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.

TTL

1 to 255

255

l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the PW label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


708



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Transmit Interval (10ms)

1 to 1000

100

l Specifies the interval for transmitting test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Packet Length

64 to 1400

64



1 to 6000

300


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


709



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Response Mode

IPv4 UDP Response

IPv4 UDP Response


No Response Application Control Channel Response

l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel Response indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the remote PE. If the remote PE supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel Response. If the remote PE does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


710



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Peer PW ID

-

-

Specifies the PW ID of the peer end.

Peer IP

-

-

Specifies the IP address of the peer port.

A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.

Navigation Path 1.


2.


3.

Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP Value

0 to 7

7

l Specifies the EXP value of the PW label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.

TTL

1 to 255

255

l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the PW label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.

Packet Length

84 to 1400

84



1 to 6000

300


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


711



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Response Mode

IPv4 UDP Response

IPv4 UDP Response


No Response Application Control Channel Response

l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel Response indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the remote PE. If the remote PE supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel Response. If the remote PE does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


712



A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-

l Displays the protection group ID. l The system automatically assigns IDs to the protection groups according to their creation sequence.

Protection Type

-

-

Displays the protection group type.

Switching Mode

Dual-Ended

-

l Displays or specifies the switching mode of a protection group.

Single-Ended

l The value SingleEnded indicates that services are switched only in the direction where faults occur. l The value DualEnded indicates that services in both positive and reverse directions are switched to their protection channels when faults occur. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Dual-Ended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


713



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

BDI Status

Disabled

-

l Specifies or displays whether the protection switching is triggered upon receiving BDI packets.

Enabled

l This parameter is available only when Switching Mode is set to Single-Ended. l If BDI Status is set to Enabled, the egress node notifies the ingress node of any detected faults by sending BDI packets; upon receiving BDI packets, the ingress node triggers protection switching. Transmit and receive Status of Protocol Packet

-

-

Displays the protocol packet status.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

-

l Specifies or displays whether to switch services to the original working tunnel after the fault is rectified.

Revertive

l The value Revertive indicates to perform the switching; the value Non-Revertive indicates not to perform the switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


714



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(min)

1-12

-

l Specifies and displays the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working tunnel recovers, services are switched to the original working tunnel. l This parameter is available only when Revertive Mode is Revertive. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to 5.

Hold-Time(100ms)

0-100

-

l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but wait until the hold-off time expires, and then detect whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to 0.

Protocol Status

-

-

Displays the protocol status.

Switching Status

-

-

Displays the switching status of the protection group.

Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


715



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Unit

-

-

Displays whether a tunnel is a working or protection tunnel.

Active Tunnel

-

-

Displays the currently used tunnel.

Tunnel Status

-

-

Displays the tunnel status.

Tunnel Type

-

-

Displays the tunnel type.

Tunnel Direction

-

-


Ingress Tunnel

-

-

Displays the ingress tunnel.

Egress Tunnel

-

-

Displays the egress tunnel.

A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.

3.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

1:1

1:1

Specifies the protection type of the tunnel protection group. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value 1:1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


716



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Switching Mode

Single-Ended

Dual-Ended

l Specifies the switching mode to be adopted when a tunnel fails.

Dual-Ended

l The value SingleEnded indicates that services are switched only in the direction where faults occur. l The value DualEnded indicates that services are switched to the protection channel in both directions when faults occur. l The value DualEnded is recommended. BDI Status

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the protection switching is triggered upon receiving BDI packets. l This parameter is available only when Switching Mode is set to Single-Ended. l If BDI Status is set to Enabled, the egress node notifies the ingress node of any detected faults by sending BDI packets; upon receiving BDI packets, the ingress node triggers the protection switching.

Working Tunnel Type

MPLS Tunnel

MPLS Tunnel

Specifies the type of the working tunnel. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value MPLS Tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


717



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Working Ingress Tunnel ID

-

-

l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the ingress direction. l If this parameter is set for a bidirectional tunnel, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Working Egress Tunnel ID.

Working Ingress Tunnel Name

-

-

Displays the name of the working tunnel in the ingress direction.

Working Egress Tunnel ID

-

-

l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the egress direction. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if the parameter Working Ingress Tunnel ID is set, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Working Egress Tunnel ID.

Working Egress Tunnel Name

-

-

Displays the name of the working tunnel in the egress direction.

Protection Tunnel Type

-

-

Displays the type of protection tunnel, which is the same as the type of working tunnel.

Protection Ingress Tunnel ID

-

-

l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the ingress direction. l If this parameter is set for a bidirectional tunnel, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Protection Egress Tunnel ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


718



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Ingress Tunnel Name

-

-

Displays the name of the protection tunnel in the ingress direction.

Protection Egress Tunnel ID

-

-

l Specifies the protection tunnel of the protection group in the egress direction. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if the parameter Protection Ingress Tunnel ID is set, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Protection Egress Tunnel ID.

Protection Egress Tunnel Name

-

-

Displays the name of the protection tunnel in the egress direction.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers.

Revertive

l The value Revertive indicates to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers; the value NonRevertive indicates not to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers. l The value Revertive is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


719



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

WTR Time(min)

1 to 12

5

l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working tunnel recovers, services are switched to the original working tunnel. l This parameter is available only when Revertive Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.

Hold-Time(100ms)

0 to 100

0


Protocol Status

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l Specifies the protocol status. l During the creation of a protection group, set Protocol Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Protocol Status to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


720



A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.

Navigation Path The navigation path for CES services is as follows: 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Protection Group tab.

3.

Click the PW APS tab.

4.

Click New.

The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows: 1.


2.


3.


4.

Click New.

The navigation path for ATM services is as follows: 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.

2.


3.


4.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


PW Signaling Type

Static

Static


PW Type

-

-


PW Direction

-

-



-

-



16 to 1048575

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


721



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


16 to 1048575

-



-

-


Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS


Tunnel

-

-


Peer LSR ID

-

-


Egress Tunnel

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


QoS Parameters Table A-81 CES services

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


722



Table A-82 E-Line services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

-


Enabled

l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy

-

-


CIR(kbit/s)

-

-


CBS(byte)

-

-


PIR(kbit/s)

-

-


PBS(byte)

-

-


EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

-

-

Displays the LSP mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only Pipe.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


723




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

-


Enabled

l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. CIR(kbit/s)

-

-


CBS(byte)

-

-


PIR(kbit/s)

-

-


PBS(byte)

-

-


EXP

-

-


Policy

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


724




Value Range

Default Value

Description

RTP Head

-

-



-

-



-

-


Ingress Clock Mode

-

-


Egress Clock Mode

-

-



-

-

Displays the mode of PW connectivity check.


-

-

Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check.


-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


725




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

-

-



-

-



-

-


Request VLAN

-

-


TPID

-

-

The OptiX RTN 950 does not support VLAN TPID of the PW level.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


726




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

-

-


Protection Group ID

-

-


Enabling Status

Disabled

Disabled


Enabled


-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Switching Mode

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


727



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Revertive Mode

Non-revertive

Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers.

Revertive

l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended. Switchover Restoration Time(min)

1 to 12

1


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


728



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


0 to 100

0


-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

OAM Status

-

-


Detection mode

OAM Parameters

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


729



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Detection Mode

Auto-Sensing

Auto-Sensing


Manual


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


730



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CV

CV


FFD


3.3

50

10


20 50 100 200 500


-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


731



A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW APS protection group.

Navigation Path The navigation path for CES services is as follows: 1.


2.


3.

Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.

4.

Click New.

The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows: 1.


2.


3.


4.

Click New.

The navigation path for ATM services is as follows: 1.


2.


3.


4.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


PW Signaling Type

Static

Static


PW Type

-

-


PW Direction

-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


732



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


16 to 1048575

-



16 to 1048575

-



-

-


Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS


Tunnel

-

-


Peer LSR ID

-

-


Egress Tunnel

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


QoS Parameters Table A-87 CES services

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


733




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

-


Enabled

l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy

-

-


CIR(kbit/s)

-

-


CBS(byte)

-

-


PIR(kbit/s)

-

-


PBS(byte)

-

-


EXP

-

-


LSP Mode

-

-

Displays the LSP mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only Pipe.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


734




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

Disabled

-


Enabled

l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. CIR(kbit/s)

-

-


CBS(byte)

-

-


PIR(kbit/s)

-

-


PBS(byte)

-

-


EXP

-

-


Policy

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


735




Value Range

Default Value

Description

RTP Head

-

-



-

-



-

-


Ingress Clock Mode

-

-


Egress Clock Mode

-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


736




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

-

-



-

-



-

-


Request VLAN

-

-


TPID

-

-

The OptiX RTN 950 does not support VLAN TPID of the PW level.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



-

-



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


737




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Mode

-

-


Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


A.9.2 CES Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.

A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the CES service to be created.

Service name

-

-

Displays or specifies the service name.

Level

-

-

Displays the level of the received TDM frames.

Source Board

-

-

Displays the source board of the CES service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


738



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source High Channel

-

-


Source Low Channel

-

-

Displays the source lower order path.

Source 64K Timeslot

-

-

Displays the source 64 kbit/s timeslot.

Priority List

CS7

-

l Specifies the priority of a CES service. This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNI-NNI.

CS6 EF AF4 AF3

l This parameter needs to be configured if QoS processing needs to be performed for different CES services.

AF2 AF1 BE

l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service classes, which are mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates the expedited forwarding of service, which is applicable to services of low transmission delay and low packet loss rate, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicate the assured forwarding classes of service, which are applicable to services that require an assured rate but no delay or jitter limit. l BE: is applicable to services that need not be processed in a special manner. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


739



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the PW that carries the CES service. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-NNI.

Tunnel

-

-

Displays the tunnel that carries the PW. The tunnel must have been configured in advance. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-NNI.

Sink Board

-

-

Displays the sink board of the CES service. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-UNI.

Sink High Channel

-

-


Sink Low Channel

-

-

Displays the sink lower order path. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNIUNI.

Sink 64K Timeslot

-

-

Displays the sink 64 kbit/s timeslot. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-UNI.

Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the CES service.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the PW that carries the CES service.

Working Status

-

-

Displays working status of the PW.

PW Status

-

-

Displays the enabling status of the PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


740



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW Signaling Type

-

-

Displays the PW signaling type. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports static PWs only.

PW Type

-

-

Displays the PW type for CES service encapsulation. CESoPSN: Indicates structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network. Timeslot compression can be set. SAToP: Indicates structure-agnostic TDM over packet. Timeslot compression cannot be set.


-

-

Displays the tunnel type for PW encapsulation. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports MPLS only.


-

-

Displays the Ingress label of the PW that carries the CES service.


-

-

Displays the Egress label of the PW that carries the CES service.

Peer LSR ID

-

-

Displays the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end.


-

-



-

-

Displays the working status of the PW at the remote end.


-

-

Displays the compositive working status of the PW. The compositive working status is up when both ends are up, and is down when one end is down.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


741



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel type

-

-

Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports MPLS tunnels only.

Tunnel

-

-

Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries the CES service.

Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the tunnel.


-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

Direction

-

-


CIR(kbit/s)

-

-


EXP

-

-


QoS Parameters

Parameters of Advanced Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

RTP Header

-

-

Displays the RTP header. The RTP header carries time stamps.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


742



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


375 to 16000

-

l Displays or specifies the jitter buffer time. l The jitter buffer time guarantees the realtime performance of the CES service. NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.


-

-


Ingress Clock Mode

-

-


Egress Clock Mode

-

-



-

-



-

-



Enabled

-

Displays or specifies the enabling status of the transparent transmission of CES service alarms. If this function is enabled, the fault on the AC side of the CES service is notified to the remote end. Upon receiving the fault notification from the network side or the remote end, the local NE inserts the corresponding alarm to the AC side.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Disabled


743



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Threshold of Entering R Bit Inserting Status

1-65535

-

Displays or specifies the threshold of packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported once the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold. This parameter is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.

Threshold of Exiting R Bit Inserting Status

1-65535

-

Displays or specifies the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold. This parameter is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.


Huawei Mode

-

Specifies the sequence number mode. The Sequence Number Mode must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Standard Mode



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


744



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Mode

-

-


Enabling Status

Enabled

-


Disabled


-

-


Restoration Mode

Non-revertive

-

Revertive

l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


745



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 12

-



0 to 100

-


Deployment Status

-

-


Switchover Status

-

-


Protocol Status

-

-


Working Path Status

-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


746




The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


DNI PW ID

-

-

Displays the DNI PW ID.

PW Type

-

-


Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.

A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID(e.g.1,3-6)

1 to 4294967295

-

Specifies the service ID.

Service name

-

-

Specifies the service name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


747



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Level

E1

E1

The value E1 indicates that the CES service is used to transmit the TDM services from E1 ports.

Mode

UNI-NNI

UNI-NNI

l Specifies the mode of CES service.

UNI-UNI

l The value UNI-NNI indicates that the CES service is carried by a PW. Therefore, the information about the PW needs to be configured. Source Board

-

-

Specifies the board where the source (UNI) of the CES service is located.

Source High Channel

-

-


Source Low Channel (e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

If Level is set to E1, this parameter indicates the E1 port where the service source is located. If Mode is set to UNI-NNI, this parameter can assume only one value.

Source 64K Timeslot (e.g.1,3-6)

1-31

1-31

l Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslot that transmits data. This parameter can assume multiple values. If Frame Mode of the opposite end is 30, the source 64 kbit/s timeslots at the local end must include the 16th timeslot. l On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must the same. l This parameter does not need to be set if Mode is UNI-NNI and PW Type is SAToP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


748



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Priority List

CS7

EF

l Specifies the priority of a CES service. This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNI-NNI.

CS6 EF AF4 AF3

l This parameter needs to be configured if QoS processing needs to be performed for different CES services.

AF2 AF1 BE

l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service classes, which are mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates the expedited forwarding of service, which is applicable to services of low transmission delay and low packet loss rate, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicate the assured forwarding classes of service, which are applicable to services that require an assured rate but no delay or jitter limit. l BE: is applicable to services that need not be processed in a special manner. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


749



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW Type

CESoPSN

CESoPSN

l Specifies the type of the PW. This parameter is available only when Mode is UNI-NNI.

SAToP

l CESoPSN: Indicates structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network. Timeslot compression can be set. SAToP: Indicates structureagnostic TDM over packet. Timeslot compression cannot be set. Protection Type

No Protection

No Protection


l Specifies the protection mode of the PW. This parameter is available only when Mode is UNI-NNI. l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured. l When this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair , you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.

Sink Board

-

-

l Specifies the board where the sink of the CES service is located. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


750



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink High Channel

-

-


Sink Low Channel(e.g. 1,3-6)

-

-

l If Level is set to E1, this parameter indicates the E1 port where the service sink is located. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.

Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g. 1,3-6)

1-31

1-31

l Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslot that the service sink occupies. On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must the same. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.

Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs NOTE

If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


PW Signaling Type

Static

Static


PW Type

-

-


PW Direction

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


751



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-



16 to 1048575

-



16 to 1048575

-



-

-


Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS


Tunnel

-

-


Peer LSR ID

-

-


Egress Tunnel

-

-


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


QoS Parameters

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


752



Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

RTP Header

Disable

Disable

l Specifies the RTP header.

Enable Huawei RTP

l The RTP header carries time stamps. l The default value is recommended. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us)

375 to 16000

8000

l Specifies the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. The step is 125. l A greater value of this parameter means fewer impacts of transmission jitters on CES services, greater delays of CES services, and more resources occupied by CES services. l The default value is recommended. NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.


125 to 5000

1000

l Specifies the length of fragments in the TDM data stream. The step is 125. l A greater value of this parameter means higher encapsulation efficiency but greater delays of CES services. l The default value is recommended.

Ingress Clock Mode

Null

Null


-


Adaptive Clock Mode Egress Clock Mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-


753



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


None

CW


CW Alert Label

l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported.


None

Ping

Ping



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled


If this function is enabled, the fault on the AC side of the CES service is notified to the remote end. On receiving the fault notification from the network side or the remote end, the local NE inserts the corresponding alarm to the AC side.

754



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Threshold of Entering R Bit Inserting Status

1-65535

100

l The corresponding alarm will be reported if the number of consecutive lost packets crosses the threshold specified by this parameter. l This function is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.

Threshold of Exiting R Bit Inserting Status

1-65535

5

l The corresponding alarm will be cleared if the number of consecutive received packets crosses the threshold specified by this parameter. l This function is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.


Huawei Mode

Standard Mode

Standard Mode

Specifies the sequence number mode. The Sequence Number Mode must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

-

-


Protection Group ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


755



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enabling Status

Disabled

Disabled


Enabled


-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Switching Mode

-

-


Revertive Mode

Non-revertive

Revertive

Revertive


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


756



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 12

1



0 to 100

0


-

Detection mode

-


OAM Parameters NOTE


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


757



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

OAM Status

-

-


Detection Mode

Auto-Sensing

Auto-Sensing


Manual


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


758



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CV

CV


FFD


3.3

50

10


20 50 100 200 500


-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


759





Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Mode

-

-


Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


A.9.3 ATM Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.

A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the IMA Group Management tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK

-

-

Displays the ATM TRUNK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


760



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IMA Protocol Enable Status

Enabled

Disabled

l Specifies the IMA protocol enable status.

Disabled

l Set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled if the links bound in the ATM TRUNK require the IMA protocol; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled. l After IMA Protocol Enable Status is set to Enabled, the E1 links or Fractional E1 timeslots bound in the ATM TRUNK start running the IMA protocol. Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

1 to 16

1


l The links of the IMA group can carry services only when the number of activated links in the transmit/ receive direction is not smaller than the value of Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links/ Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links. l The values of Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links must be the same because the OptiX RTN 950 supports Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation only. The parameters Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links and Minimum

761



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links

1 to 16

1

Number of Active Receiving Links must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.

IMA Protocol Version

1.0

1.1

l Specifies the IMA protocol version.

1.1

l The parameter IMA Protocol Version must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


762



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IMA Transmit Frame Length

32

128

l Specifies the IMA transmit frame length.

64

l Based on the IMA frame format, the receive end rebuilds the ATM cell stream with the cells arriving from diverselydelayed links. Longer IMA frames result in higher transmission efficiency and occupy more resources. Once a member link fails, the impact on the entire IMA group increases as the length of IMA frames increases.

128 256

l The IMA Transmit Frame Length must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


763



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

IMA Symmetry Mode

Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation

Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation

l Specifies the symmetrical mode of the IMA group. l If the symmetrical mode and symmetrical operation is adopted, the bandwidth of the IMA group is always consistent in the transmit direction and in the receive direction, even when some member links fail. In symmetrical mode: – Bandwidth of the IMA group = min {bandwidth in the transmit direction, bandwidth in the receive direction} – The unidirectional failure in one member link is equivalent to the bidirectional failure in one member link.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


764



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Maximum Delay Between Links (ms)

1 to 120

25

l Specifies the maximum differential delay that is allowed between the member links. l If the differential delay between a member link and the other member links exceeds the value, this link will be deactivated and deleted from the IMA group. l If this parameter is set to a value higher than the normal value range, the delay of IMA services will be prolonged and even packet loss will occur; if this parameter is set to a value lower than the normal value range, a working link will be deleted by mistake. l The Maximum Delay Between Links (ms) must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.

Clock Mode

CTC Mode

CTC Mode

ITC Mode

l Specifies the clock mode of the IMA group. l Clock Mode is set to the same value for the interconnected ends of IMA links.

A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


765



Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Binding tab.

3.

Click Configuration.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Available Boards

-

-

Selects the available boards.

Configurable Ports

-

-

Selects the configurable ATM trunks.

Level

E1

E1

Specifies the level of bound paths.

Fractional E1

l If ATM/IMA services need to be mapped into the ATM TRUNK that binds one or more E1 ports, select E1 in Level. l If ATM/IMA services need to be mapped into the ATM TRUNK that binds one or more serial ports, select Fractional E1 in Level. Direction

-

-

Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional.

Optical Interface

-

-


Available Resources

-

-

Displays the ports that carry the available paths for IMA services. NOTE For Fractional ATM/IMA services, set Port Mode in PDH Interface to Layer 1 and configure Setting Serial Port Parameters.

Available Timeslots

-

-


Selected Bound Paths

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


766



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK

-

-

Displays the name of the ATM TRUNK.

Level

-

-

Displays the level of bound paths.

Direction

-

-


Bound Paths

-

-



-

-


Display in Combination

Selected

Selected

Specifies whether to display bound paths in combination.

Not selected

A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the IMA Group States tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK

-

-

Displays the VCTRUNK.

Near-End Group Status

-

-

Displays the status of the near-end group.

Far-End Group Status

-

-

Displays the status of the far-end group.

Transmit Rate (cell/s)

-

-

Displays the cell transmission rate.

Receive Rate (cell/s)

-

-

Displays the cell receiving rate.

Number of Transmit Links

-

-

Displays the number of transmit links.

Number of Receive Links

-

-

Displays the number of receive links.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


767



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Number of Activated Transmit Links

-

-

Displays the number of activated transmit links.

Number of Activated Receive Links

-

-

Displays the number of activated receive links.

A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the IMA Link States tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK

-

-


E1 Link

-

-

Displays E1 links.

Differential Delay Check Status

-

-

Displays the status of the deferential delay check.

Near-End Receiving Status

-

-

Displays the near-end receiving status.

Near-End Transmitting Status

-

-

Displays the near-end transmitting status.

Far-End Receiving Status

-

-

Displays the far-end receiving status.

Far-End Transmitting Status

-

-

Displays the far-end transmitting status.

A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.

Navigation Path 1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

768


2.


Click the ATM Interface Management tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the port.

Name

-

-

Displays or specifies the name of port.

Port Type

UNI

UNI

Specifies the type of ATM port.

NNI

l UNI: the port connecting user-side devices. For example, the UNI port applies to the user-side interface on the common ATM network or to the userside interface of the PE on the PSN network that transmits ATM PWE3 services. l NNI: the port connecting networkside devices. For example, the NNI port applies to the networkside interface on the common ATM network.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


769



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

ATM Cell Payload Scrambling

Disabled

Enabled

Specifies whether to enable payload scrambling of ATM cells.

Enabled

l The ITU-T G.804 stipulates that the payload (48 bytes) of ATM cells must be scrambled before it is mapped into E1 signals. Therefore, it is recommended that you set ATM Cell Payload Scrambling to Enabled. l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling must assume the same value on the two ends of an ATM link. Otherwise, packet loss will occur. Min. VPI

-

-


Max. VPI

-

-


Min. VCI

-

-


Max. VCI

-

-


VCC-Supported VPI Count

-

-


Loopback

No Loopback

No Loopback

Specifies the loopback status of the port.

Outloop Inloop

A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class mapping table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


770



Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Mapping Relation ID

-

-

Specifies the ID of the mapping table.


-

-

Specifies the name of the mapping relationship.

UBR

BE AF11 AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 EF CS6 CS7

UBR: BE

Displays or specifies the PHB service classes that correspond to different ATM service types. l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues of different service classes. l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission. l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates. l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather than delay or jitter limits.

CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

CBR: EF RT-VBR: AF31 NRT-VBR: AF21 UBR+: AF11 PORT-TRANS: BE


771


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description NOTE The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.

PORT-TRANS

l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.

A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping table.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


772




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Mapping Relation ID

2 to 8

-

Specifies the ID of the mapping table.


-

-

Specifies the name of the mapping relationship.

UBR

BE AF11 AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 EF CS6 CS7

UBR: BE CBR: EF RT-VBR: AF31 NRT-VBR: AF21 UBR+: AF11 PORT-TRANS: BE

Specifies the PHB service classes that correspond to different ATM service types. l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues of different service classes. l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission. l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates. l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather than delay or jitter limits.

CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+ PORT-TRANS

NOTE The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.

l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


773



A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the ATM Policy tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy ID

-

1

Displays the policy ID of the ATM service.

Policy Name

-

-

Displays or specifies the policy name of the ATM service. The maximum length of the value is 64 bytes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


774



Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

UBR

UBR

Displays or specifies the type of the ATM service.


l The UBR service is characterized by nonreal-time applications and many bursts. The UBR service does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. To be specific, the UBR service only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. The network side does not provide any assured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. l The CBR service requires tightly constrained delay variation and requires that data be transmitted at a constant rate. In addition, the CBR service requests a static amount of bandwidth and the highest priority. The CBR service is characterized by stable traffic and few bursts. l The rt-VBR service requires tightly constrained delay and delay variation. Compared with the CBR service, the rtVBR service allows sources to transmit data at a rate that varies with time. Equivalently, the sources can be

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


775


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description described as bursty. In addition, the rt-VBR service does not require a static amount of bandwidth. l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not require tightly constrained delay or delay variation, and is intended for non-realtime applications. l The UBR+ service is supplementary to the UBR service and is intended for applications that require assured minimum cell rate, which is indicated by the minimum cell rate (MCR) parameter. The other characteristics of the UBR+ service are the same as the corresponding characteristics of the UBR service.

Traffic Type

-

-

Clp01Pcr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Clp01Scr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Clp0Pcr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Clp0Scr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Max. Cell Burst Size (cell)

2 to 200000

-

Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (0.1us)

7 to 13300000

-

Discard Traffic Frame

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


The Table A-93 lists the ATM service type, traffic type descriptor, and the related traffic parameters. ATM policies are configured based on these mapping relationships.

Displays or specifies the frame discarding mark in ATM policies. This parameter is effective to AAL5 traffic.

776



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

UPC/NPC

Enabled

Disabled

Displays or specifies UPC/NPC.

Disabled

l UPC is user-side parameter control and NPC is network-side parameter control. l After UPC/NPC is enabled, the cells with a frame discarding mark will be discarded in network congestion.

Table A-93 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters ATM Service Type

ATM Traffic Type Descriptor

Traffic Parameter 1

Traffic Parameter 2

Traffic Parameter 3

Traffic Parameter 4

UBR

NoTrafficDescriptor

-

-

-

-

NoClpTaggingNoScr

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

NoClpNoScr

Clp01Pcr

-

-

-

NoClpNoScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

ClpTransparentNoScr

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

ClpNoTaggingNoScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Pcr

-

-

ClpTaggingNoScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Pcr

-

-

NoClpNoScr

Clp01Pcr

-

-

-

NoClpNoScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

NoClpScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Scr

MBS

-

ClpNoTaggingScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

-

ClpTaggingScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

-

ClpTransparentScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Scr

MBS

CDVT

NoClpScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Scr

MBS

CDVT

ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

CDVT

ClpTaggingScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

CDVT

atmnotrafficdescriptormcr

Clp01Mcr

-

-

-

atmnoclpmcr

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Mcr

-

-

CBR

nrtVBR

rtVBR

UBR+

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


777


ATM Service Type



Traffic Parameter 1

Traffic Parameter 2

Traffic Parameter 3

Traffic Parameter 4

atmnoclpmcrcdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Mcr

CDVT

-

Parameters for the application object Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

-

-

Displays the ID configured for the ATM service.

Service Name

-

-

Displays the name configured for the ATM service.

Link ID

-

-

Displays the link ID.

Direction

-

-


A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy ID

-

1

Specifies the policy ID of the ATM service. The policy ID can also be automatically allocated.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


778



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Policy Name

Synchronous signal

Synchronous signal

Specifies the policy name of the ATM service. The maximum length of the value is 64 bytes.

Signaling Voice Data

NOTE You can select one of the five ATM service policy names from the drop-down list or enter the policy name.

Video

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


779



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

UBR

UBR

Specifies the type of the ATM service.


l The UBR service is characterized by nonreal-time applications and many bursts. The UBR service does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. To be specific, the UBR service only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. The network side does not provide any assured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. l The CBR service requires tightly constrained delay variation and requires that data be transmitted at a constant rate. In addition, the CBR service requests a static amount of bandwidth and the highest priority. The CBR service is characterized by stable traffic and few bursts. l The rt-VBR service requires tightly constrained delay and delay variation. Compared with the CBR service, the rtVBR service allows sources to transmit data at a rate that varies with time. Equivalently, the sources can be described as bursty. In

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


780


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description addition, the rt-VBR service does not require a static amount of bandwidth. l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not require tightly constrained delay or delay variation, and is intended for non-realtime applications. l The UBR+ service is supplementary to the UBR service and is intended for applications that require assured minimum cell rate, which is indicated by the minimum cell rate (MCR) parameter. The other characteristics of the UBR+ service are the same as the corresponding characteristics of the UBR service.

Traffic Type

-

-

Clp01Pcr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Clp01Scr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Clp0Pcr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Clp0Scr(cell/s)

90 to 74539

-

Max. Cell Burst Size (cell)

2 to 200000

-

Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (0.1us)

7 to 13300000

-

Discard Traffic Frame

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


For the mapping relationships between ATM service types, ATM traffic type descriptors, and traffic parameters, see Table A-94. ATM policies are configured based on these mapping relationships.

Specifies the frame discarding mark in ATM policies. This parameter is effective to AAL5 traffic.

781



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

UPC/NPC

Enabled

Disabled

l UPC is user-side parameter control and NPC is network-side parameter control.

Disabled

l After UPC/NPC is enabled, the cells with a frame discarding mark will be discarded in network congestion.

Table A-94 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters ATM Service Type


Traffic Parameter 1

Traffic Parameter 2

Traffic Parameter 3

Traffic Parameter 4

UBR

NoTrafficDescriptor

-

-

-

-

NoClpTaggingNoScr

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

NoClpNoScr

Clp01Pcr

-

-

-

NoClpNoScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

ClpTransparentNoScr

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

ClpNoTaggingNoScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Pcr

-

-

ClpTaggingNoScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Pcr

-

-

NoClpNoScr

Clp01Pcr

-

-

-

NoClpNoScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

CDVT

-

-

NoClpScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Scr

MBS

-

ClpNoTaggingScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

-

ClpTaggingScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

-

ClpTransparentScr

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Scr

MBS

CDVT

NoClpScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Scr

MBS

CDVT

ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

CDVT

ClpTaggingScrCdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp0Scr

MBS

CDVT

atmnotrafficdescriptormcr

Clp01Mcr

-

-

-

atmnoclpmcr

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Mcr

-

-

atmnoclpmcrcdvt

Clp01Pcr

Clp01Mcr

CDVT

-

CBR

nrtVBR

rtVBR

UBR+

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


782



A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

-

-

Displays the service ID.

Service Name

-

-

Displays or specifies the service name.

Service Type

-

-

Displays the ATM service type.

Deployment Status

-

-

Displays the deployment status of the ATM service.

Connection Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Connection ID

-

-

Displays the connection ID of the ATM service.

Connection Name

-

-

Displays or specifies the connection name of the ATM service.

Source Port

-

-

Displays the source port of the ATM service.

PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the PW that carries ATM PWE3 services, if any.

Sink Port

-

-

Displays the sink board of the ATM service.

Source VPI

-

-

Displays the VPI of the source port of the ATM service.

Source VCI

-

-

Displays the VCI of the source port of the ATM service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


783



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink VPI

-

-

Displays the VPI of the sink port of the ATM service.

Sink VCI

-

-

Displays the VCI of the sink port of the ATM service.

Uplink Policy

-

-

Displays the QoS policy of the uplink ATM connection.

Down link Policy

-

-

Displays the QoS policy of the downlink ATM connection.

Parameters for Port Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the port of the ATM IMA service.

Port Type

-

-

Displays the port type of the ATM IMA service.

Max. VPI

-

-

Displays the maximum VPI.

Max. VCI

-

-

Displays the maximum VCI.

VCC-Supported VPI Count

-

-

Displays the count of VPIs that are used for VC exchange.

Parameters for Bound Paths Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

VCTRUNK

-

-


Level

-

-

Displays the level of bound paths.

Direction

-

-


Bound Paths

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


784



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-


IMA Group Status

-

-

Displays the status of the IMA group.

Parameters of PWs Tab

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

General Attributes

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

Work Status

-

-

Displays the working status of a PW.

-

-

Displays whether a PW is enabled.

-

-

Displays the PW signaling type.

PW Signaling Type

NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses static PWs only.

PW Type

-

-

l Displays the configured PW type. l This parameter corresponds to the connection type. The encapsulation type can be 1:1 or N: 1 if the connection type is PVP or PVC.

PW Direction

-

-



-

-

Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses MPLS only.

-

-

Displays the configured PW Ingress label.

PW Outgoing Label / Sink Port

-

-

Displays the configured PW Egress label.

Peer LSR ID

-

-

Displays the LSR ID of the destination.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


785


Tab

QoS


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Tunnel Type

-

-

Displays the type of the tunnel.

Ingress Tunnel No

-

-

Displays the tunnel ID of the ingress tunnel.

Egress Tunnel No

-

-

Displays the tunnel ID of the egress tunnel.

Local Operating Status

-

-

Displays the local running status of PW.

Remote Operating Status

-

-

Displays the remote running status of PW.

Overall Operating Status

-

-

Displays the comprehensive working status of the PW.

Tunnel for Auto Selection

-

-

Displays the tunnel that is automatically selected.

PW ID

-

-

Displays the PW ID.

Direction

-

-


Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


786


Tab


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CIR (Kbit/s)

-

-

Displays or specifies the committed information rate. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte)

-

-

Displays or specifies the excess burst size of the PW.

PIR (kbit/s)

-

-

Displays or specifies the peak information rate. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

Advanced Attributes

PBS (kbyte)

-

-

Displays or specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.

EXP

-

-


Policy

-

-


Control Word

Must Use

-

Displays or specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

No Use


787


Tab


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CW

-

l Displays or specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.

None Alert Label

l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode

Ping

-

None

l Displays or specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-ping function is required, do not set VCCV Verification Mode of PWs to None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


788


Tab


Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 31

-

l Displays or specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.


100 to 50000

-

l Displays or specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.

Parameters for CoS Mapping Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


789



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CoS Mapping

-

-

Specifies the policy for mapping different ATM service levels to CoS priorities. By setting this parameter, different quality measures are provided for different ATM services.



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Protection Mode

-

-


Enabling Status

Enabled

-


Disabled


-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


790



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Restoration Mode

Non-revertive

-

l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified.

Revertive

l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended. Switchover Restoration Time(min)

1 to 12

-



0 to 100

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


791



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Deployment Status

-

-


Switchover Status

-

-


Protocol Status

-

-


Working Path Status

-

-



-

-


A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service ID

1 to 4294967295

-

Specifies the service ID.

Service Name

-

-

Specifies the service name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


792



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Service Type

UNIs-NNI

UNIs-NNI

l Specifies the type of the ATM service.

UNI-UNI

l UNIs-NNI: This value applies to ATM PWE3 services. The attributes in Connection, PW, and CoS Mapping need to be configured. l UNI-UNI: This value applies to common ATM services. Only the attributes in Connection need to be configured. Connection Type

PVC

PVC

PVP Transparent

Specifies the connection type of the ATM service. For common ATM services (UNI-UNI): l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l PVC: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and sink are exchanged. For ATM PWE3 services (UNIs-NNI): l PVP: This value applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VPC encapsulation mode. l PVC: This value applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VCC encapsulation mode. For transparently transmitted ATM services, set Connection Type to Transparent.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


793



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

No Protection

No Protection

l Specifies the protection mode of the PW. This parameter is available only when Service Type is UNIsNNI.


l Set this parameter according to the network plan.

Connection Parameters Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Connection Name

-

-

Specifies the name of the ATM connection.

Source Board

-

-

Specifies the source board of the ATM service.

Source Port

-

-

Specifies the source port of the ATM service.

Source VPI(eg.35,36-39)

UNI: 0 to 255

-

Specifies the VPI of the source port of the ATM service.

NNI: 0 to 4095 Source VCI(eg.35,36-39)

32 to 65535

-

Specifies the VCI of the source port of the ATM service.

PW ID

1 to 4294967295

-


Sink Board

-

-

Specifies the sink board of the ATM service.

Sink Port

-

-

Specifies the sink board of the ATM service. NOTE This parameter does not need to be set if Service Type is UNIs-NNI. This parameter needs to be set if Service Type is UNI-UNI and the value must be different from that of the source board.

Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39)

UNI: 0 to 255

-

NNI: 0 to 4095

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Specifies the VPI of the sink port of the ATM service. 794



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39)

32 to 65535

-

Specifies the VCI of the sink port of the ATM service.

Uplink Policy

-

-

Specifies the QoS policy of the uplink ATM connection.

Down link Policy

-

-

Specifies the QoS policy of the downlink ATM connection.

Parameters of PWs NOTE

If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-


Working Status

-

-

Displays the working status of the PW. NOTE This parameter is available only after the PW parameters are configured.

Enable Status

-

-

Displays the enabling status of the PW. NOTE This parameter is available only after the PW parameters are configured.

PW Signaling Type

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Static

Static


Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.

795



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW Type

The ATM connection type is PVC:

The ATM connection type is PVC:

l Specifies the type of the PW.

l ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport

ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport

l ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode

The ATM connection type is PVP:

l In the case of ATM 1_to_1 encapsulation, one PW carries one VPC or VCC.

The ATM connection type is PVP:

ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport

l In the case of ATM n_to_1 encapsulation, one PW carries one or more VPCs or VCCs.

l ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport l ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode PW Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional



MPLS

MPLS

Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW.

PW Ingress Label / Source Port

16 to 1048575

-


PW Egress Label / Sink Port

16 to 1048575

-



Manually

Manually


Tunnel Type

MPLS

MPLS


Tunnel

-

-


Peer LSR ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


796



QoS Parameters Table A-95 ATM services Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Bandwidth Limit

-

-

Specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Policy

-

-


CIR (Kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte)

-

-

Specifies the excess burst size of the PW.

PIR (kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.

797



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

EXP

-

-


Parameters of Advanced Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Control Word

Must Use

Must Use

l Specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.

No Use

l Set Control Word to Must Use if PW Type is ATM 1:1. Control Channel Type

CW

CW

None Alert Label

l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.


Ping

Ping

None


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


798



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 31

10

l Specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.


100 to 50000

1000

l Specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Type

-

-


Protection Group ID

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


799



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Enabling Status

Disabled

Disabled


Enabled


-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Switching Mode

-

-


Revertive Mode

Non-revertive

Revertive

Revertive


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


800



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


1 to 12

1



0 to 100

0


-

Detection mode

-


OAM Parameters NOTE


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


801



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

OAM Status

-

-


Detection Mode

Auto-Sensing

Auto-Sensing


Manual


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


802



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


CV

CV


FFD


3.3

50

10


20 50 100 200 500


-

-



-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


803





Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Mode

-

-


Protection Group ID

-

-


Working PW ID

-

-


Protection PW ID

-

-


Parameters for CoS Mapping Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

PW ID

-

-

Displays the ID of the PW that carries service.

CoS Mapping

-

-

Specifies the policy for mapping different ATM service levels to CoS priorities. By setting this parameter, different quality measures are provided for different ATM services.

A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


804



Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Segment End Attributes tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source

-

-

Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service.

Sink

-

-

Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


805



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Connection Direction

Source

-

Displays the direction of the ATM connection.

Sink

l Source: indicates the forward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


806



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Segment and End Attribute

Non segment and Endpoint

Non segment and Endpoint

Specifies the segment and end attributes of the source and sink of the ATM connection.

Segment point Endpoint Segment and Endpoint

l Non segment and endpoint: intermediate point, which refers to the OAM node between two segment points or two end points. Therefore, intermediate points can be further classified into intermediate points between segment points, and intermediate points between end points. – Upon detecting a fault, an intermediate point reports the corresponding alarms and inserts segment AIS cells and end AIS cells to the downstream. Afterwards, the intermediate point periodically sends these cells. – An intermediate point does not catch any AIS/RDI cells. l Segment point: an end point of a segment. One ATM link consists of multiple segments. – Upon detecting a fault, a segment point reports the corresponding alarms and inserts end AIS cells to the downstream. Afterwards, the segment point

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


807


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description periodically sends these cells. – A segment point catches segment AIS/RDI cells only. l End point: an end point of an ATM link. It is usually an edge point on the ATM network. – Upon detecting a fault, an end point reports the corresponding alarms but does not insert any AIS cells. – An end point catches end AIS/ RDI cells only. l Segment and endpoint: a segment-end point, or an edge point of a segment and an end. – Upon detecting a fault, a segmentend point reports the corresponding alarms but does not insert any AIS cells. – A segment-end point catches the AIS/RDI cells of a segment and an end.

A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the CC Activation Status tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


808




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source

-

-


Sink

-

-



Source

-

Specifies the connection direction.

Sink


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


809



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

Specifies the segment and end attributes of nodes. l Segment point: an end point of a segment. One ATM link consists of multiple segments. Segment CC cells are terminated at segment points. l End point: an end point of an ATM link. It is usually an edge point on an ATM network. End-to-end CC cells are terminated at end points.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


810



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

CC Activate Flag

Deactivate

-

l Specifies the CC activation flag.

Source activate Sink activate Source + sink activate

l Deactivate: This node does not transmit or receive CC cells. l Source activate: This point transmits but does not receive CC cells. l Sink activate: This point receives but does not transmit CC cells. If this point does not receive any service cells or CC cells within a time interval of 3.5 (±0.5) seconds, it will report the LOC alarm and transmit AIS cells in the forward direction. l Source + sink activate: This node transmits and receives CC cells. If this point does not receive any service cells or CC cells within a time interval of 3.5 (±0.5) seconds, it will report the LOC alarm and transmit AIS cells in the forward direction. l Once the node receives any CC cells or service cells, the LOC alarm will be cleared.

A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM OAM.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


811



Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Source

-

-


Sink

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


812



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


Source

-

Displays the direction of the ATM connection.

Sink


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


813



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description


-

-

Specifies the segment and end attribute. l Segment LB cells are looped back only at a Segment point, Segment and Endpoint, or Non segment and Endpoint. l End-to-end LB cells are looped back only at an Endpoint or Segment and Endpoint.

Loopback Point NE

-

-

l Specifies the NE where the loopback point is located. l Before an end-to-end LB test, you need to set end points in the test domain. After the test, remove the end points. l Before a segment-tosegment LB test, you need to set segment points in the test domain. After the test, remove the segment points.

-

Test Result

-

Displays whether the loopback command is successfully issued.

A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the LLID tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


814




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Country Code (Hexadecimal Code)

-

00 00

Displays or specifies the country code of the ATM service. The value is 2 bytes in length.

Network Code (Hexadecimal Code)

-

00 01

Displays or specifies the network code of the ATM service. The value is 2 bytes in length.

NE Code (Hexadecimal Code)

-

00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

l Displays or specifies the NE code of the ATM service. The value is 11 bytes in length. l The default NE code can be used if it is unique on the network. l NE code and NE ID are associated. Therefore, each NE on the network has a unique NE code.

A.10 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters This topic describes physical clock parameters.

A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.

2.

Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


815




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source

-

-

l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 7. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 8. l The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes.

External Clock Source Mode

2 Mbit/s

2Mbit/s

2 MHz

l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l This parameter is set according to the external clock signal. In normal cases, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


816



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Synchronous Status Byte

SA4 to SA8

SA4

l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. In normal cases, the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM.

Clock Source Priority Sequence (Highest: 1)

-

-

Displays the priority sequence of clock sources. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority.

A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop (PLL) clock source of the external clock port.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


817



Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the external clock port Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source

-

Internal Clock Source

l When the PLL clock source of the external clock port extracts the system clock (namely, the local clock of the NE), Clock Source takes its default value Internal Clock Source. In this case, no manual configuration is required. l When the PLL clock source of the external clock port needs to extract the clock from an SDH line board, clock from a radio link, clock from a PDH tributary board, or synchronous Ethernet clock, set Clock Source to the corresponding clock source according to the network planning information.

Current Status

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


Displays the valid status of clock sources.

818



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Lock Status

-

-

l The PLL clock source of the external clock port extracts only an unlocked clock source. l If a clock source is in locked state, the PLL clock source of the external clock port does not extract the clock source until the clock source is changed from the locked state to the unlocked state. l The internal clock source should not be in locked state.

Clock Source Priority (Highest: 1)

-

-

Displays the priority level of a clock source. 1 is the highest priority.

A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.

2.

Click the Clock Subnet tab.

Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Affiliated Subnet

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


819



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Protection Status

Start Extended SSM Protocol

Stop SSM Protocol

l The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management on an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically selects the clock source of the highest quality and highest priority, thus preventing mutual clock tracing.

Start Standard SSM Protocol Stop SSM Protocol

l After the standard SSM protocol is started, the NE first performs the protection switching on the clock source according to the clock quality level information provided by the S1 byte. If the quality level of the clock source is the same, the NE then performs the protection switching according to the clock priority table. That is, the NE selects an unlocked clock source that is of the highest quality and highest priority from all the current available clock sources as the clock source to be synchronized and traced by the local station. l If the SSM protocol is stopped, it indicates

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


820


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description that the S1 byte is not used. The NE selects and switches a clock source only according to the sequence specified in the priority table. The clock source of the highest priority is used as the clock source to be traced. l After the SSM protocol is stopped, each NE performs the protection switching on the clock according to the preset priority table of the clock source only when the clock source of a higher priority is lost.

Clock Source

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

-

-


This parameter indicates the clock source that is configured for an NE. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source.

821



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source ID

(None)

(None)

l This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started.

1 to 15

l Clock source IDs are allocated for the following clock sources only: – External clock source – Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources – Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings – Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings

A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Received Quality tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


822



Parameters for Clock Source Quality Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source

-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the configured clock source. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source.

Configured Quality

Unknown Synchronization Quality

Automatic Extraction

This parameter specifies the quality level that is configured for the clock source. This function is required only in a special scenario or in a test. Generally, this parameter need not be set.

-

This parameter indicates the clock source quality signal received by the NE. The NE extracts the clock source quality signal from the S1 byte of each clock source.

G.811 Clock Signal G.812 Transit Clock Signal G.812 Local Clock Signal G.813 SDH Equipment Timing Source (SETS) Signal Do Not Use For Synchronization Automatic Extraction Received Quality

-

Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


823



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Quality Level 0

Do Not Use For Synchronization

Do Not Use For Synchronization

This parameter specifies the clock quality whose level is manually set to zero.

G.811 Reference Clock Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock G.812 Transit Clock Between G.812 Transit Clock and G.812 Local Clock G.812 Local Clock Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) SETS Clock Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable

l Do Not Use For Synchronization: the notification information in the reverse direction of the selected synchronization clock source to avoid direct mutual locking of adjacent NEs. l G.811 Reference Clock: the clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 811. l Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock: lower than the quality level of the clock signal specified in ITU-T G.811 but higher than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 812. l G.812 Transit Clock: the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l Between G.812 Transit Clock and G. 812 Local Clock: lower than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 812 but higher than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l G.812 Local Clock: the local exchange

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


824


Parameter

Value Range


Default Value

Description clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS): lower than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812 but higher than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS. l SETS Clock: the clock signal of the SETS. l Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable: lower than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS but higher than the quality level unavailable in the synchronous timing source.

A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the SSM Output tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


825




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Line Port

-

-

l This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. l Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE.

Output S1 Byte Info

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

l Output S1 Byte Info is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output S1 Byte Info indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set Output S1 Byte Info to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.

A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Clock ID Output tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


826




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Line Port

-

-

l This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. l Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE.

Enabled

Output Clock ID

Enabled

Disabled

l Output Clock ID is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output Clock ID indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. l If the line ports are connected to the NEs in the same clock subnet and if the extended SSM protocol is started on the opposite NE, Output Clock ID is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to Disabled.

A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


827



Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching.

2.

Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-


Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion

Auto-Revertive

Auto-Revertive

l When the quality of a higher-priority clock source degrades, the NE automatically switches the clock source to a lowerpriority clock source. If this parameter is set to Auto-Revertive, the NE automatically switches the clock source to the higherpriority clock source when this higherpriority clock source restores. If this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE does not automatically switch the clock source to the higher-priority clock source when this higher-priority clock source restores.

Non-Revertive

l Correct setting of Clock Source Switching Condition ensures the reliability of the clock source switching. To improve the clock quality, select AutoRevertive. Otherwise, to prevent jitter of the clock, generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Non-Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


828



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source WTR Time(min.)

0 to 12

5

l This parameter specifies the duration from the time when the clock source restoration is detected to the time when the clock source switching is triggered. This parameter is used to avoid frequent switching of the clock source due to instability of the clock source state within a short time. l This parameter is valid only when Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion is set to AutoRevertive.

A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.

2.

Click the Clock Source Switching tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Source

-

-

This parameter indicates the name of the clock source.

Current Status

Valid

-

This parameter indicates whether the clock source is valid.

Invalid

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


829



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Lock Status

Lock

-

l This parameter specifies the locking status of the clock source in the priority table.

Unlock

l Lock: A clock source in the priority table is in the locked state. The clock source in the locked state cannot be switched. l Unlock: A clock source in the priority table is in the unlocked state. The clock source in the unlocked state can be switched. Switching Source

-

-

This parameter indicates the clock source to be traced by the NE after the switching.

Switching Status

Normal

-

This parameter indicates the switching status of the current clock source.

Manual Switching Forced Switching

A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-

Displays the name of the NE.

Clock Source

-

-

Displays the clock source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


830



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

AIS Alarm

Yes

No


No

l When this parameter is set to Yes, it indicates that clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the AIS alarm. l When this parameter is set to No, it indicates that no clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the AIS alarm. B1 BER ThresholdCrossing

-

-

The parameter is invalid.

RLOS,RLOF and OOF/ RLOC Alarms

Yes

Yes

This parameter indicates that clock switching occurs when the clock source reports the RLOS, RLOF, OOF, or LOC alarm.

CV Threshold-Crossing

-

-


CV Threshold

-

-


B2-EXC Alarm

Yes

No


No

l When this parameter is set to Yes, it indicates that clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the B2-EXC alarm. l When this parameter is set to No, it indicates that no clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the B2-EXC alarm.

A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


831



Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

2M Phase-Locked Source Number

External Clock Source 1

-

This parameter indicates the number of the external clock source output of the NE.

External Clock Output Mode

2Mbit/s

2Mbit/s

l This parameter specifies the mode of the output clock.

External Clock Source 2

2MHz

l This parameter needs to be set according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. External Clock Output Timeslot

SA4 to SA8

ALL

ALL

l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the output clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l If this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that all the bits of the TS0 are used to transmit the SSM. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


832



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

External Source Output Threshold

Threshold Disabled

Threshold Disabled

l This parameter specifies the lowest quality of the output clock. If the clock quality is lower than the value of this parameter, it indicates that the external clock source does not output any clock signal.

Not Inferior to G.813 SETS Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Local Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal

l If this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the external clock source always outputs the clock signal. l It is recommended that you use the default value. 2M Phase-Locked Source Failure Condition

No Failure Condition

No Failure Condition

AIS LOF AIS OR LOF

l This parameter specifies the failure condition of the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

2M Phase-Locked Source Failure Action

Shut Down Output

Shut Down Output

2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable Send AIS

l This parameter is valid only when 2M PhaseLocked Source Failure Condition is not set to No Failure Condition. l This parameter specifies the operation of the 2 Mbit/s phaselocked loop (PLL) when the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source meets the failure conditions. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


833



A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

NE Name

-

-


NE Clock Mode

-

-

This parameter indicates the working mode of the NE clock.

S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Info

-

-

This parameter indicates the synchronization quality information of the S1 byte.

S1 Byte Clock Synchronous Source

-

-

This parameter indicates the clock synchronization source of the S1 byte.

Synchronous Source

-

-

This parameter indicates the synchronization source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


834



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Data Output Method in Holdover Mode

Normal Data Output

Normal Data Output

l When all the reference timing signals are lost, the slave clock changes to the holdover mode. At this time, the slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost. Then, the frequency of the oscillator drifts slowly to ensure that the offset between the frequency of the slave clock and the reference frequency is very small. As a result, the impact caused by the drift is limited within the specified requirement.

Keep the Latest Data

l Normal Data Output: The slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost, and the holdover duration depends on the size of the phase-locked clock register on the equipment. The holdover duration can be up to 24 hours. l Keep the Latest Data: The slave clock works in holdover mode all the time based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost.

A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


835



A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

ACR Clock Source

-

-

Identifies the ACR clock domain.

CES Service

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the CES service that the master ACR clock source uses.

Track Mode

-

-

This parameter displays the trace mode of an ACR clock source.

Lock Status

-

-

This parameter displays whether an ACR clock source is locked.

Current CES Service

-

-

This parameter displays the CES service from which the current ACR clock source is obtained.

A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Domain

-

-

Displays the clock domain.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


836



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Domain Board

-

-

Displays the board where the clock domain is located.

Clock Port

-

-

Displays the Smart E1 ports that are bound to a clock domain.

A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.

Navigation Path 1.

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.

2.

Click New.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Clock Domain

System Clock Domain

System Clock Domain

Specifies the clock domain to be bound.

CES ACR1 Clock Domain CES ACR2 Clock Domain CES ACR3 Clock Domain CES ACR4 Clock Domain Clock Domain Board

-

-

Displays the board where the clock domain is located.

Board

-

-

Specifies the board where the Smart E1 port is located.

Available Port

-

-

Displays the Smart E1 ports that are not bound to a clock domain.

Selected Port

-

-

Displays the Smart E1 ports that are bound to a clock domain.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


837



A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485 monitoring port.

Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Auxiliary Interface from the Function Tree.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Port

-

-

Displays the port that functions as the auxiliary port.

Interface Mode

1st external clock

1st external clock

Specifies the working mode of the auxiliary port.

2nd external clock 1st external time 2nd external time MON Orderwire S1/F1 Commissioning serial port

l If the running status of the outdoor cabinet needs to be monitored, set Interface Mode to MON. l For an external time input/output port, set Interface Mode to 1st external time or 2nd external time.

A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path 1.

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.

2.

Click the General tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


838




Value Range

Default Value

Description

Call Waiting Time (s)

1 to 9

9

l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. l The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode

Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency

Conference Call

-

Dual-Tone Frequency

This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone.

888

l This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950 receives the call, the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


839



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Phone 1

100 to 99999999

101

l This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. l The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number. l The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs. l The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.

Available Orderwire Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone.

Selected Orderwire Port

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.

A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Advanced tab.

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Orderwire Occupied Bytes

E1

E1

l This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals.

E2

l Regardless the parameter value, the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


840



A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the F1 Data Port tab.


Value Range

Default Value

Description

Available Data Path

-

-

l This parameter indicates the available F1 data channel. l Two data channels should be selected for the configuration.

Number

-

-

This parameter indicates the number of the F1 data port.

Data Channel 1

-

-

l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line port. l If an IF port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the customized F1 byte in the microwave frame at the IF port. l If F1 is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the AUX board. The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.

Data Channel 2

A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.

Navigation Path 1.


2.

Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


841



Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Overhead Byte

SERIAL1 to SERIAL4

SERIAL1

l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. l In the case of a radio link, a customized serial overhead byte in the microwave frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.

-

Broadcast Data Source

No Data

l When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding AUX board is used. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. l When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.

Available Broadcast Data Sink

-

-

This parameter indicates the available broadcast data sink.

Selected Broadcast Data Sink

-

-

l When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding AUX board is used. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. l When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

Navigation Path Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


842



Parameters for the General Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Operation Object

-

-

This parameter indicates the operation object.

Relay Control Mode

Auto Control

Auto Control

l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the alarming relay is started up automatically. Otherwise, the alarming relay is shut down.

Manual Control

l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set. Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0)

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for major alarms. l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON" status for major alarms. l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF" status for major alarms. l This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.

Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1)

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for critical alarms. l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled status for critical alarms. l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled status for critical alarms. l This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.

Parameters for the Input Relay Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Operation Object

-

-


Path Name

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the channel.

Using Status

Unused

Unused

This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the input relay is used.

Used

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


843



Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Alarm Mode

Relay Turns Off/ High Level

Relay Turns Off/ High Level

l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns Off/High Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned off.

Relay Turns On/ Low Level

l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns On/Low Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned on. l This parameter is valid only when Using Status is set to Used.

Alarm Severity

Critical Alarm

Critical Alarm

This parameter specifies the severity of the alarm that is generated at the input relay.

Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm

Parameters for the Output Relay Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Operation Object

-

-


Path Name

-

-

This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the output channel.

Use or Not

Unused

Unused

This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the output relay is used.

Used

Parameters for the Temperature Attributes Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Operation Object

-

-


Monitor Status

-

-

This parameter indicates whether the temperature attribute is monitored.

Temperature Upper Threshold (DEG.C)

-

-

This parameter indicates the upper temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is higher than the preset value, an alarm is generated.

Temperature Lower Threshold (DEG.C)

-

-

This parameter indicates the lower temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is lower than the preset value, an alarm is generated.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


844



Parameters for the Alarm Relay Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description

Alarm Severity

Critical Alarm

-

This parameter indicates the severity of the alarm.

CSK-1

This parameter specifies the channel of the output alarm relay.

Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm Alarm Output Channel

CSK-1 CSK-2 CSK-3 CSK-4

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


845


B Board Loopback Types

B

Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types. Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support Board

Loopback Type

Remarks

SL1D/SL1DA

l Inloops at optical ports

-

l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops on VC-4 paths l Outloops on VC-4 paths SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1

l Inloops at E1 tributary ports

-

l Outloops at E1 tributary ports EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA

l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

-

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports EFP8

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)

-

l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports excluding port 10 (bridging port) l Inloops on VC-12 paths

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


846


B Board Loopback Types

Board

Loopback Type

Remarks

EMS6

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports)

-

l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports excluding port 8 (bridging port) l Inloops on VC-3 paths IF1

l Inloops at IF ports

-

l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports IFU2/IFX2

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports

-

l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports ISU2/ISX2

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports

-

l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


847


C Indicators of Boards

C

Indicators of Boards

Indicators of Boards Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CST Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


PROG





On (green)



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)



848


Indicator


State

Meaning

On (red)


SYNC

SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


ACT

On (green)


Off


Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


849



Indicator

State

Meaning

PROG





On (green)




On (red)


SYNC

SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


ACT

On (green)


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


850


Indicator


State

Meaning

Off


Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (yellow)




On (yellow)


Off



851



Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT

On (green)


Off


Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (yellow)




On (yellow)



852


Indicator

ACT


State

Meaning

Off


On (green)


Off


Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (yellow)





853



Indicator

State

Meaning

RMT

On (yellow)


Off


On (green)

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one.

ACT

l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. Off


Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2 Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)


On (red)


Off


On (green)


On (red)


Off

l The board is not working.

STAT

l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV

LINK

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)



854


Indicator

ODU


State

Meaning

On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

ACT

On (yellow)




On (yellow)


Off


On (green)


Off


Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator

State

Meaning

XPIC

On (green)


On (red)


Off


On (green)


On (red)


STAT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


855


Indicator


State

Meaning

Off


SRV

LINK

ODU

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


On (green)


On (red)


On (green)


On (red)


RMT

ACT

On (yellow)




On (yellow)


Off


On (green)


Off


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


856



Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

PROG

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off






On (green)




On (red)


LINK1a

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


Blinking (green)


Off



857



Indicator

State

Meaning

LINK2a

On (green)


Blinking (green)


Off


NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

PROG

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off






On (green)



Issue 01 (2011-10-30)



858


Indicator


State

Meaning

On (red)

The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a

L/A2a

On (green)


Blinking (yellow)


Off


On (green)


Blinking (yellow)


Off


NOTE

a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


PROG

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)






859


Indicator


State

Meaning

On (green)

l The upper layer software is being initialized during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The software is running properly during the running process of the board.



On (red)


SRV

LINK1

ACT1

LINK2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)

The system is working normally.

On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


On (green)






Off


Blinking (yellow)


Off


On (green)






Off



860



Indicator

State

Meaning

ACT2

Blinking (yellow)


Off


Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


PROG





On (green)




On (red)


SRV

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)



861


Indicator


State

Meaning

Off


Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

LOS1

LOS2

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


On (red)

The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms.

On (red)

The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off

The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms.

Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)



862



Indicator

State

Meaning

On (red)


Off


SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)


Off


SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Indicator

State

Meaning

STAT

On (green)


On (red)



863


Indicator


State

Meaning

Off


SRV

On (green)


On (red)


On (yellow)


Off


Table C-16 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator

Status

Description

PWR

On (green)

The power supply is connected.

Off

There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.

Table C-17 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator

State

Meaning

FAN

On (green)

The fan is working properly.

On (red)

The fan is faulty.

Off

The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

NOTE

The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the subrack.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


864


D

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board Board

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Weight (kg)

Power Consumption (W)

CST

0.72 kg

< 20.7 W

CSH

0.74 kg

< 25.3 W

IF1

0.72 kg

< 12.0 W

IFU2

0.79 kg

< 23.0 W

IFX2

0.80 kg

< 33.0 W

ISU2

0.60 kg

< 22.0 W

ISX2

0.60 kg

< 23.0 W

EM6T

0.37 kg

< 10.4 W

EM6TA

0.40 kg

< 16.2 W

EM6F

0.40 kg

< 11.3 W

EM6FA

0.40 kg

< 15.4 W

EMS6

0.50 kg

< 16.5 W

EFP8

0.60 kg

< 13.5 W

SL1D

0.30 kg

< 3.4 W

SL1DA

0.30 kg

< 3.3 W

ML1

0.45 kg

< 7.0 W

MD1

0.50 kg

< 12.2 W


865


Board SP3S

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Weight (kg)

Power Consumption (W)

0.50 kg(VER.B)

< 5.7 W(VER.B)

0.40 kg(VER.C)

< 4.8 W(VER.C)

0.64 kg(VER.B)

< 9.6 W(VER.B)

0.54 kg(VER.C)

< 8.3 W(VER.C)

AUX

0.27 kg

< 1.3 W

PIU

0.12 kg

< 0.5 W

FAN

0.30 kg

< 4.1 W (room temperature)

SP3D

< 29.6 W (high temperature)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

TCU6

0.27 kg

-

Empty chassis (with only the backplane)

2.80 kg

-


866


E Glossary

E

Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. E.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. E.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. E.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. E.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. E.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. E.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


867


E Glossary

E.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1U

The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

E.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A ABR

See available bit rate

ACAP

See adjacent channel alternate polarization

access control list

A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource.

ACL

See access control list

adaptive modulation

A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.

ADC

See analog to digital converter

add/drop multiplexer

Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Address Resolution Protocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.

adjacent channel alternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM

See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit

The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.

AF

See assured forwarding

aggregation

A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


868


AIS

E Glossary

See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading

The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm Filtering

An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm suppression

A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board.

AM

See adaptive modulation

analog to digital converter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS

See automatic protection switching

ARP

See Address Resolution Protocol

assured forwarding

One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATM

See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM PVC

ATM permanent virtual circuit

ATPC

See automatic transmit power control

attenuator

A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

AU

See administrative unit

automatic protection switching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatic transmit power control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver

available bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


869


E Glossary

B backward defect indication

When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth

A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

base station controller

A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. basic input/output system

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

BDI

See backward defect indication

BE

See best effort

BER

See bit error rate

best effort

A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.

binding strap

The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).

BIOS

See basic input/output system

BIP

See bit interleaved parity

bit error

An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate

Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parity

A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.

BPDU

See bridge protocol data unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


870


E Glossary

bridge protocol data unit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

broadcast

A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.

BSC

See base station controller

BTS

See base transceiver station

buffer

A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

C cable tie

The tape used to bind the cables.

cable tray

N/A

cable trough

N/A

CAR

See committed access rate

CBR

See constant bit rate

CBS

See committed burst size

CC

See connectivity check

CCC

See circuit cross connect

CCDP

See co-channel dual polarization

CCM

See continuity check message

CE

See customer edge

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. CES

See circuit emulation service

CF

See compact flash

CGMP

See Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel

A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


871


E Glossary

CIR

See committed information rate

circuit cross connect

An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.

circuit emulation service

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.

Cisco Group Management Protocol

N/A

CIST

See common and internal spanning tree

CIST root

A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.

clock tracing

The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.

co-channel dual polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization.

coarse wavelength division multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.

colored packet

A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.

committed access rate

A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.

committed burst size

committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree

The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.

compact flash

Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure.

concatenation

A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

connectivity check

Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


872


E Glossary

constant bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

continuity check message

CCM is used to detect the link status.

corrugated pipe

Used to protect optical fibers.

CPU

See central processing unit

CRC

See cyclic redundancy check

cross polarization interference cancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

customer edge

A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM

See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancy check

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D data communication network

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).

data communications channel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

Datagram

A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram.

DC

See direct current

DC-C

See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C

DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C

See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-I

See DC-return isolate (with ground)


A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.


A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


873


E Glossary

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC

See data communications channel

DCN

See data communication network

DDF

See digital distribution frame

DDN

See digital data network

DE

See discard eligible

differentiated services

A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.

differentiated services code point

A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.

DiffServ

See differentiated services

digital data network

A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.

digital distribution frame

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital modulation

A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.

direct current

Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

discard eligible

A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.

DS boundary node

A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable.

DS domain

In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.

DS interior node

A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.

DS node

A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP

See differentiated services code point

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


874


E Glossary

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP

See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E E-Aggr

See Ethernet aggregation

E-LAN

See Ethernet LAN

E-Line

See Ethernet line

E-Tree

See Ethernet-tree

EBS

See excess burst size

ECC

See embedded control channel

EF

See expedited forwarding

electromagnetic compatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagnetic interference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge

The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

embedded control channel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.

EMC

See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI

See electromagnetic interference

Engineering label

A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

EPL

See Ethernet private line

EPLAN

See Ethernet private LAN service

equalization

A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS

See Ethernet ring protection switching

ESD

See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack

Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

Ethernet

A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Ethernet

A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


875


E Glossary

Ethernet aggregation

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet LAN

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet line

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).

Ethernet private LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line

A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet ring protection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

Ethernet virtual private LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet virtual private line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet-tree

An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection.

ETS

European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI

See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

European Telecommunications Standards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

EVPL

See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN

See Ethernet virtual private LAN service

excess burst size

A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Exercise Switching

An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed.

expansion

Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, expanding the capacity of the storage system.

expedited forwarding

The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


876


E Glossary

E.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F failure

If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected.

fast Ethernet

Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers).

fast link pulse

The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FD

See frequency diversity

FDI

See forward defect indication

FE

See fast Ethernet

FEC

See forward error correction

FFD

fast failure detection

fiber patch cord

A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.

field programmable gate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.

FIFO

See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol

A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out

A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Forced switch

For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward defect indication

Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

forward error correction

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


877


E Glossary

Forwarding plane

Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.

FPGA

See field programmable gate array

fragment

Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.

Fragmentation

Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet.

frame

A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.

frequency diversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP

See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex

A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.

G gateway network element

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer

GE

See gigabit Ethernet

generic framing procedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP

See generic framing procedure

gigabit Ethernet

GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global Positioning System

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users.

GNE

See gateway network element

GPS

See Global Positioning System

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


878


E Glossary

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS

See generic traffic shaping

GUI

See graphical user interface

guide rail

Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H HA

See high availability

half-duplex

A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying.

HDLC

See high level data link control

hierarchical quality of service

A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.

high availability

Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module.

high level data link control

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header.

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology.

higher order path

In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers.

Hold priority

The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

hop

A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot standby

A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system.

HP

See higher order path

HQoS

See hierarchical quality of service

HSB

See hot standby

HSDPA

See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


879


E Glossary

HSM

hitless switch mode

HTB

high tributary bus

hybrid radio

The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.

I ICMP

See Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU

See indoor unit

IEC

See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE

See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF

See Internet Engineering Task Force

IF

See intermediate frequency

IGMP

See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP snooping

A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IMA

See inverse multiplexing over ATM

indoor unit

The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Inloop

A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System

The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree

A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.

International Electrotechnical Commission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.

International Organization for Standardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


880


E Glossary

International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet Control Message Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet Engineering Task Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet Group Management Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol

The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet protocol version 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Internet protocol version 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

inverse multiplexing over ATM

The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.

IP

See Internet Protocol

IPV6

See Internet protocol version 6

IPv6

See Internet protocol version 6

IS-IS

See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol

ISO

See International Organization for Standardization

IST

See internal spanning tree

ITU-T

See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


881


E Glossary

J Jitter

Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

E.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L L2VPN

See Layer 2 virtual private network

label switched path

A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

label switching router

Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.

LACP

See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG

See link aggregation group

LAN

See local area network

LAN

See local area network

LAPS

link access protocol-SDH

Laser

A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.

layer 2 switch

A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB

See loopback

LCAS

See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCT

local craft terminal

line rate

The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

line rate forwarding

The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


882


E Glossary

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Protection

Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.

LMSP

linear multiplex section protection

local area network

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

local area network

A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching

When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel.

LOF

See Loss Of Frame

LOM

loss of multiframe

loopback

A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP

See loss of pointer

LOS

See Loss Of Signal

Loss Of Frame

A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

loss of pointer

Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal

Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal.

LP

lower order path

LPT

link-state pass through

LSP

See label switched path

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


883


LSR

E Glossary

See label switching router

M MA

See maintenance association

MAC

See media access control

MAC

See media access control

MADM

multiple add/drop multiplexer

main topology

A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the humanmachine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenance association

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.

maintenance association end point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

maintenance domain

The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point

Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

management information base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.

manual switch

Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS

maximum burst size

MCF

See message communication function

MD

See maintenance domain

MDI

See medium dependent interface

Mean Time Between Failures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.

Mean Time To Repair

The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


884


E Glossary

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

medium dependent interface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission.

MEP

See maintenance association end point

MEP

maintenance end point

message communication function

The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs.

MIB

See management information base

MIP

maintenance intermediate point

mounting ear

A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.

MP

See maintenance point

MPID

maintenance point identification

MPLS

See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MPLS L2VPN

The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.

MPLS OAM

The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.

MPLS TE

See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


885


E Glossary

MPLS TE tunnel

In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object.

MS

See multiplex section

MSP

See multiplex section protection

MSTP

See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF

See Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR

See Mean Time To Repair

MTU

See maximum transmission unit

Multicast

A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex section

The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.

multiplex section protection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.

Multiprotocol Label Switching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.

multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

N/A

N N+1 protection

A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel.

NE

See network element

NE Explorer

The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


886


network element

E Glossary

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.

Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network to network interface

An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.

next hop

The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination.

NLP

normal link pulse

NMS

See Network Management System

NNI

See network to network interface

node

A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.

Node Protection

A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR.

non-gateway network element

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE

See non-gateway network element

NSAP

See network service access point

NSF

not stop forwarding

O OAM

See operation, administration and maintenance

ODF

See optical distribution frame

ODU

See outdoor unit

OM

Operation and maintenance

One-to-One Backup

A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR.

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


887


E Glossary

Open Systems Interconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation, administration and maintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.

optic fiber connector

A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector).+

optical distribution frame

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

orderwire

A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI

See Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF

See open shortest path first

outdoor unit

The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

Outloop

A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals.

Output optical power

The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

E.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P packet switched network

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case

A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path

A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects.

PBS

See peak burst size

PCB

See printed circuit board

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


888


E Glossary

PCI bus

PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.

PDH

See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDU

See protocol data unit

PE

See provider edge

peak burst size

A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate

A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate.

penultimate hop popping

Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).

per-hop behavior

IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

PHB

See per-hop behavior

PHP

See penultimate hop popping

PIR

See peak information rate

PLA

physical link aggregation

plesiochronous digital hierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization

A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Power box

A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP

See Point-to-Point Protocol

PQ

See priority queue

PRBS

See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC

primary reference clock

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


889


E Glossary

printed circuit board

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.

priority queue

An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it

protection ground cable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path

A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol data unit

It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.

provider edge

A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire

An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSN

See packet switched network

PTN

packet transport network

PW

See pseudo wire

PWE3

See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q QinQ

A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

QoS

See quality of service

QPSK

See quadrature phase shift keying

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


890


quality of service

E Glossary

A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.

R radio frequency

A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current.

radio network controller

A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.

RDI

See remote defect indication

received signal level

The signal level at a receiver input terminal.

Received Signal Strength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

Receiver Sensitivity

Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).

RED

See random early detection

Reed-Solomon-Code

A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site.

REI

See remote error indication

remote defect indication

A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


891


E Glossary

Resource Reservation Protocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

reverse pressure

A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate.

RF

See radio frequency

RFC

See Request For Comments

RIP

See Routing Information Protocol

RMON

remote network monitoring

RMON

remote network monitoring

RNC

See radio network controller

Root alarm

An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm.

route

A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

route table

A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table.

Routing Information Protocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

routing table

A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

RSL

See received signal level

RSSI

See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP

See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP

See Resource Reservation Protocol

RTN

radio transmission node

S SD

See space diversity

SDH

See synchronous digital hierarchy

SEMF

See synchronous equipment management function

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


892


E Glossary

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service Level Agreement *

A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure.

SES

See severely errored second

Setup Priority

The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction). SF

See signal fail

SFP

See small form-factor pluggable

side trough

The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet.

signal cable

Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.

signal fail

A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio

The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple Network Management Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

simplex

Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.

SLA

See service level agreement

SLA*

See Service Level Agreement *

Slicing

To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.

small form-factor pluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC

See subnetwork connection

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


893


E Glossary

SNCP

See subnetwork connection protection

SNMP

See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR

See signal to noise ratio

space diversity

A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM

See Synchronization Status Message

static virtual circuit

Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM

See Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1

See synchronous transport mode-1

STM-N

See synchronous transport module of order N

STP

See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network

Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment under their management.

subnet mask

The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC

See static virtual circuit

switch

To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


894


E Glossary

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronous digital hierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronous equipment management function

The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.

synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64. module of order N

T tail drop

A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.

Tail drop

A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.

TCI

tag control information

TCP

See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM

See time division multiplexing

TE

See traffic engineering

TEDB

See traffic engineering database

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


895


E Glossary

TIM

trace identifier mismatch

time division multiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.

time to live

A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TMN

See Telecommunication Management Network

ToS priority

A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.

TPS

See tributary protection switch

traffic engineering

A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.

traffic engineering database

TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network.

Traffic shaping

It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.

Transmission Control Protocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.

tributary protection switch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

trTCM

See two rate three color marker

TTL

See time to live

TU

tributary unit

Tunnel

A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


896


two rate three color marker

E Glossary

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.

E.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U U-VLAN

A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.

UAS

unavailable second

UBR

See unspecified bit rate

UDP

See User Datagram Protocol

underfloor cabling

The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI

See user network interface

unicast

The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

unspecified bit rate

No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.

upload

An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.

User Datagram Protocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).

V V-UNI

See virtual user-network interface

variable bit rate

One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

VBR

See variable bit rate

VC

See virtual container

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


897


E Glossary

VCC

See virtual channel connection

VCG

See virtual concatenation group

VCI

See virtual channel identifier

VCTRUNK

A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board

virtual channel connection

The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.

virtual channel identifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination.

virtual concatenation group

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link

virtual container

The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.

virtual local area network

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier

The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs.

virtual private LAN service

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual route forward

VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device.

virtual user-network interface

A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS.

VLAN

See virtual local area network

voice over IP

An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP

See voice over IP

VPI

See virtual path identifier

VPLS

See virtual private LAN service

VPN

See virtual private network

VRF

See virtual route forward

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


898


E Glossary

W wait to restore

The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.

WAN

See wide area network

Web LCT

The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network

weighted fair queuing

A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ

See weighted fair queuing

wide area network

A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country.

winding pipe

A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

WRED

See weighted random early detection

WRR

See weighted round Robin

WTR

See wait to restore

X XPIC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

See cross polarization interference cancellation


899

RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description-(V100R003C03_01)

Recommend Documents